35 Monitor de Signos Vitales Nihon Kohden PVM 2703 PDF

User’s Guide
Bedside Monitor
PVM-2701/PVM-2703
0614-904396E
In order to use this product safely and fully understand all its functions, make sure to read this manual before using the
product.
Keep this manual near the instrument or in the reach of the operator and refer to it whenever the operation is unclear.
This product stores personal patient information. Manage and operate the information appropriately.
Patient names on the screen shots and recording examples in this manual are fictional and any resemblance to any
person living or dead is purely coincidental.
The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
If you have any comments or suggestions on this manual, please contact us at: www.nihonkohden.com
Copyright Notice
The entire contents of this manual are copyrighted by Nihon Kohden. All rights are reserved. No part of this document
may be reproduced, stored, or transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopied, recorded,
or otherwise) without the prior written permission of Nihon Kohden.
Trademark
The mark printed on the SD card that is used in this instrument is a trademark. The company name and model name are
trademarks and registered trademarks of each company.
Contents 1
GENERAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................. i 3

WARRANTY POLICY.......................................................................................................... ii
EMC RELATED CAUTION...................................................................................................iii 4
Conventions Used in this Manual and Instrument............................................................... v
Warnings, Cautions and Notes.................................................................................. v 5
Text Conventions in this Manual................................................................................ v
Explanations of the Symbols in this Manual and Instrument ................................... vi
6
Related Documentation.....................................................................................................viii
7
Safety Standards...............................................................................................................viii
Safety Information..............................................................................................................viii
8
Periodic Inspection.............................................................................................................. ix
9
Section 1 General.................................................................................... 1.1 10

Introduction....................................................................................................................... 1.2
Features............................................................................................................................ 1.3 11
Composition...................................................................................................................... 1.4
Panel Description.............................................................................................................. 1.5 12
Front Panel............................................................................................................. 1.5
Left Side Panel....................................................................................................... 1.5
13
Right Side Panel..................................................................................................... 1.6
14
Rear Panel.............................................................................................................. 1.6
Basic Operating Concepts................................................................................................ 1.7
15
Screen Displays...................................................................................................... 1.7
Using Touch Screen Keys..................................................................................... 1.12 16
Keys on the Bedside Monitor................................................................................ 1.13
Using MENU Window........................................................................................... 1.13
Guide Window................................................................................................................. 1.14
Section 2 Preparation............................................................................. 2.1

Preparation Flowchart....................................................................................................... 2.2
Installation Conditions....................................................................................................... 2.3
Inserting and Removing the Battery Pack........................................................................ 2.5
Battery Handling and Operation............................................................................. 2.5
Safety Information........................................................................................ 2.5
Battery Handling Precautions....................................................................... 2.6
When Not Using the Monitor or Battery........................................................ 2.6
Inserting and Removing the Battery Packs............................................................ 2.6
Inserting the Battery Pack...................................................................................... 2.7
Removing the Battery Pack.................................................................................... 2.8
Preparing the Optional Recorder Module......................................................................... 2.9
Installing the Recorder Module............................................................................... 2.9
Loading Recording Paper....................................................................................... 2.9
Attaching the Transmitter................................................................................................ 2.11
User’s Guide PVM-2700 C.1

CONTENTS
Power.............................................................................................................................. 2.12
Connecting the Power Cord and Grounding the Monitor...................................... 2.12
Connecting the Power Cord........................................................................ 2.12
Grounding the Monitor................................................................................ 2.13
Turning the Monitor Power On.............................................................................. 2.13
Check Before Turning On the Power.......................................................... 2.13
Turning the Power On................................................................................. 2.14
Check After Turning On the Power and During Monitoring......................... 2.15
Power and Battery Status Indications................................................................... 2.16
When the “BATTERY WEAK” Message Appears....................................... 2.17
Charging the Battery.................................................................................. 2.17
Monitor Status on Power Interruption................................................................... 2.18
Turning the Monitor Power Off.............................................................................. 2.18
Check After/Before Turning the Power Off.................................................. 2.18
Section 3 Necessary Settings Before Monitoring................................ 3.1

Changing Date and Time.................................................................................................. 3.2
Changing Sound Volume Settings.................................................................................... 3.3
Changing the Screen Brightness...................................................................................... 3.5
Changing Waveform Sweep Speed.................................................................................. 3.6
Admitting/Discharging a Patient........................................................................................ 3.7
Displaying the ADMIT DISCHARGE Window......................................................... 3.8
Entering the Patient ID............................................................................................ 3.9
Entering the Patient Name.................................................................................... 3.10
Entering the Patient Name Using the Keyboard......................................... 3.10
Entering the Patient Name Using Free Function........................................ 3.11
Selecting Patient Type.......................................................................................... 3.12
Importing Patient Information from the Hospital Network..................................... 3.13
Admitting a Patient.......................................................................................................... 3.14
Discharging a Patient...................................................................................................... 3.15
Suspended Alarms after Admission or Discharge................................................ 3.16
Section 4 Home Screen.......................................................................... 4.1

Safety Precautions for Monitoring..................................................................................... 4.3
Using an Electrosurgical Unit................................................................................. 4.3
Using a Defibrillator................................................................................................ 4.3
Overview........................................................................................................................... 4.4
Home Screen.......................................................................................................... 4.4
Review Windows..................................................................................................... 4.4
Sync Sound............................................................................................................ 4.4
Adjusting the Sync and Alarm Sound Volume........................................................ 4.4
Changing Settings and Performing Other Tasks During Monitoring....................... 4.5
Recording on the Home Screen............................................................................. 4.5
Home Screen.................................................................................................................... 4.6
Settings for the Home Screen................................................................................. 4.7
Waveform Sweep Speed.............................................................................. 4.7
Parameter Colors......................................................................................... 4.7
C.2 User’s Guide PVM-2700

CONTENTS
Waveform Sensitivity.................................................................................... 4.8 1

Numeric Parameter Display Area (On the DISPLAY window of the
SYSTEM SETUP window)........................................................................... 4.8 2
Displaying Other Windows from the Home Screen................................................. 4.9
Freezing Waveforms....................................................................................................... 4.10 3
Using Sleep Mode.......................................................................................................... 4.11
Turning Sleep Mode On........................................................................................ 4.12 4
Turning Sleep Mode Off........................................................................................ 4.12
Displaying the LARGE NUMERICS Screen.................................................................... 4.13 5
6
Section 5 Alarm Function....................................................................... 5.1
7
Overview of Alarms........................................................................................................... 5.3
What is an Alarm.................................................................................................... 5.3 8
Alarm Level............................................................................................................. 5.4
Alarm Priority.......................................................................................................... 5.4 9
Silencing/Suspending Alarms................................................................................. 5.4
Alarm Master.......................................................................................................... 5.4 10
Automatic Recording.............................................................................................. 5.5
Alarm Setting.......................................................................................................... 5.5 11
Canceling the Technical Alarm............................................................................... 5.5
Adjusting Alarm Sound Volume.............................................................................. 5.5 12
Alarm Activation after Power On............................................................................. 5.6
ALARM HISTORY Window..................................................................................... 5.6 13
Alarm Escalation..................................................................................................... 5.6
14
Alarm Types...................................................................................................................... 5.7
Vital Signs Alarms.................................................................................................. 5.7
15
Arrhythmia Alarms.................................................................................................. 5.7
Technical Alarms.................................................................................................... 5.8
16
ECG Related Alarms.................................................................................... 5.8
CO2 Related Alarms (PVM-2703 only)......................................................... 5.8
SpO2 Related Alarms................................................................................... 5.9
NIBP Related Alarms................................................................................... 5.9
IBP Related Alarms (PVM-2703 only).......................................................... 5.9
Temperature Related Alarms...................................................................... 5.10
Other Alarms.............................................................................................. 5.10
Interbed Alarms.................................................................................................... 5.10
Messages............................................................................................................. 5.11
ECG Related Messages............................................................................. 5.11
Respiration Related Messages.................................................................. 5.11
CO2 Related Messages (PVM-2703 only).................................................. 5.11
SpO2 Related Messages............................................................................ 5.11
NIBP Related Messages............................................................................ 5.12
IBP Related Message (PVM-2703 only)..................................................... 5.12
Other Messages......................................................................................... 5.12
Alarm Indications............................................................................................................ 5.13
Overview............................................................................................................... 5.13
Individual Alarm Indications.................................................................................. 5.13
Vital Signs Alarms...................................................................................... 5.14

CONTENTS
Arrhythmia Alarms...................................................................................... 5.17

Technical Alarms........................................................................................ 5.18
Other Alarms.............................................................................................. 5.20
Alarm Control Marks............................................................................................. 5.21
Individual Vital Signs Alarm Off Marks....................................................... 5.21
Flow of Alarm Function......................................................................................... 5.22
Silencing and Suspending Alarms.................................................................................. 5.23
Overview............................................................................................................... 5.23
Silencing an Alarm..................................................................................... 5.23
Suspending Alarms.................................................................................... 5.23
Silencing Alarms After Alarm Occurrence............................................................ 5.25
Silencing Alarms......................................................................................... 5.26
Canceling Alarm Silence............................................................................ 5.26
Suspending Alarms Before Alarm Occurrence..................................................... 5.26
Suspending Alarms.................................................................................... 5.26
Suspending All Alarms Indefinitely............................................................. 5.27
Suspending All Alarms and NIBP STAT and Auto Measurement
Indefinitely.................................................................................................. 5.28
Turning Automatic Alarm Recording On/Off.................................................................... 5.30
Setting Alarms................................................................................................................ 5.32
Overview............................................................................................................... 5.32
Alarm Limits Ranges............................................................................................ 5.32
Vital Signs Alarms...................................................................................... 5.33
Arrhythmia Alarms...................................................................................... 5.36
Setting Vital Signs Alarms Individually.................................................................. 5.37
Automatically Setting All Upper and Lower Alarm Limits (Including ST).............. 5.38
Automatic Setting Range............................................................................ 5.38
Setting All Vital Signs Alarms to a Preset Pattern (Alarm Master)........................ 5.39
Checking Arrhythmia Alarm Settings.................................................................... 5.41
Interbed Alarm................................................................................................................ 5.42
Checking the Alarm Function.......................................................................................... 5.43
Section 6 Review Windows.................................................................... 6.1

General............................................................................................................................. 6.3
Review Recording................................................................................................... 6.3
Time Bar........................................................................................................................... 6.4
Scrolling the Time Bar............................................................................................ 6.4
TREND TABLE Window.................................................................................................... 6.5
Overview................................................................................................................. 6.5
Displaying the TREND TABLE Window................................................................... 6.5
Scrolling the Trend Table............................................................................... 6.6
Selecting Parameters for the TREND TABLE Display............................................. 6.6
Selecting the Measurement Interval....................................................................... 6.7
Recording the Trend Table...................................................................................... 6.8
Printing a Trend Table................................................................................... 6.9
NIBP TABLE Window...................................................................................................... 6.11
Overview............................................................................................................... 6.11
Displaying the NIBP TABLE Window.................................................................... 6.11

CONTENTS
Scrolling the NIBP Trend Table................................................................... 6.12 1

Selecting Parameters for the NIBP Trend Display................................................ 6.12
Recording the NIBP Trend Table........................................................................... 6.13 2
Printing a NIBP Table................................................................................. 6.15
TREND GRAPH Window................................................................................................ 6.16 3
Overview............................................................................................................... 6.16
Displaying the TREND GRAPH Window............................................................... 6.17 4
Selecting Parameters for the Trendgraph Display................................................. 6.18
Changing the Trendgraph Scale........................................................................... 6.19 5
Changing the Trendgraph Display Format............................................................ 6.20
Recording the Trendgraph.................................................................................... 6.22
6
Printing the Trendgraph.............................................................................. 6.23
7
RECALL Window............................................................................................................ 6.25
General................................................................................................................. 6.25
8
Arrhythmia List............................................................................................ 6.25
Displaying the RECALL Window........................................................................... 6.27 9
Scrolling the Arrhythmia Recall Files.......................................................... 6.27
Selecting the Arrhythmia Types to be Saved as a Recall File............................... 6.28 10
Displaying the Actual Size Waveform of the Selected Arrhythmia Recall File...... 6.29
Arrhythmia Waveform Annotation............................................................... 6.29 11
Recording the Arrhythmia Recall Waveform......................................................... 6.30
Recording on the ARRHYTH HISTORY Window....................................... 6.30 12
Printing on the ARRHYTH HISTORY Window............................................ 6.31
Recording on the Actual Size ECG Waveform Window.............................. 6.32 13
Printing on the Actual Size ECG Waveform Window.................................. 6.33
Full Disclosure Window................................................................................................... 6.34 14
Displaying the FULL DISC Window...................................................................... 6.34
15
Scrolling the Full Disclosure Waveform................................................................ 6.37
Recording or Printing the Full Disclosure Waveform............................................ 6.37
16
Recording the Full Disclosure Waveform.................................................... 6.37
Printing the Full Disclosure Waveform........................................................ 6.38
Recording or Printing the Enlarged ECG Waveform............................................. 6.39
Recording the Enlarged ECG Waveform.................................................... 6.39
Printing the Enlarged ECG Waveform........................................................ 6.40
Alarm History Window.................................................................................................... 6.41
Displaying the ALARM HISTORY Window........................................................... 6.41
Scrolling the Alarm History Files.......................................................................... 6.42
Recording the Alarm History File.......................................................................... 6.42
Recording the Alarm History Files.............................................................. 6.42
OCRG Window............................................................................................................... 6.44
Displaying the OCRG Window.............................................................................. 6.44
Changing the OCRG Display Setting.................................................................... 6.45
Changing the Trendgraph Scale for Heart Rate and SpO2 and Sensitivity for
Respiration........................................................................................................... 6.46
Recording or Printing the OCRG Trend................................................................ 6.47
Recording the OCRG Trend....................................................................... 6.47
Printing the OCRG Trend............................................................................ 6.48

CONTENTS
Section 7 Interbed Window.................................................................... 7.1

Registering Interbed Beds................................................................................................ 7.3
Removing an Interbed Bed..................................................................................... 7.3
Displaying the Numeric Data of All Interbed Beds............................................................ 7.4
Displaying the Interbed Bed Data..................................................................................... 7.5
Interbed Alarm.................................................................................................................. 7.6
Interbed Alarm Setting............................................................................................ 7.7
Section 8 Recording............................................................................... 8.1

Overview of Recording..................................................................................................... 8.2
Recording Modes................................................................................................... 8.2
Manual Waveform Recording/Printing.......................................................... 8.4
Recording/Printing on the Review Windows................................................. 8.4
Periodic Recording....................................................................................... 8.4
Alarm Recording........................................................................................... 8.5
Recording on NIBP Measurement................................................................ 8.5
Recording Mode Annotations................................................................................. 8.5
Recording Priority................................................................................................... 8.6
Recording Sensitivity.............................................................................................. 8.6
Recording Speed.................................................................................................... 8.6
Recording Related Message.................................................................................. 8.6
Recorded Data....................................................................................................... 8.7
Changing the Recording Speed........................................................................................ 8.8
Changing the Recording Pattern...................................................................................... 8.9
Manually Recording/Printing Waveforms........................................................................ 8.10
Recording Waveforms on the Optional Recorder Module..................................... 8.10
Recording Waveforms on the Bedside Monitor with No Recorder........................ 8.11
Manual Printing on the Network Printer................................................................ 8.11
Setting Periodic Recording............................................................................................. 8.12
Changing Settings for Automatic Periodic Recording........................................... 8.12
Printing on a Network Printer.......................................................................................... 8.14
Recording on NIBP Measurement.................................................................................. 8.15
Section 9 ECG Monitoring...................................................................... 9.1

General............................................................................................................................. 9.2
Preparing for ECG Monitoring.......................................................................................... 9.3
Preparation Flowchart............................................................................................ 9.3
Number of Electrodes and Measuring Leads......................................................... 9.3
Electrode Position................................................................................................... 9.3
3 Electrode Leads........................................................................................ 9.3
6 Electrode Leads........................................................................................ 9.4
Electrode Positions for Detecting the Pacemaker Pulse......................................... 9.5
Changing the Electrode Lead....................................................................... 9.5
Changing the Electrode Positions................................................................ 9.5
Selecting Electrodes and Lead............................................................................... 9.6
Types of Electrodes and Lead...................................................................... 9.6
Connecting Cables and Attaching Disposable Electrodes...................................... 9.7
CONTENTS
Connecting the Electrode Cable to the Monitor............................................ 9.7 1

Attaching Disposable Electrodes to the Patient............................................ 9.8
Monitoring ECG................................................................................................................ 9.9 2
ECG Information on the Home Screen................................................................. 9.10
ECG Data Display................................................................................................. 9.10 3
Measuring ST Level.............................................................................................. 9.11
Detached Electrode Detection and Display.......................................................... 9.11 4
AC Interference and Display................................................................................. 9.12
Monitoring Arrhythmia..................................................................................................... 9.13 5
General................................................................................................................. 9.13
Arrhythmia Analysis Data Display.............................................................. 9.14
6
Changing Arrhythmia Monitoring Settings............................................................ 9.15
7
Turning Arrhythmia Analysis On or Off....................................................... 9.15
Selecting the Patient Type for QRS Detection............................................ 9.15
8
Learning the ECG Waveform for Arrhythmia Detection (VPC Learning).... 9.16
Checking the Dominant QRS..................................................................... 9.18 9
Changing ECG Settings.................................................................................................. 9.20
Changing the Monitoring Lead............................................................................. 9.21 10
Optimum Lead............................................................................................ 9.21
Changing a Lead........................................................................................ 9.22 11
Changing the ECG Sensitivity.............................................................................. 9.23
Changing the Heart Rate/Pulse Rate, VPC and ST Alarm Limits........................ 9.25 12
Checking Arrhythmia Alarm Settings.................................................................... 9.26
Turning ECG Measurement On or Off.................................................................. 9.28 13
Turning Pacing Spike Detection On or Off............................................................ 9.30
Changing the Number of Electrodes.................................................................... 9.32 14
Selecting the Filter Type....................................................................................... 9.33
15
Changing the Sync Sound Source....................................................................... 9.34
Use with an Electrosurgical Unit..................................................................................... 9.36
16
Section 10 Respiration Monitoring........................................................ 10.1

General........................................................................................................................... 10.2
Impedance Method............................................................................................... 10.2
Preparing for Respiration Monitoring in Impedance Method.......................................... 10.3
Preparation Flowchart.......................................................................................... 10.3
Electrode Position and Waveform Examples........................................................ 10.3
Electrode Position....................................................................................... 10.4
Amplitude................................................................................................... 10.4
Connecting Cables and Attaching Disposable Electrodes.................................... 10.5
Monitoring Respiration.................................................................................................... 10.6
Respiration Information on the Home Screen...................................................... 10.6
Changing Respiration Settings....................................................................................... 10.7
Changing the Monitoring Lead in Impedance Method.......................................... 10.7
Changing the Respiration Sensitivity.................................................................... 10.8
Turning Respiration Measurement On or Off in Impedance Method.................. 10.10
Changing the Respiration Rate and Apnea Alarm Limits................................... 10.11
Changing the Respiration Waveform Sweep Speed........................................... 10.13

CONTENTS
Section 11 CO2 Monitoring..................................................................... 11.1

General........................................................................................................................... 11.2
Mainstream Method.............................................................................................. 11.2
Measurement Error with the TG-900P/TG-920P CO2 Sensor Kit......................... 11.2
Use with Volatile Anesthetic Agents...................................................................... 11.4
Preparing for CO2 Monitoring.......................................................................................... 11.5
Mainstream Method.................................................................................... 11.5
Types of CO2 Sensor Kits for Mainstream Method............................................... 11.5
TG-900P CO2 Sensor Kit............................................................................ 11.6
TG-920P CO2 Sensor Kit............................................................................ 11.6
TG-950P CO2 Sensor Kit............................................................................ 11.8
TG-970P CO2 Sensor Kit............................................................................ 11.9
Connecting the CO2 Sensor Kit to the Monitor................................................... 11.10
Connecting the CO2 Sensor Kit to the Respiration Circuit.................................. 11.10
Performing Zero Calibration when Using a TG-950P/TG-970P CO2 Sensor
Kit....................................................................................................................... 11.10
Calibrating by Air...................................................................................... 11.11
Calibrating with N2 Gas............................................................................ 11.12
Monitoring CO2 ............................................................................................................. 11.13
CO2 Information on the Home Screen................................................................ 11.13
Changing CO2 Settings................................................................................................. 11.15
Changing the Scale............................................................................................ 11.15
Changing the CO2, Respiration Rate and Apnea Alarm Limits........................... 11.16
Setting the Inspiration Composition.................................................................... 11.17
Changing the CO2 Waveform Sweep Speed...................................................... 11.19
Changing Duration for Holding ETCO2 Maximum Value..................................... 11.19
Inspection of Measuring Accuracy................................................................................ 11.21
Daily Inspection of Measuring Accuracy............................................................. 11.21
Inspection of Measuring Accuracy (Precise Method)......................................... 11.21
Section 12 SpO2 Monitoring................................................................... 12.1

General........................................................................................................................... 12.2
Preparing for SpO2 Monitoring........................................................................................ 12.4
Selecting a Probe................................................................................................. 12.4
Nihon Kohden Reusable Probes................................................................ 12.4
Nihon Kohden Disposable Probes.............................................................. 12.5
Connecting Cables and Attaching the Probes...................................................... 12.6
Connecting Cable to the Monitor................................................................ 12.6
Attaching the Probe to the Patient.............................................................. 12.6
Monitoring SpO2 ............................................................................................................. 12.7
SpO2 Information on the Home Screen................................................................ 12.7
Changing SpO2 Settings................................................................................................. 12.8
Changing the Sensitivity....................................................................................... 12.8
Changing the SpO2 and Pulse Rate Alarm Limits................................................ 12.9
Changing the Sync Sound Source..................................................................... 12.11
Selecting Sync Sound Pitch............................................................................... 12.13

CONTENTS
Selecting the Response Mode............................................................................ 12.14 1

Selecting SpO2 Sensitivity Mode........................................................................ 12.15
Displaying Pulse Rate and Pulse-amplitude Index (PI) on the Home Screen.... 12.16 2
Displaying the SQI Bar Graph on the Home Screen.......................................... 12.16
3
Section 13 NIBP Monitoring................................................................... 13.1 4

General........................................................................................................................... 13.2
5
Oscillometric method............................................................................................ 13.2
Measurement Method (Deflation Mode and Inflation Mode)................................ 13.3
6
Deflation Method........................................................................................ 13.3
Inflation Method.......................................................................................... 13.3
7
Precautions on the Inflation Method........................................................... 13.3
Preparing for NIBP Measurement................................................................................... 13.5 8
Selecting the Cuff................................................................................................. 13.5 9
Types of Cuffs....................................................................................................... 13.7
Reusable Cuffs........................................................................................... 13.7 10
Disposable Cuffs........................................................................................ 13.8
Connecting Cables and Attaching the Cuff to the Patient..................................... 13.9 11
Connecting Air Hose and Cuff to the Monitor............................................. 13.9
Attaching the Cuff to the Patient............................................................... 13.10 12
Measuring and Monitoring NIBP................................................................................... 13.12
Measurement Mode and Interval........................................................................ 13.12 13
Manual Measurement............................................................................... 13.12
14
Auto Measurement................................................................................... 13.13
Auto Measurement with PWTT................................................................. 13.14
15
Auto Measurement on Vital Sign Alarm.................................................... 13.14
STAT Measurement.................................................................................. 13.14
16
SIM Mode Measurement.......................................................................... 13.15
NIBP Information on the Home Screen.............................................................. 13.15
Dimming and Hiding the NIBP Data......................................................... 13.16
Displaying Pulse Rate from NIBP............................................................. 13.16
Performing NIBP Measurement.......................................................................... 13.16
Manual Measurement............................................................................... 13.16
Auto Measurement................................................................................... 13.18
Auto Measurement with PWTT Trigger..................................................... 13.20
Auto Measurement on Vital Sign Alarm.................................................... 13.22
STAT Measurement.................................................................................. 13.23
SIM Mode Measurement.......................................................................... 13.25
Changing NIBP Settings............................................................................................... 13.27
Selecting the Initial Cuff Inflation Pressure......................................................... 13.27
Selecting the Initial Cuff Inflation Pressure Type...................................... 13.27
Setting the Cuff Inflation Pressure............................................................ 13.28
Turning the Inflation Mode On............................................................................ 13.30
Changing the NIBP Alarm Limits........................................................................ 13.31
Turning PWTT Trigger NIBP Measurement On/Off............................................. 13.32
Using Venous Puncture Mode...................................................................................... 13.34

CONTENTS
Section 14 IBP Monitoring..................................................................... 14.1

General........................................................................................................................... 14.2
Preparing for Blood Pressure Monitoring........................................................................ 14.2
Selecting the Blood Pressure Measuring Device.................................................. 14.2
Blood Pressure Transducers...................................................................... 14.3
IBP Connection Cords................................................................................ 14.4
JP-940P IBP Connection Box..................................................................... 14.4
Installing the Blood Pressure Measuring Device.................................................. 14.5
Connecting Cables to the Monitor.............................................................. 14.5
Assembling the Transducer........................................................................ 14.6
Adjusting Zero Balance........................................................................................ 14.8
Adjusting Zero Balance.............................................................................. 14.8
Memorizing the Zero Balance Values......................................................... 14.9
Monitoring IBP.............................................................................................................. 14.10
IBP Information on the Home Screen................................................................. 14.10
Changing IBP Settings.................................................................................................. 14.11
Changing the IBP and Pulse Rate Alarm Limits................................................. 14.11
Changing the Scale............................................................................................ 14.13
Changing the Sync Sound Source..................................................................... 14.14
Selecting Sync Sound Pitch............................................................................... 14.15
Selecting the Data Display Mode on the Home Screen...................................... 14.17
Changing the Label............................................................................................ 14.18
Types of Labels........................................................................................ 14.18
Changing the Labels................................................................................ 14.19
Displaying PPV or SPV on the Home Screen..................................................... 14.20
Selecting PPV or SPV Display on the Home Screen............................... 14.20
Section 15 Temperature Monitoring...................................................... 15.1

General........................................................................................................................... 15.2
Preparing for Temperature Monitoring............................................................................ 15.3
Selecting the Probe.............................................................................................. 15.3
Reusable Probes........................................................................................ 15.3
Disposable Probes..................................................................................... 15.4
Connecting Cables and Attaching the Probe........................................................ 15.5
Connecting Cable to the Monitor................................................................ 15.5
Attaching the Probe to the Patient.............................................................. 15.5
Using the Insulation Pad............................................................................. 15.5
Monitoring Temperature.................................................................................................. 15.6
Temperature Information on the Home Screen..................................................... 15.6
Changing Temperature Settings..................................................................................... 15.7
Changing the Temperature Alarm Limits.............................................................. 15.7

CONTENTS
Section 16 Reference.............................................................................. 16.1 1

Clock Accuracy............................................................................................................... 16.2
Periodical Replacement Schedule.................................................................................. 16.3 2
Repair Parts Availability Policy........................................................................................ 16.3
3
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

GENERAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS
This device is intended for use only by qualified medical personnel.
Use only Nihon Kohden approved products with this device. Use of non-approved products or in
a non-approved manner may affect the performance specifications of the device. This includes,
but is not limited to, batteries, recording paper, pens, extension cables, electrode leads, input
boxes and AC power.
Please read these precautions thoroughly before attempting to operate the instrument.
1. To safely and effectively use the instrument, its operation must be fully understood.
2. When installing or storing the instrument, take the following precautions:

(1) Avoid moisture or contact with water, extreme atmospheric pressure, excessive humidity and temperatures, poorly
ventilated areas, and dust, saline or sulphuric air.
(2) Place the instrument on an even, level floor. Avoid vibration and mechanical shock, even during transport.
(3) Avoid placing in an area where chemicals are stored or where there is danger of gas leakage.
(4) The power line source to be applied to the instrument must correspond in frequency and voltage to product
specifications, and have sufficient current capacity.
(5) Choose a room where a proper grounding facility is available.
3. Before Operation
(1) Check that the instrument is in perfect operating order.
(2) Check that the instrument is grounded properly.
(3) Check that all cords are connected properly.
(4) Pay extra attention when the instrument is combined with other instruments to avoid misdiagnosis or other
problems.
(5) All circuitry used for direct patient connection must be doubly checked.
(6) Check that battery level is acceptable and battery condition is good when using battery-operated models.
4. During Operation
(1) Both the instrument and the patient must receive continual, careful attention.
(2) Turn power off or remove electrodes and/or transducers when necessary to assure the patient’s safety.
(3) Avoid direct contact between the instrument housing and the patient.
5. To Shutdown After Use

(1) Turn power off with all controls returned to their original positions.
(2) Remove the cords gently; do not use force to remove them.
(3) Clean the instrument together with all accessories for their next use.
6. The instrument must receive expert, professional attention for maintenance and repairs. When the instrument is
not functioning properly, it should be clearly marked to avoid operation while it is out of order.
7. The instrument must not be altered or modified in any way.
8. Maintenance and Inspection

(1) The instrument and specified parts must undergo regular maintenance inspection at the interval which is specified after
the GENERAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS section.
(2) If stored for extended periods without being used, make sure prior to operation that the instrument is in perfect
operating condition.
User’s Guide PVM-2700 i

(3) Technical information such as parts list, descriptions, calibration instructions or other information is available for
qualified user technical personnel upon request from your Nihon Kohden representative.
9. When the instrument is used with an electrosurgical instrument, pay careful attention to the application and/or
location of electrodes and/or transducers to avoid possible burn to the patient.
10. When the instrument is used with a defibrillator, make sure that the instrument is protected against defibrillator
discharge. If not, remove patient cables and/or transducers from the instrument to avoid possible damage.
WARRANTY POLICY
Nihon Kohden Corporation (NKC) shall warrant its products against all defects in materials and workmanship for one year
from the date of delivery. However, consumable materials such as recording paper, ink, stylus and battery are excluded from
the warranty.
NKC or its authorized agents will repair or replace any products which prove to be defective during the warranty period,
provided these products are used as prescribed by the operating instructions given in the operator’s and service manuals.
No other party is authorized to make any warranty or assume liability for NKC’s products. NKC will not recognize any other
warranty, either implied or in writing. In addition, service, technical modification or any other product change performed by
someone other than NKC or its authorized agents without prior consent of NKC may be cause for voiding this warranty.
Defective products or parts must be returned to NKC or its authorized agents, along with an explanation of the failure. Shipping
costs must be pre-paid.
This warranty does not apply to products that have been modified, disassembled, reinstalled or repaired without Nihon Kohden
approval or which have been subjected to neglect or accident, damage due to accident, fire, lightning, vandalism, water or other
casualty, improper installation or application, or on which the original identification marks have been removed.
ii User’s Guide PVM-2700

EMC RELATED CAUTION
This equipment and/or system complies with IEC 60601-1-2 International Standard for electromagnetic
compatibility for medical electrical equipment and/or system. However, an electromagnetic environment that
exceeds the limits or levels stipulated in IEC 60601-1-2, can cause harmful interference to the equipment and/
or system or cause the equipment and/or system to fail to perform its intended function or degrade its intended
performance. Therefore, during the operation of the equipment and/or system, if there is any undesired
deviation from its intended operational performance, you must avoid, identify and resolve the adverse
electromagnetic effect before continuing to use the equipment and/or system.
The following describes some common interference sources and remedial actions:
1. Strong electromagnetic interference from a nearby emitter source such as an authorized radio station or
cellular phone:
Install the equipment and/or system at another location. Keep the emitter source such as cellular phone
away from the equipment and/or system, or turn off the cellular phone.
2. Radio-frequency interference from other equipment through the AC power supply of the equipment and/or
system:
Identify the cause of this interference and if possible remove this interference source. If this is not possible,
use a different power supply.
3. Effect of direct or indirect electrostatic discharge:

Make sure all users and patients in contact with the equipment and/or system are free from direct or
indirect electrostatic energy before using it. A humid room can help lessen this problem.
4. Electromagnetic interference with any radio wave receiver such as radio or television:
If the equipment and/or system interferes with any radio wave receiver, locate the equipment and/or
system as far as possible from the radio wave receiver.
5. Interference of lightning:
When lightning occurs near the location where the equipment and/or system is installed, it may induce
an excessive voltage in the equipment and/or system. In such a case, disconnect the AC power cord
from the equipment and/or system and operate the equipment and/or system by battery power, or use an
uninterruptible power supply.
6. Use with other equipment:

When the equipment and/or system is adjacent to or stacked with other equipment, the equipment and/
or system may affect the other equipment. Before use, check that the equipment and/or system operates
normally with the other equipment.
7. Use of unspecified accessory, transducer and/or cable:

When an unspecified accessory, transducer and/or cable is connected to this equipment and/or system,
it may cause increased electromagnetic emission or decreased electromagnetic immunity. The specified
configuration of this equipment and/or system complies with the electromagnetic requirements with the
specified configuration. Only use this equipment and/or system with the specified configuration.
User’s Guide PVM-2700 iii

Caution - continued
8. Use of unspecified configuration:
When the equipment and/or system is used with the unspecified system configuration different than
the configuration of EMC testing, it may cause increased electromagnetic emission or decreased
electromagnetic immunity. Only use this equipment and/or system with the specified configuration.
9. Measurement with excessive sensitivity:

The equipment and/or system is designed to measure bioelectrical signals with a specified sensitivity. If
the equipment and/or system is used with excessive sensitivity, artifact may appear by electromagnetic
interference and this may cause mis-diagnosis. When unexpected artifact appears, inspect the surrounding
electromagnetic conditions and remove this artifact source.
If the above suggested remedial actions do not solve the problem, consult your Nihon Kohden representative
for additional suggestions.
WARNING
The bioelectric impedance measurement sensor of a minute ventilation rate-adaptive implantable pacemaker
may be affected by cardiac monitoring and diagnostic equipment which is connected to the same patient. If this
occurs, the pacemaker may pace at its maximum rate and give incorrect data to the monitor or diagnostic
equipment. If this occurs, disconnect the monitor or diagnostic equipment from the patient or change the
setting on the pacemaker by referring to the pacemaker’s manual. For more details, contact your pacemaker
representative or Nihon Kohden representative.
iv User’s Guide PVM-2700

Conventions Used in this Manual and Instrument
Warnings, Cautions and Notes

Warnings, cautions and notes are used in this manual to alert or signal the reader to specific information.
WARNING
A warning alerts the user to possible injury or death associated with the use or misuse of the instrument.
CAUTION
A caution alerts the user to possible injury or problems with the instrument associated with its use or misuse
such as instrument malfunction, instrument failure, damage to the instrument, or damage to other property.
NOTE
A note provides specific information, in the form of recommendations, prerequirements, alternative methods or
supplemental information.
Text Conventions in this Manual

• Names of hard keys on the monitor are enclosed in square brackets: [CHECK]
• Messages that are displayed on the screen are enclosed in quotation marks: “CHECK ELECTRODES”
• Names of items that are displayed on the screen are enclosed in angle brackets: <SENSITIVITY>
User’s Guide PVM-2700 v

Explanations of the Symbols in this Manual and Instrument
The following symbols found in this manual/instrument bear the respective descriptions as given.
On panel
Symbol Description Symbol Description

“On” only for a part of instrument Date of manufacture
“Off” only for a part of instrument High voltage

Output (ZS socket. When QP-201P interface is
Alternating current
installed.)
Input/output terminal (Serial socket. When
Battery charge
QI-202P interface is installed.)
Direct Current (DC) (When QI-203P interface is
Data input/output
installed)
Network socket (When QI-202P or QI-203P
SD card slot
interface is installed.)
Protective earth The CE mark is a protected conformity mark of
the European Community. Products marked with
this symbol comply with the requirements of the
Defibrillation-proof type CF applied part
Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC.
Products marked with this symbol comply with
Equipotential terminal
the European WEEE directive 2002/96/EC and
require separate waste collection. For Nihon
Attention, consult operator’s manual Kohden products marked with this symbol,
contact your Nihon Kohden representative for
Serial number disposal.
On screen

Alarm silence Recorder door open
Alarm suspended Checking SD card
All alarm off SD card failure
Out of paper NIBP
Record NIBP interval
Menu NIBP start
Home NIBP stop
Non-paced Adjust setting/Scroll data
QRS/pulse sync mark Zoom in/Zoom out
Respiration sync mark @ Touch panel calibration
Battery status Guide menu
vi User’s Guide PVM-2700

WS-201P Recorder Unit

The CE mark is a protected conformity mark of
Attention, consult operator’s manual
Serial number
Date of manufacture
SB-201P Battery Pack

Recycle mark Products marked with this symbol comply with
environmental protection use period of 10 years
according to the ST/J11364 “Marking for Control
of Pollution Caused by Electronic Information
Products” of the People’s Republic of China
Insert direction Electronic Industry Standard.
Products marked with this symbol require
separate waste collection according to EU battery
directive 2006/66/EC.
QI-201P Interface

Serial number
Date of manufacture Output (ZS socket)
QI-202P Interface

Serial number Input/output terminal
Date of manufacture Network socket
QI-203P Interface

Serial number Direct Current (DC)
Date of manufacture Network socket
User’s Guide PVM-2700 vii

Related Documentation
The PVM-2701 and PVM-2703 bedside monitor comes with the following manuals in addition to the operator’s manual.
Administrator’s Guide
Describes how to install the bedside monitor. It also explains about the password protected settings on the SYSTEM SETUP
window and SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen which only an administrator can change.
User’s Guide
Gives supplemental information on the operation of the bedside monitor and describes the features and settings of the
monitoring parameters.
Service Manual
Describes information on servicing the bedside monitor. Only qualified service personnel can service the bedside monitor.
Safety Standards
The safety standard of this bedside monitor is classified as follows:

Type of protection against electrical shock: CLASS I EQUIPMENT (AC Powered)
Internally Powered EQUIPMENT (BATTERY Powered)
Degree of protection against electrical shock: Defibrillator-proof type CF applied part
Degree of protection against harmful ingress of water: IPX0 (non-protected)
Degree of safety of application in the presence of FLAMMABLE ANAESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR, OR WITH
OXYGEN OR NITROUS OXIDE: Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of FLAMMABLE
ANAESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR, OR WITH OXYGEN OR
NITROUS OXIDE
Mode of operation: CONTINUOUS OPERATION
Safety Information
This User’s Guide only contains safety information related to operation. Full information is in the PVM-2701/2703 Bedside
Monitor Operator’s Manual (code number: 0614-904413E).
viii User’s Guide PVM-2700

Periodic Inspection
If the periodic inspection is not performed, degradation or loss of function may go unnoticed and lead to misdiagnosis.
Service personnel should perform the periodic inspection at least once every year. Make sure that the bedside monitor operates
properly and replace the consumables.
If you found abnormalities as a result of inspection and the bedside monitor is suspected to be faulty, attach an “Unusable”
or “Repair request” label to the bedside monitor and contact your Nihon Kohden representative. For inspection, refer to the
Service Manual.
User’s Guide PVM-2700 ix

Section 1 General 1
Introduction........................................................................................................................................................... 1.2
Features............................................................................................................................................................... 1.3
Composition.......................................................................................................................................................... 1.4
Panel Description................................................................................................................................................. 1.5
Front Panel................................................................................................................................................. 1.5
Left Side Panel........................................................................................................................................... 1.5
Right Side Panel......................................................................................................................................... 1.6
Rear Panel................................................................................................................................................. 1.6
Basic Operating Concepts.................................................................................................................................... 1.7
Screen Displays......................................................................................................................................... 1.7
Using Touch Screen Keys......................................................................................................................... 1.12
Keys on the Bedside Monitor.................................................................................................................... 1.13
Using MENU Window............................................................................................................................... 1.13
Guide Window.................................................................................................................................................... 1.14
User’s Guide PVM-2700 1.1

1. GENERAL
Introduction
The PVM-2701 and PVM-2703 hardwired bedside monitors have several

connectors for ECG, impedance method respiration, SpO2, NIBP and temperature
monitoring. The PVM-2703 bedside monitor can also monitor CO2 and IBP. Its
easy operation and compact lightweight design let you use this bedside monitor
in the general ward, ICU, CCU, operating room and for patient transportation.
For portability, it can operate on battery power as well as AC power.
NOTE
Use only Nihon Kohden parts and accessories to assure maximum
performance from your instrument.
1.2 User’s Guide PVM-2700

1. GENERAL
1
Features
• Hardwired system
With the dedicated sockets on the monitor, ECG, impedance method
respiration, SpO2, NIBP and temperature can be monitored. On PVM-2703,
CO2 and IBP can also be monitored.
• AC or battery operation
The monitor can operate on AC power or battery.
• Color data display

Detailed information is displayed on the wide angle, 10.4 inch TFT color
display. The monitor shows up to 4 waveforms on the screen. Monitoring
parameters are automatically identified.
• Easy operation by touch screen keys

The monitor can be operated using the touch keys on the screen.
• Highly reliable ECG monitoring

Arrhythmia can be analyzed and ST level can be measured. The dominant QRS
can be changed any time for template-matching analysis of arrhythmia.
• Review windows for viewing saved data

Saved data can be displayed on the trend window, recall window and full
disclosure window. The alarm history window is also available for saving
numeric data at an alarm occurrence.
• Function keys
There are three function keys at the upper left corner of the screen. A function
can be assigned to each key, for example, freezing waveforms or displaying the
MENU window.
• Thermal array recorder with 50 mm width paper (option)

Waveforms, numeric data, trendgraphs, and vital signs tables can be recorded
manually or automatically on the optional WS-201P recorder module. Up to
three channels can be recorded.
• Telemetry system (option)

When the optional ZS-900PG/PK transmitter is connected to the bedside
monitor, waveform(s) and parameter data from the bedside monitor can be sent
to a Cardiac Telemetry System or to a Central Monitor via a Multiple Patient
Receiver and recorded. (Available waveforms and parameter data depend on
the receiving monitor.)
• Network connection (option)

When the optional QI-202P or QI-203P interface is installed into the bedside
monitor, you can connect this system via a 10/100 BASE-T LAN cable to a
network communicate with the central monitor and other devices.
1. GENERAL
Composition
PVM-2701/PVM-2703 Bedside Monitor
Battery Pack Recorder Module Interface
SB-201P
WS-201P QI-201P
Interface Transmitter Other
ZS-900PG/PK DI-270P Adapter KC-600P Cart

QI-202P
Interface Wireless LAN Station
DH-270P Adapter KC-013P Cart
QI-320PA, QI-421PA
QI-203P

1. GENERAL
1
Panel Description
Front Panel
Alarm indicator
Red or yellow lamp blinks, or yellow or cyan
lamps lights according to the alarm settings.
Green lamp blinks in synchronization with
the patient’s QRS or pulse.
Touch screen
Displays monitoring data. Touching a key
or data on the screen changes the displayed
screen and settings.
Power switch/lamp
Press to turn the monitor power on. When
turning the monitor power off, press and
hold for more than one second. Lights when
the monitor power is turned on.
AC power lamp Battery lamp

Lights when the power cord is Indicates the battery status of the
connected between the AC SOURCE battery pack in the battery pack
socket and AC outlet. holder.
Left Side Panel
Handle
For carrying the monitor.
PRESS/CO2 socket (PVM-2703 only)

Connects to the connection cord of
the parameter to be monitored (IBP
and CO2). The type of parameter is
automatically recognized.
SpO2 socket
Connects to the SpO2 connection cord.
ECG/RESP socket
Connects to the ECG connection cord.
NIBP socket
Connects to the air hose.
TEMP socket
Connects to the temperature probe cable.

1. GENERAL
Right Side Panel
CHECK key
For displaying the
DIAGNOSTIC CHECK screen.
Recorder module holder

For mounting the recorder
module.
Rear Panel
Equipotential grounding terminal
For an equipotential grounding lead.
ZS socket
For ZS-900PG/PK transmitter
(When QI-201P interface is installed)
Network socket
Connects to monitor network system
via the network separation unit
(When QI-202P or QI-203P interface
is installed)
Serial socket
For serial communication
DC socket
For QI-421PA wireless LAN station
Recorder module holder AC SOURCE power cord socket Battery pack holder
For mounting a recorder module For the AC power cord

1. GENERAL
1
Basic Operating Concepts
Screen Displays
Following are the screens and windows available on the bedside monitor. For
details about the individual screens and windows, see the appropriate section.
The shadow of the previous screen may remain for a few minutes after changing
the screen.
Normally, the home screen is displayed. All screens, except for the LARGE
NUMERICS screen and SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen, return to the
home screen when there is no key operation for about 3 minutes.
Home screen
• The home screen can be displayed anytime
by touching the Home key on the screen.
• Displays waveforms and data of the
monitoring parameters.
• Touching the patient name displays the
ADMIT DISCHARGE window for entering
patient name.
• Touching the parameter data displays the
parameter setting window.
MENU window
The MENU window can be displayed anytime
by touching the Menu key on the screen. From
the MENU window, you can display any
window except the home screen.

1. GENERAL
Other windows for monitoring

LARGE NUMERICS window for displaying numeric data.
SLEEP window for turning sleep mode on. The SLEEP window is only available when the ZS-900PG/PK transmitter is
connected to the bedside monitor or the bedside monitor is connected to the central monitor network.
Guide window for displaying guide menu.
Review windows
TREND TABLE window for displaying table of parameter data.

1. GENERAL
NIBP TABLE window for displaying vital signs data with NIBP measurement. 1
TREND GRAPH window for displaying 120 hour trendgraphs of up to 2 selected parameters.
RECALL window for displaying arrhythmia recall data.
FULL DISC window for displaying full disclosure.
ALARM HISTORY window for displaying vital sign data at alarm occurrence.

1. GENERAL
OCRG window for displaying OCRG trendgraph. Only available when the patient type is NEONATE.
ADMIT DISCHARGE window

ADMIT DISCHARGE window for entering a patient name. Data can be deleted on this window.
ALARM setting window

ALARM LIMITS window for setting vital signs alarm and ARRHYTH ALARMS window for confirming arrhythmia
alarm settings.
Parameter setting windows

For changing parameter monitoring settings. Example is ECG window.

1. GENERAL
Interbed window 1
For displaying interbed beds when the monitor is connected to a network.
Setup windows
• DATE window for changing date and time
• DISPLAY/SOUND window for changing alarm and sync sound volume, waveform sweep speed, and respiration
waveform sweep speed
• RECORD window for setting recording parameters
• SYSTEM window for checking assigned functions

1. GENERAL
Using Touch Screen Keys

Any window can be opened and settings can be changed by touching the keys
and items on the screen with your finger. Touching the key on the screen displays
the window.
Tabs for changing displaying window
Selected items are highlighted.
Setting bar
Touch or drag the sliders to the
desired level on the setting bar.
Upper limit slider
Lower limit slider
Scroll keys
Scroll bar
Cursor

1. GENERAL
Keys on the Bedside Monitor 1
Turns the monitor power on or off.
Using MENU Window

The MENU window can be displayed anytime by touching the Menu key on the
screen. From the MENU window, you can display any window except for the
home screen and SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen.
For details on each window, refer to the section specified below.
Section 9
Section 15 Section 10, 11 Section 12
Section 6*1 Section 13
Section 14*2
Section 5
Section 5
Section 3
Section 4
Section 7
Section 8 Administrator’s Guide Section 4 Section 1
*1 OCRG key is available when the patient type is NEONATE.

*2 PRESS key is not available for PVM-2701.

1. GENERAL
Guide Window
The guide window explains how to attach electrodes or cuff with illustration. The
window also shows the countermeasure for the technical alarms.
When a technical alarm is generated during monitoring, the Guide key appears at
the top of the screen. Touch the key to open the guide window that is associated
with the alarm.
Guide key
When the Guide key is touched, the guide menu that indicates a possible problem
appears.
CO2 and PRESS are

for PVM-2703 only.
Touch this key to see

more information.
You can open the Guide window by touching the GUIDE key on the MENU
window.

Section 2 Preparation
2
Preparation Flowchart.......................................................................................................................................... 2.2

Installation Conditions.......................................................................................................................................... 2.3
Inserting and Removing the Battery Pack............................................................................................................ 2.5
Battery Handling and Operation................................................................................................................. 2.5
Safety Information............................................................................................................................ 2.5
Battery Handling Precautions.......................................................................................................... 2.6
When Not Using the Monitor or Battery........................................................................................... 2.6
Inserting and Removing the Battery Packs................................................................................................ 2.6
Inserting the Battery Pack.......................................................................................................................... 2.7
Removing the Battery Pack........................................................................................................................ 2.8
Preparing the Optional Recorder Module............................................................................................................. 2.9
Installing the Recorder Module................................................................................................................... 2.9
Loading Recording Paper........................................................................................................................... 2.9
Attaching the Transmitter.................................................................................................................................... 2.11
Power.................................................................................................................................................................. 2.12
Connecting the Power Cord and Grounding the Monitor.......................................................................... 2.12
Connecting the Power Cord........................................................................................................... 2.12
Grounding the Monitor................................................................................................................... 2.13
Turning the Monitor Power On.................................................................................................................. 2.13
Check Before Turning On the Power.............................................................................................. 2.13
Turning the Power On..................................................................................................................... 2.14
Check After Turning On the Power and During Monitoring............................................................ 2.15
Power and Battery Status Indications...................................................................................................... 2.16
When the “BATTERY WEAK” Message Appears........................................................................... 2.17
Charging the Battery...................................................................................................................... 2.17
Monitor Status on Power Interruption....................................................................................................... 2.18
Turning the Monitor Power Off.................................................................................................................. 2.18
Check After/Before Turning the Power Off...................................................................................... 2.18

2. PREPARATION
Preparation Flowchart
You may not need to do all these.
1. Install the monitor. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide.
2. Prepare battery and recorder. Refer to Section 2 in this manual.
3. Check or change any initial settings on the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

screen. Changing these settings during monitoring interrupts monitoring.
Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 2.
4. Check or change any initial settings on the SYSTEM SETUP window. These
settings are the password protected settings which only an administrator can
change. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
5. Check or change the necessary settings before monitoring in Section 3 in this

manual.
• Date and time
• Sound volume
• Screen brightness
• Waveform sweep speed
6. Enter the name of the new patient. Refer to “Entering Patient Name” in
Section 3 in this manual.
7. Check or change all alarm items for the patient. When <SHOW ADMIT
CONFIRMATION WINDOW> is set to Off, the alarm settings return to the
default settings 30 minutes after the monitor is turned off. Refer to Section 5
in this manual.
8. Check or change settings for the review windows, such as trendgraph, trend
table and recall files. Refer to Section 6 in this manual.
9. Check or change recording settings. Refer to Section 8 in this manual.
10. Prepare electrodes, probes, etc. for monitoring individual parameters and
check or change the settings for each parameter. Refer to Sections 9 to 15 in
this manual.

2. PREPARATION
Installation Conditions
2
Put the monitor on a stable and flat stand or on an optional KC-013P or KC-600P
cart in a suitable location where the screen is easy to see and does not reflect
light. Follow the cautions below.
The monitor must be installed by qualified personnel. Details are in the

Administrator’s Guide.
WARNING WARNING
Never use the monitor in the presence of any Connect only the specified instrument to the
flammable anesthetic gas or high concentration monitor and follow the specified procedure.
oxygen atmosphere. Failure to follow this warning Failure to follow this warning may result
may cause explosion or fire. in electrical shock or injury to the patient
and operator, and cause fire or instrument
malfunction.
CAUTION CAUTION
Avoid collision when moving the monitor on a Avoid a location where the monitor is sprinkled
cart. Strong impact may damage the monitor. with liquids. Avoid direct sprinkling, spray or moist
air from a nebulizer or a humidifier.
CAUTION CAUTION
The display screen is made of glass. Strong Avoid locations where the monitor may receive
impact may damage it. strong electromagnetic interference such as radio
or TV stations, cellular phones or mobile two-way
radios.
CAUTION CAUTION
If fluids are accidentally spilled on the monitor, Avoid exposing the monitor to direct sunlight.
take the monitor out of service and check for
damage.
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not use the monitor in an ambulance. The Do not place blankets or cloth over the monitor. It
monitor may not function properly in a moving may affect monitoring.
vehicle.
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not place the monitor in a dusty area. Do not place the monitor in an MRI examination
room. The monitor may not function properly,
or noise from the monitor may interfere with the
MRI.

2. PREPARATION
CAUTION CAUTION
Connect the power cord to an AC outlet which Make sure that there is more than 5 cm of space
can supply enough AC current to the monitor. The between the monitor and the wall for adequate
monitor cannot function properly with low current. ventilation. When the monitor is surrounded,
make sure that there is about 10 cm of space
above the monitor for ventilation so that the
CAUTION
operating temperature does not exceed 40°C
Do not use an electrical blanket. It may affect
(104°F).
monitoring.
10 cm
CAUTION 5 cm Rear
Avoid placing the monitor near a heater or 5 cm 5 cm 5 cm 5 cm
humidifier.
Side
CAUTION
When there is any problem on the monitor, turn
off the power immediately and disconnect the
power cord from the AC outlet. Take the monitor
out of service and check for damage.

2. PREPARATION
Inserting and Removing the Battery Pack

2
Battery Handling and Operation

Safety Information
WARNING WARNING
Do not do the following to the battery pack. It may If the battery pack is damaged and the substance
cause leakage, overheating, explosion and fire. inside the battery contacts the eyes or skin, wash
• Short-circuit the + and – terminals on the immediately and thoroughly with water and see a
battery pack. physician. Never rub your eyes, because you may
• Put the battery pack into fire or heat the battery lose your eyesight.
pack.
• Disassemble or alter the battery pack.
WARNING
• Give strong impact to or deform the battery
• Do not immerse the battery pack in water.
pack.
The battery may heat up and rust and the
• Use the battery pack on unspecified
substance inside the battery may leak.
instruments.
• Do not leave the battery unused for more than
• Charge the battery pack on unspecified
about two years. The battery may leak.
instruments.
• Install the battery pack with the wrong polarity.
• Leave the battery pack in the reach of patients.
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not expose the battery pack to direct sunlight Do not use a battery pack with a damaged cover
or leave in a high temperature place. The because this may cause electric hazard and
lifetime of the battery pack may be shortened, malfunction.
the performance of the battery pack may be
degraded and the battery may leak.
CAUTION CAUTION
Be careful when handling the fully charged Do not leave the battery pack near the patient or
battery pack. The battery pack heats up to about in reach of children.
60°C (140°F). The operator may be surprised
and drop the battery pack, causing injury to the
operator.
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not subject the battery pack to a strong Use the battery pack between 10°C (50°F) and
mechanical shock. 40°C (104°F). Temperatures out of this range
affect the working of the battery.

2. PREPARATION
CAUTION CAUTION
Before disposing of the battery, check with your Do not use a battery pack which is past the
local solid waste officials for details in your area expiration date written on the label.
for recycling options or proper disposal. The
battery is recyclable. At the end of its useful life,
under various state and local laws, it may be
illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal
waste stream.
Battery Handling Precautions

• Always place a battery pack in the monitor. This charges it so that you will
always have a fully charged battery ready.
• Fully recharge the battery pack before using it for the first time or after storing
it for over a month. When the battery pack is not used, it self-discharges.
• Replace the battery pack with a new one every year. This is because the battery
is a chemical product which gradually deteriorates whether or not it is used.
• Store the battery packs under the following conditions.
Temperature: –20 to +50°C (–4 to +122°F) (within 30 days)
–20 to +40°C (–4 to +104°F) (within 90 days)
–20 to +30°C (–4 to +86°F) (more than 90 days)
Humidity: 30 to 85% RH (noncondensing)
When Not Using the Monitor or Battery

• When the monitor is not used for a long time, remove the battery. When a
charged or discharged battery is left inside the monitor with the power cord
unplugged, the battery self-discharges and deteriorates.
• When a battery is not used, fully charge it before storage. When a battery is not
used for over one month, fully charge it once every one month.
Inserting and Removing the Battery Packs

Insert the battery pack into the battery pack holder.
Battery pack holder
NOTE
Only use the SB-201P battery pack.

2. PREPARATION
Inserting the Battery Pack

1. Lay the monitor face down.
NOTE 2
Be careful not to damage the monitor screen.
2. Remove the battery cover by removing the screw at the bottom of the
monitor, pressing the tab on the battery cover and sliding the cover off.
Battery cover Screw
3. Connect the cable of the battery pack to the battery connector in the battery
▼ label
pack holder of the monitor.
4. Insert the battery pack into the battery pack holder so that the ▼ on the label
is pointing down.
5. Attach the battery cover and fasten the cover to the monitor with the screw
and put the monitor in the upright position.

2. PREPARATION
Removing the Battery Pack

1. Lay the monitor face down.
NOTE
Be careful not to damage the monitor screen.
2. Remove the battery cover by removing the screw at the bottom of the
monitor, pressing the tab on the battery cover and sliding the cover off.
Battery cover Screw
3. Remove the battery from the battery pack holder.
4. Disconnect the battery cable from the monitor.
5. Replace the battery cover and fasten it with the screw.

2. PREPARATION
Preparing the Optional Recorder Module

2
Installing the Recorder Module

Install the optional WS-201P recorder module in the monitor by referring to the
WS-201P recorder module installation guide.
Loading Recording Paper
CAUTION for Handling the Recording Paper

• Do not allow paper to contact pastes, adhesive agents, oil-based
felt pen tips or diazo process (ditto/spirit) copying paper. These
discolor the paper surface.
• Do not allow paper to contact any materials made of vinyl chloride,
plastic eraser, adhesive tape, fluorescent felt tip pen, or cinnabar
seal ink because these discolor the recorded waveforms and data.
• Do not apply strong pressure to the paper. Rubbing or scratching
discolors the paper surface.
• Do not allow paper to contact saline solution. The paper discolors
and if the saline solution gets on the thermal head, there will be
dots missing from the recorded data.
• Avoid high humidity, high temperature, direct sunlight and direct
fluorescent light when storing recording paper. Otherwise the
paper may discolor. Store the recording paper in a dry, cool place.
• When using glue on the recording paper, use glue which consists
of starch, polyvinyl alcohol, gum arabic, or carboxymethyl.
CAUTION for Loading the Recording Paper

• Correctly load the recording paper as specified. Otherwise,
recording may not be performed properly.
• Do not touch the recording head with any hard material. When the
head is tapped with hard material, the head may crack and the
heater element wire may short-circuit.
• Clean the head surface with the provided head cleaner pen
before loading new paper. After a period of usage, paper dust may
accumulate between the paper and the head surface, and good
printing cannot be obtained.
NOTE
Only use the specified recording paper, FQW50-2-100.
The out of paper icon appears at the upper right of the screen and the “INSERT
REC PAPER” message appears on the screen when there is no paper.

2. PREPARATION
CAUTION
Do not touch the thermal head inside the recorder module. The
thermal head may be damaged by static electricity or become dirty
and cause printing failure.
1. Move the door release lever in the direction of the arrow ( ) to release the
lock.
2. Open the recorder door. Set the recording paper (FQW50-2-100) inside the
recorder so that the detection mark (small black square on corner) of the
paper is on the right side.
3. Draw out one page of paper toward you.
4. Close the recorder door. If the “CLOSE PAPER MAGAZINE” message and
icon are still displayed, the recorder door is not closed properly.

2. PREPARATION
Attaching the Transmitter

2
The ZS-900PG/PK transmitter transmits data from the monitor to a telemetry

system or central monitor. A multiple patient receiver is necessary with the
central monitors.
To connect the transmitter to the monitor, the optional QI-201P interface is

required. Install the interface and connect the transmitter to the monitor by
referring to the QI-201P interface installation guide.
When the transmitter is connected to the monitor, turn the monitor power on and
check that the LED on the transmitter lights in green. Also check that the channel
発売日本光電工業株式会社
データ送信中
製造日本光電富岡株式会社
number displayed in the upper part of the screen is correct.

エラー
Channel number and patient type are displayed alternately.
CAUTION CAUTION
The transmitter can only transmit temperature When using a ZS-900PG/PK transmitter, the
data from 5 to 45°C (41 to 113°F). Be careful measurement value on the telemetry system and
when reading the value. transmission side monitor may be different due to
timing delay of the display.
CAUTION CAUTION
When the ZS-900PG/PK transmitter is attached When transmitting CO2 data through a ZS-
to the bedside monitor, check the alarm, 900PG/PK transmitter to a receiving monitor, if
arrhythmia and monitoring settings on the central the transmitted data is out of the range of the
monitor or telemetry system. The transmitter does receiving monitor, the maximum value of the
not transmit the alarm, arrhythmia and monitoring receiving monitor is displayed. Be careful when
setting information. reading the value.
NOTE
• Before connecting the transmitter, turn off the monitor power.
• The CE mark does not apply to the ZS-900PK transmitter.
• A ZB-800PK or ZB-900PG/PK transmitter cannot be used on this
monitor.

2. PREPARATION
Power
The monitor can operate on either battery or AC power.
When the power cord is plugged into an AC outlet and the power switch on the
front panel is turned on, the monitor operates on AC power.
When a SB-201P battery pack is installed in the monitor and the power cord
is disconnected or there is a sudden power failure, the monitor automatically
switches to battery power.
When there is no battery pack in the monitor and there is a sudden power failure,
the stored data remains in memory for about 30 minutes after the power is shut
down.
The battery is charged when the power cord is plugged into an AC outlet and
the AC current is supplied to the monitor. The battery is also charged during
monitoring.
When the monitor is operated on battery power, the brightness of the screen can
be reduced to save battery power.
The monitor can operate for about three hours with a new fully charged battery
pack when:
• Used in normal temperature.
• Optional recorder module is not installed.
• No alarm occurs.
• Only monitoring ECG.
• <POWER SAVING MODE> on the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to ON.
• NIBP is not measured.
Connecting the Power Cord and Grounding the Monitor

Connecting the Power Cord
WARNING
Only use the provided power cord. Using other power cords may
result in electrical shock or injury to the patient and operator.
Connect the provided power cord to the AC SOURCE socket on the rear panel of
the monitor and plug the cord into a 3-prong AC outlet.
When the AC power is supplied to the monitor, the AC power lamp on the front
panel lights.
NOTE
If the AC power lamp does not light, check the power cord connection.

2. PREPARATION
Grounding the Monitor
WARNING 2
When several medical instruments are used together, ground all
instruments to the same one-point ground. Any potential difference
between instruments may cause electrical shock to the patient and
operator.
When more than one electrical instrument is used, there may be electrical
potential difference between the instruments. The potential difference between
the instruments may cause current to flow to the patient connected to the
instruments, resulting in electrical shock.
Always perform equipotential grounding when required. It is often required in

the operating room, ICU room, CCU room, cardiac catheterization room and
X-ray room. Consult with a biomedical engineer to determine if it is required.
When equipotential grounding is required, connect the equipotential ground

terminal on the instrument to the equipotential ground terminal on the wall
(equipotential grounding system) with the equipotential grounding lead (potential
equalization conductor).
Turning the Monitor Power On

Check Before Turning On the Power
Check the following items before turning on the power.
• Enough electrodes and electrode leads are ready.
• Cleaned and sterilized sensors and probes are ready.
• Power cord is connected properly.
• Equipotential grounding lead is connected properly when equipotential
grounding is required.
• All cables are connected properly.
• Enough recording paper in the recorder (when using the optional recorder
module).
• Fully charged battery pack is installed in the monitor in case of a sudden power
failure.
• No scratches, damage or dirt on the monitor.
• No damage to the keys and panels.
• No damage to the power cord.
• No damage to the electrode leads, sensors, probes and cables.
• The monitor is not in a wet place.

2. PREPARATION
Turning the Power On
CAUTION
When the monitor is turned on and periodically, check that a single
beep sounds and the red, yellow, cyan and green alarm indicator
lamps blink once. This shows that the alarm is functioning properly.
NOTE
• It takes a few minutes for the LCD screen to reach full brightness.
• The shadow of the previous screen may remain for a few minutes after
changing screens.
• There may be some dots on the LCD screen which are always on or
always off, but it does not affect monitoring. This is normal for all LCD
screens.
• The patient data and settings are deleted when the monitor power is
off for more than 30 minutes and <SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION
WINDOW> is turned off in the SYSTEM SETUP screen. When <SHOW
ADMIT CONFIRMATION WINDOW> is turned on, the message
appears asking whether monitoring a new patient or not.
When <SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION When <SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION

WINDOW> is set to Off WINDOW> is set to On
Press the [Power] switch on the front panel to turn the power on. The power
lamp and the AC power lamp light and self check starts. When the check is
complete, the home screen appears.
Power lamp lights
If the power lamp does not light, check the power cord connection.

2. PREPARATION
When the monitor power is turned on, alarms are suspended while the monitor is
waiting for the electrodes and probe to be attached to the patient. The monitoring
starts when the connection cord is connected to the socket on the monitor and the 2
electrodes or probe are attached to the patient. The alarm activates when one of
the following occurs:
• ECG or SpO2 is monitored or NIBP is measured and a value is displayed
(when AUTO is selected for <ALARM ACTIVATION DELAY> on the
ALARM window of the SYSTEM SETUP window)
• ECG or SpO2 is continuously monitored for the selected time (when 1 min, 2
min or 3 min is selected for <ALARM ACTIVATION DELAY>)
• NIBP is measured (when 1 min, 2 min or 3 min is selected for <ALARM
ACTIVATION DELAY>)
If the monitor power is turned off and on again within 60 seconds, the
monitoring continues.
Check After Turning On the Power and During Monitoring

To start monitoring safely and properly, check the following items after turning
on the power. If any problem is detected, take the proper countermeasure
according to the “Troubleshooting” and “Maintenance” sections in the Operator’s
Manual.
• There is no fire, smoke or smell.

• The monitor is not too hot.
• The power lamp and other lamps light.
• The red, yellow, cyan and green alarm indicator limps blink once and a beep
sounds.
• The start up screen appears and the home screen appears.
• No error message is displayed on the screen.
• The time on the screen is correct.
• The monitor does not affect surrounding equipment.
• The data and waveforms are displayed properly.
• [CHECK] key and power switch operate properly.
• The touch keys function properly and the key clicking sound is generated.
• Alarm functions properly.
• Alarm sound can be heard.
• Alarm sound volume setting is appropriate.
• There is no trouble in recording (when using the optional recorder module).
NOTE
After turning the monitor on and when admitting a patient on the monitor,
make sure that the time displayed at the upper right of the screen is
correct. When the date or time is changed during monitoring, the date and
time of all stored data is also changed and may not match the date and
time on the printout.

2. PREPARATION
Power and Battery Status Indications

Battery operation Remaining battery power
Operating on battery Much
Battery is being charged
Less
Power and battery status are indicated by three lamps on the bedside monitor. A
discharged battery is also indicated by battery marks, screen message and alarm.
NOTE
When charging the battery with the monitor power turned off, check that
the power lamp and battery lamp light. If the lamps do not light even when
the power cord is connected and the battery pack is inserted, turn the
power switch on, check that the battery lamp is blinking or lit, then turn
the power switch off.
• Operating on AC power and battery is fully charged or there is no battery

Power lamp: Lit
AC power lamp: Lit
Battery lamp: Lit when battery is fully charged or off when there is no battery
• Operating on AC power and battery is being charged

Power lamp: Lit
AC power lamp: Lit
Battery lamp: Slow blinking (once every 2 seconds)
• Operating on AC power when battery is damaged

Power lamp: Lit
AC power lamp: Lit
Battery lamp: Rapid blinking (4 times per second)
Screen indication: “BATTERY ERROR” message
Alarm indication: Continuous “bing bong” sound (when NK1 is selected for <ALARM
SOUND TYPE> on the ALARM window of the SYSTEM SETUP
window) and blinking yellow alarm
• Operating on battery power

Power lamp: Lit
AC power lamp: Off
Battery lamp: Off
• Operating on battery power and battery is damaged

Power lamp: Lit
AC power lamp: Off
Battery lamp: Rapid blinking (4 times per second)
Screen indication: “BATTERY ERROR” message
Alarm indication: Continuous “bing bong” sound (when NK1 is selected for <ALARM
SOUND TYPE> on the ALARM window of the SYSTEM SETUP
window) and blinking yellow alarm

2. PREPARATION
• No monitoring and charging battery

Power lamp: Off
AC power lamp: Lit 2
Battery lamp: Slow blinking (once every 2 seconds)
When the “BATTERY WEAK” Message Appears

Operate the monitor on AC power and/or replace the battery pack when the
“BATTERY WEAK” message appears.
When the “BATTERY WEAK” message appears, the remaining battery power is
weak. The yellow alarm lamp lights with a continuous “bing bong” sound.
If no AC or battery power is supplied to the monitor, there is no measurement

and patient data such as trend data may be lost.
Charging the Battery

The battery pack can be charged by the monitor. It takes about 12 hours to charge
one battery pack during monitoring.
NOTE
The new battery pack is not charged. Charge the battery pack before use.
The monitor can operate for about 3 hours with a new fully charged battery pack
when:
• Used in normal temperature.
• Optional recorder module is not installed.
• No alarm occurs.
• Only monitoring ECG.
• <POWER SAVING MODE> on the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to ON.
• NIBP is not measured.
CAUTION
When charging the battery pack, keep the ambient temperature at
approximately 20°C to maintain the optimal battery operation time.
If the battery pack is charged at less than 10°C (50°F) or more than
30°C (86°F), the maximum battery operation time will be 20% to
30% less than the optimal operation time.
Charging in the Monitor

• Normal charging
During AC operation, the battery pack is automatically charged without
interrupting monitoring. It takes approximately 12 hours of continuous
charging to fully charge a battery pack.
• Fast charging
When the monitor is turned off, it takes 2.5 hours of continuous charging to
fully charge a battery pack.

2. PREPARATION
After continuous charging, the monitor automatically switches to trickle charging

mode to keep the battery pack fully charged. Trickle charging is necessary
because the battery pack can self-discharge even when it is not in use.
NOTE
Do not disconnect the power cord from the monitor during battery
charging.
Monitor Status on Power Interruption

When there is a power failure or sudden power interruption, the monitor status is
as follows.
• When a battery pack is installed in the monitor, the bedside monitor operates
for about 3 hours on battery power.
• When the monitor has no battery pack installed or the battery is discharged, the
monitor turns off. The patient data and settings are stored for about 30 minutes
after power off. If the monitor power is turned off and on again within 30
seconds, monitoring continues.
When there is a power failure or sudden power interruption, immediately connect

the monitor to the emergency power source. It is recommended to always keep
the battery in the monitor.
Turning the Monitor Power Off

Press the [Power] switch on the front panel for more than one second to turn the
power off. The screen becomes dark and the power lamp on the front panel turns
off.
NOTE
• Press the [Power] switch and hold for more than one second to turn the
power off.
• Do not disconnect the power cord while the monitor power is on. The
data may be lost.
Check After/Before Turning the Power Off

Check the following items for the next use.
• Previous patient data is deleted.
• Temporarily changed settings are changed back to the previous settings.
• There is no dirt, damage or scratches on the monitor.
• The sensors, probes, cuffs, and cables are cleaned and sterilized.
• Accessories are cleaned and stored properly.
• There are enough consumables, such as recording paper and disposable
electrodes for the next use.
• Battery pack is fully charged.
• The power switch on the monitor is turned off and the power cord is
disconnected from the monitor.
• The monitor is not in a wet place.
• Dead batteries are disposed of properly.
• The medical waste is disposed of properly.
• The monitor is stored properly.

Section 3 Necessary Settings Before
Monitoring 3
Changing Date and Time...................................................................................................................................... 3.2

Changing Sound Volume Settings........................................................................................................................ 3.3
Changing the Screen Brightness.......................................................................................................................... 3.5
Changing Waveform Sweep Speed...................................................................................................................... 3.6
Admitting/Discharging a Patient........................................................................................................................... 3.7
Displaying the ADMIT DISCHARGE Window............................................................................................. 3.8
Entering the Patient ID............................................................................................................................... 3.9
Entering the Patient Name....................................................................................................................... 3.10
Entering the Patient Name Using the Keyboard............................................................................. 3.10
Entering the Patient Name Using Free Function............................................................................ 3.11
Selecting Patient Type.............................................................................................................................. 3.12
Importing Patient Information from the Hospital Network......................................................................... 3.13
Admitting a Patient............................................................................................................................................. 3.14
Discharging a Patient......................................................................................................................................... 3.15
Suspended Alarms after Admission or Discharge.................................................................................... 3.16

3. NECESSARY SETTINGS BEFORE MONITORING
Changing Date and Time
When the power is on, the current time is displayed in the upper right corner of
the screen.
NOTE
When the date or time is changed during monitoring, the date and time of
all stored data is also changed and may not match the date and time on
the printout.
1. Display the DATE window.

Touch the Menu key → DATE key.
The DATE window can also be displayed by touching the time on the upper
right corner of the home screen.
2. Touch the YEAR, MONTH, DAY, HOUR or MINUTE key.
3. Touch the desired number(s) using the numeric keypad.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter other items.
5. Touch the SET key. The SET key must be touched before changing
windows. Otherwise the setting changes back to the previous setting.
When the set date is incorrect, the “OUT OF RANGE” message appears on
the screen. Enter the correct date.
6. Touch the Home key to return to the home screen.

Changing Sound Volume Settings
On the DISPLAY/SOUND window, you can select sync sound on or off and 3
adjust the sync sound volume and alarm sound volume.
The following settings can be changed on the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer
to “VOLUME Page” in Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
• NIBP completion sound volume
• Alarm minimum volume
• Key click sound volume
• Interbed alarm volume
1. Display the DISPLAY/SOUND window.

Touch the Menu key → DISPLAY/SOUND key.
2. Touch the ALARM VOLUME or SYNC SOUND VOLUME key. The

ALARM VOLUME or SYNC SOUND VOLUME window opens.
Slider ALARM VOLUME window SYNC SOUND VOLUME window
3. Change settings.
• To change the alarm sound volume, touch the or key to adjust the
setting or drag the slider to the desired level on the setting bar in the
ALARM VOLUME window. You cannot set the volume to 1 which is no
sound.
• Select ON or OFF in the SYNC SOUND VOLUME window to set sync
sound on or off.

• To change the sync sound volume, touch the or key or drag the
slider to the desired level on the setting bar in the SYNC SOUND
VOLUME window. At the lowest volume setting, the sync sound is not
audible.
4. After changing settings, touch the key to close the window.

Changing the Screen Brightness
When operating on battery power, the brightness is automatically set to 3

minimum.

2. Touch the BRIGHTNESS key. The BRIGHTNESS window opens.
Slider
3. Touch the desired place on the setting bar in the BRIGHTNESS window.
Use the or key or drag the slider to the desired level on the setting bar
to adjust the setting.
4. Touch the key to close the window.

Changing Waveform Sweep Speed
The waveform sweep speed can be changed for ECG, pulse and respiration
waveforms. PVM-2703 can also change CO2 waveform sweep speed.

2. Touch the SWEEP SPEED key to change sweep speed for ECG and pulse
waveforms or RESP SWEEP SPEED or RESP/CO2 SWEEP SPEED key to
change sweep speed for respiration waveform. The SWEEP SPEED, RESP
SWEEP SPEED or RESP/CO2 SWEEP SPEED window opens.
SWEEP SPEED window RESP/CO2 SWEEP SPEED window
3. Select the sweep speed in the SWEEP SPEED window for waveforms other
than respiration waveform.
Select the sweep speed in the RESP SWEEP SPEED or RESP/CO2 SWEEP
SPEED window for the respiration waveform.

Admitting/Discharging a Patient
Before entering the name of a new patient, you must first delete all data of a 3
previous patient. Refer to the “Deleting Data” section.
WARNING
Check the alarm settings when admitting a new patient and
whenever the patient condition changes and change the alarm
settings if necessary. The alarm settings return to the alarm master
settings on the SYSTEM SETUP window when:
• The patient is admitted or discharged on the ADMIT DISCHARGE
window.
• “PATIENT TYPE” is changed on the ADMIT DISCHARGE window.
• <SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION WINDOW> in the SYSTEM
SETUP window is set to Off and 30 minutes elapse after monitor
power off.
CAUTION
When admitting a new patient, first delete all data of the previous
patient. Otherwise, the data of the previous patient and new patient
will be mixed together.
NOTE
• After turning the monitor on and when admitting a patient on the
monitor, make sure that the time displayed at the upper right of the
screen is correct. When the date or time is changed during monitoring,
the date and time of all stored data is also changed and may not match
the date and time on the printout.
• When admitting a new patient, check the alarm settings.
• Patient ID is available only when the QI-202P or QI-203P interface is
installed.

Displaying the ADMIT DISCHARGE Window

1. Do one of the following to display the ADMIT DISCHARGE window.
• Touch the Menu key → ADMIT DISCHARGE key.
When MENU is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper left of
the screen, the MENU window can be displayed by touching the MENU
function key.
• Touch the patient name area at the upper part of the home screen.
• When <ADMIT MODE> is set to MANUAL, the STANDBY window

appears after discharging a patient. Touch the ADMIT key on the
STANDBY window.
2. Admit or discharge a patient.
3. Close the window.

• Touch the Home key.
• Touch the waveform display area on the home screen.

Entering the Patient ID

Enter the patient ID by using the keyboard keys displayed on the window. Up to
16 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
1. Touch the PATIENT ID key on the ADMIT DISCHARGE window. The 3

PATIENT ID window with keyboard appears.
2. Enter the patient ID by using the keyboard keys.
3. Touch the ENT key.
4. Close the PATIENT ID window by touching the close button ( ).
Enter patient
ID. Deletes the character
after the cursor.
Cursor
Deletes the character
before the cursor.
Touch to enter the

Touch the desired
patient ID.
character. The
cursor moves to
the right.
Touch to enter capital Enter space. Moves the cursor one block (one character).
letters.

Entering the Patient Name

There are two methods to enter the patient name. For selecting the method, refer
to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
SCREEN KEYBOARD: Use the keyboard keys displayed on the window. Up to
15 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
FREE HAND: Any character or image you have drawn on the free
writing area appears as the patient name.
NOTE
When the QI-202P or QI-203P interface is connected, FREE HAND is not
available.
Entering the Patient Name Using the Keyboard

1. Touch the NAME key on the ADMIT DISCHARGE window. The NAME
window with keyboard appears.
Enter patient
name. Deletes the character
after the cursor.
Cursor
Deletes the character
before the cursor.
Touch to enter the

Touch the desired
patient name. The
character. The
registered patient name
cursor moves to
appears on the patient
the right.
name area on the home
screen.
Touch to enter capital Enter space. Moves the cursor one block (one character).
letters.
2. Enter the patient name by using the keyboard keys.
3. Touch the ENT key. The patient name appears in the patient name area on
the home screen.
4. Close the NAME window by touching the close button ( ).

Entering the Patient Name Using Free Function

1. Touch the NAME key on the ADMIT DISCHARGE window. The NAME
window with free writing area appears.
2. Write the patient name with your finger or touch pen in the free writing area. 3
You can enter any character by drawing it.
Scrolls the writing area left or right in 11 steps. The displayed
writing area is 1/4 of the total available writing area.
Erase all characters.
When finished, touch

this key to set the patient
name. The registered
Patient name patient name appears on
the patient name area on
the home screen.
Writing area. Touch with

your finger or touch pen
to write the patient name.
Your writing appears in
the patient name box.
Sets the touch pen or finger to fill Sets the touch pen or Sets the touch pen or finger to
in a four block square. finger to fill in one block. erase instead of write.
3. Touch the SET key. The patient name appears in the patient name area on the
home screen.
4. Close the NAME window by touching the close button ( ).

Selecting Patient Type

Select the patient type. The alarm settings, scale settings and other settings
change to the default settings according to the patient type.
NOTE
The patient type setting and QRS detection type setting (on the ECG
window) are independent of each other.
1. Display the ADMIT DISCHARGE window. Refer to the “Displaying the

ADMIT DISCHARGE Window” in this section.
2. Touch the PATIENT TYPE key. The PATIENT TYPE window is displayed.
3. Select the patient type. A confirmation message is displayed.

4. Touch the YES key to change the patient type. Touch the NO key to cancel
changing.
Importing Patient Information from the Hospital Network 3

You can automatically import the patient information from the hospital network.
This function is available when HL7 is selected for PROTOCOL and USE QRY
is set to ON. Refer to “NETWORK Window” in Section 2 of the Administrator’s
Guide.
1. Enter the patient ID on the ADMIT DISCHARGE window.
2. Touch the FIND PATIENT key to import the patient information.
3. Check that the imported data is correct.
Data which is imported from the hospital network can be edited or added
manually.

Admitting a Patient
CAUTION
After having entered patient information, you have to take the procedure for
admission.
• Upon admission, the review data (trend data, arrhythmia recall, full disclosure
waveforms, alarm history) is deleted.
• Alarm settings are initialized to the alarm master value.
• Arrhythmia analysis on or off setting is initialized to the master setting.
• NIBP measurements are deleted, the interval at which to measure NIBP is
initialized to the interval master value.
NOTE
• The patient type is not initialized to the master setting when the patient
is admitted.
• If a patient is admitted during NIBP measurement, the measurement
stops.
• When admitting a patient, check each setting including the patient type.
1. Display the ADMIT DISCHARGE window.

Touch the Menu key → ADMIT DISCHARGE key.
2. Touch the ADMIT key on the ADMIT DISCHARGE window. The

confirmation window appears.
3. Touch the OK key to admit the patient.
If the CANCEL key is touched, the procedure for admission is cancelled, the
previous data is not deleted and the settings are not initialized.

Discharging a Patient
3
CAUTION
When monitoring the patient is no longer required, discharge the patient on the
ADMIT DISCHARGE window to delete the data. The patient name and data on
the review windows are deleted, and the alarm settings and arrhythmia analysis
setting return to the alarm master settings, and the NIBP measurement mode
returns to the INTERVAL MASTER setting on the SYSTEM SETUP window.
NOTE
If a patient is admitted during NIBP measurement, the measurement
stops.
1. Display the ADMIT DISCHARGE window.

Touch the Menu key → ADMIT DISCHARGE key.
2. Touch the DISCHARGE key on the ADMIT DISCHARGE window. The

confirmation window appears.
3. Touch the YES key to discharge the patient. Touch the NO key to not delete
data.

4. The home screen appears. Check the following items to confirm that all data
are deleted.
• Patient name on the home screen is deleted.
• “ALARMS SUSPENDED” message appears and alarms are suspended on
the monitor.
Patient name is deleted. “ALARMS SUSPENDED” message appears.
• When <ADMIT MODE> is set to MANUAL, the STANDBY window

appears after discharging the patient.
Suspended Alarms after Admission or Discharge

The alarm function is suspended between patient discharge and admission and
during monitoring preparation to avoid generating any unnecessary alarms.
Alarm function resumes when the SUSPEND ALARMS key is touched or the
following monitoring conditions are continuously met.
Setting of <ALARM ACTIVATION

DELAY> on the SYSTEM SETUP Condition
Window
Alarm function activates when ECG, SpO2 or IBP* is
monitored or NIBP** is measured and a value is displayed.
AUTO
The alarm function is also recovered when the heart rate is 0.
When one of the following requirements is met.
ECG, SpO2 or IBP is continuously monitored for the
1 min 1
selected time.
2 min
NIBP is measured (SYS, DIA or MAP value is
3 min 2
measured).
3 Heart rate becomes 0.
* When SYS > DIA, the difference between these two values is 3 mmHg and this status continues for
more than 3 seconds.
** When SYS, DIA or MAP value is measured.

Section 4 Home Screen
4
Safety Precautions for Monitoring........................................................................................................................ 4.3
Using an Electrosurgical Unit..................................................................................................................... 4.3
Using a Defibrillator.................................................................................................................................... 4.3
Overview............................................................................................................................................................... 4.4
Home Screen............................................................................................................................................. 4.4
Review Windows........................................................................................................................................ 4.4
Sync Sound................................................................................................................................................ 4.4
Adjusting the Sync and Alarm Sound Volume............................................................................................ 4.4
Changing Settings and Performing Other Tasks During Monitoring........................................................... 4.5
Recording on the Home Screen................................................................................................................. 4.5
Home Screen........................................................................................................................................................ 4.6
Settings for the Home Screen.................................................................................................................... 4.7
Waveform Sweep Speed.................................................................................................................. 4.7
Parameter Colors............................................................................................................................. 4.7
Waveform Sensitivity........................................................................................................................ 4.8
Numeric Parameter Display Area (On the DISPLAY window of the SYSTEM SETUP window)...... 4.8
Displaying Other Windows from the Home Screen.................................................................................... 4.9
Freezing Waveforms........................................................................................................................................... 4.10
Using Sleep Mode.............................................................................................................................................. 4.11
Turning Sleep Mode On........................................................................................................................... 4.12
Turning Sleep Mode Off........................................................................................................................... 4.12
Displaying the LARGE NUMERICS Screen....................................................................................................... 4.13

4. HOME SCREEN
This section explains how to monitor the patient’s waveforms and data.
Before monitoring the patient:

• Prepare the patient and equipment according to the Administrator’s Guide and
Sections 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, and 9 to 15 of this User’s Guide. When using the optional
recorder module, also see Section 8.
• Before monitoring a new patient, follow the flowchart in Section 2.
• Read the safety precautions in “Safety Precautions for Monitoring” in this
section.
In this section:
• “Overview” gives general information for all monitoring.
• “Freezing Waveforms” explains how to freeze waveforms.
• “Displaying LARGE NUMERICS Screen” explains about displaying large
numeric data.
• “Using Sleep Mode” explains how to use sleep mode.

4. HOME SCREEN
Safety Precautions for Monitoring
Before beginning monitoring, observe the following safety precautions and the
safety precautions for other parameters in Sections 9 to 15.
4
Using an Electrosurgical Unit
WARNING WARNING
Electrosurgical units (ESU) emit a lot of RF Locate the monitor as far as possible from the
interference. If the monitor is used with an ESU, ESU. Locate them on opposite sides of the
RF interference may affect the monitor operation. operating table, if possible.
WARNING WARNING
Connect the monitor and ESU to different AC When the monitor is used with an electrosurgical
outlets located as far as possible from each other. unit (ESU), firmly attach the entire area of the
ESU return plate. Otherwise, the current from
the ESU flows into the electrodes of the monitor,
causing electrical burn where the electrodes are
attached. For details, refer to the ESU manual.
Using a Defibrillator
WARNING
Before defibrillation, all persons must keep clear of the bed and must
not touch the patient or any equipment connected to the patient.
Failure to follow this warning may cause electrical shock or injury.
If the ECG waveform on the screen is too unstable to synchronize with the
patient’s heart beat because of the following reason(s), remove the cause(s)
of an alarm, message, or unstable ECG, and then use a stable ECG lead for
synchronization.
• ECG electrode is detached or broken. Lead wire is detached or broken.

• Lead wire moves. AC interference, EMG noise or noise from ESU is
superimposed.
• Connection cable is broken or has a short circuit. Connector has poor contact.

4. HOME SCREEN
Overview
Home Screen
When you first begin monitoring, a home screen appears. The home screen
displays waveforms and numeric data for ECG and other parameters. Any time
you touch the Home key, the home screen appears.
The parameters on the home screen depend on the measured parameters.
starts when the connection cord is connected to the socket on the monitor and
electrodes or probe is attached to the patient.
NOTE
When <SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION WINDOW> in the SYSTEM
SETUP window is set to Off and the monitor power is turned on more
than 30 minutes after turning power off, the stored data in the monitor is
deleted.
Review Windows
The trend, arrhythmia recall, alarm history, full disclosure and OCRG windows
display the stored data. For details about the review windows, refer to Section 6.
Sync Sound
During monitoring, a continuous “pip” sounds in synchronization with either the
QRS or pulse. QRS is the default setting. Refer to “Changing the Sync Sound
Source” in the User’s Guide Section 9, 12 or 14 to change the source of the sync
sound.
Adjusting the Sync and Alarm Sound Volume

The sync sound volume and alarm sound volume can be adjusted on the
DISPLAY/SOUND window. At the lowest setting, the alarm sound is audible but
the sync sound is not audible. Refer to “Changing Sound Volume Settings” in
Section 3.

4. HOME SCREEN
Changing Settings and Performing Other Tasks During Monitoring

Every screen except the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen always displays
at least one real-time ECG waveform and the numeric data of monitoring
parameters. This lets you monitor the patient continuously without interruption
while you do other tasks, such as changing settings, printing reports, or viewing
trendgraphs.
4
The screen returns to the home screen when there is no key operation for about 3
minutes.
Recording on the Home Screen

When the optional WS-201P recorder module is installed in the monitor, the
waveforms on the home screen can be recorded. Up to three parameters selected
on the RECORD window are recorded when the Record key is touched.
For details, refer to Section 8 “Recording”.

4. HOME SCREEN
Home Screen
When you first begin monitoring, a home screen appears. To return to the home
screen from another window or screen, touch the Home key.
When a window is displayed and there is no operation for about 3 minutes, the
screen automatically returns to the home screen.
The home screen is automatically laid out according to the measured parameters.
The layout changes when a measuring parameter changes.
The settings for monitoring parameters can be changed individually on the

parameter window. For details about individual parameters, see Sections 9 to 15.
Patient type and transmitter channel

number (displayed alternately) QRS ECG filter
Bed ID Patient name detection mode
Function keys Heart rate type ECG waveform
QRS sync Current date
mark and time
VPC ECG sensitivity
ST level ECG lead
NIBP Cascade mark
SYS/DIA
(MAP) Cascaded ECG
waveform
NIBP
measurement
time
Cuff type
IBP scale
NIBP
measurement
mode IBP
IBP SYS/ waveform
DIA SpO2 pulse
(MEAN) sensitivity
SpO2 pulse
Temperature waveform
Alarm limits SpO2 Respiration rate Respiration waveform Respiration waveform
Respiration sync mark sensitivity

4. HOME SCREEN
When CO2 is monitored
Respiration rate from CO2 End tidal CO2 CO2 waveform Scale of CO2 waveform
Respiration sync mark
You can “freeze” (stop sweeping) the waveforms on the home screen. By
freezing the waveforms, you can observe one part of a waveform in detail. The
numerical data on the screen are not frozen. For details, Refer to the “Freezing
Waveforms” section.
You can use sleep mode when the ZS-900PG/PK transmitter is connected to the
bedside monitor or the monitor is connected to the central monitor network. In
sleep mode, the screen is darkened and sync sound is turned off to prevent the
monitor from disturbing the patient, such as during sleep. For details, refer to
“Using Sleep Mode” later in this section.
Settings for the Home Screen

Waveform Sweep Speed
The sweep speed of waveforms other than respiration waveform on the home
screen can be selected from one of four speeds: 6.25, 12.5, 25 or 50 mm/s at
SWEEP SPEED window of the DISPLAY/SOUND window.
The respiration waveform sweep speed on the home screen can be selected from
one of four speeds: 1.56, 6.25, 12.5 or 25 mm/s at RESP SWEEP SPEED or
RESP/CO2 SWEEP SPEED window of the DISPLAY/SOUND window.
Parameter Colors
The parameter colors are set on the COLOR window of the SYSTEM SETUP
window. Refer to “COLOR Window” in the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.

4. HOME SCREEN
Waveform Sensitivity
Waveform sensitivity can be changed on the parameter window. Refer to
Sections 9 to 15.
Numeric Parameter Display Area (On the DISPLAY window of the

SYSTEM SETUP window)
You can change the layout of the home screen. Refer to “LAYOUT Page” in
Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
NUMERIC PARAMETER AREA - LEFT SIDE NUMERIC PARAMETER AREA - SIDE + SMALL BOTTOM
NUMERIC PARAMETER AREA - BOTTOM

4. HOME SCREEN
Displaying Other Windows from the Home Screen

Touching the following items on the home screen displays the following
windows.
• Numeric value: Parameter setting window

• Patient name: ADMIT DISCHARGE window
4
• Time: DATE window
• Function key: Window assigned to the function key

4. HOME SCREEN
Freezing Waveforms
Normally, the waveforms continuously sweep across the screen. You can also
“freeze” (stop sweeping) the waveforms. By freezing the waveforms, you can
observe one part of a waveform in detail. The numerical data on the screen are
not frozen.
To freeze waveforms, the freeze function must be assigned to one of the function
keys in the upper left corner of the screen. Refer to “KEYS Window” in the
Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
When the freeze function is assigned to a function key, waveforms on the home
screen can be frozen any time by touching the FREEZE key. The waveforms are
frozen for 3 minutes or until they are unfrozen.
When the waveforms are frozen, the “FREEZE” message appears with the frozen
time.
To unfreeze the waveforms, touch any key on the screen.

4. HOME SCREEN
Using Sleep Mode
In sleep mode, the screen is darkened and sync sound is turned off. The sleep
mode is only available when the QI-201P interface is installed and ZS-900PG/
PK transmitter is connected or the QI-202P or QI-203P interface is installed and 4
monitor is connected to a central monitor network.
Use this mode when you want to prevent the monitor from disturbing the patient,
such as during sleep.
When <EXIT SLEEP MODE ON CRISIS ALARM> on the SLEEP window of

the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to:
YES: Sleep mode is turned off and the home screen appears when a CRISIS
level alarm occurs.
NO: Sleep mode continues even when an alarm occurs.
When the time is set in <SLEEP MODE WILL END AT> box on the SLEEP
window of the SYSTEM SETUP window, the monitor exits the sleep mode on
the set clock time.
Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
WARNING
When the <EXIT SLEEP MODE ON CRISIS ALARM> check box
on the ALARM page of the SYSTEM SETUP window is OFF, the
bedside monitor alarm cannot be seen or heard on the bedside
monitor during sleep mode. In this case, monitor the bedside monitor
alarms on the central monitor or telemetry system. Otherwise, the
bedside monitor alarms may be overlooked.

4. HOME SCREEN
Turning Sleep Mode On

1. Press the Menu key. The MENU window appears.
2. Touch the SLEEP key to set the sleep mode.
During the sleep mode, the following screen is displayed.
Turning Sleep Mode Off

Touch the screen or press the [CHECK] key on the right side panel.

4. HOME SCREEN
Displaying the LARGE NUMERICS Screen
The numeric data of all monitoring parameters are enlarged on the LARGE
NUMERICS screen. This window is useful for viewing at a distance.
4
1. Touch the Menu key. The MENU window appears.
2. Touch the LARGE NUMERICS key. The LARGE NUMERICS screen

appears.
SpO2
Heart rate
SpO2
NIBP
pulse bar
SYS/DIA
(MAP)
VPC ST level Respiration rate Temperature NIBP oscillation graph
Touching the numeric value displays the parameter setting window.
3. To return to the standard home screen, touch the Menu key, then touch the
Home key.

Section 5 Alarm Function
Overview of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................. 5.3

What is an Alarm........................................................................................................................................ 5.3 5
Alarm Level................................................................................................................................................ 5.4
Alarm Priority.............................................................................................................................................. 5.4
Silencing/Suspending Alarms.................................................................................................................... 5.4
Alarm Master.............................................................................................................................................. 5.4
Automatic Recording.................................................................................................................................. 5.5
Alarm Setting.............................................................................................................................................. 5.5
Canceling the Technical Alarm................................................................................................................... 5.5
Adjusting Alarm Sound Volume.................................................................................................................. 5.5
Alarm Activation after Power On................................................................................................................ 5.6
ALARM HISTORY Window......................................................................................................................... 5.6
Alarm Escalation........................................................................................................................................ 5.6
Alarm Types.......................................................................................................................................................... 5.7
Vital Signs Alarms...................................................................................................................................... 5.7
Arrhythmia Alarms...................................................................................................................................... 5.7
Technical Alarms........................................................................................................................................ 5.8
ECG Related Alarms........................................................................................................................ 5.8
CO2 Related Alarms (PVM-2703 only)............................................................................................. 5.8
SpO2 Related Alarms....................................................................................................................... 5.9
NIBP Related Alarms....................................................................................................................... 5.9
IBP Related Alarms (PVM-2703 only).............................................................................................. 5.9
Temperature Related Alarms......................................................................................................... 5.10
Other Alarms.................................................................................................................................. 5.10
Interbed Alarms........................................................................................................................................ 5.10
Messages................................................................................................................................................. 5.11
ECG Related Messages................................................................................................................. 5.11
Respiration Related Messages...................................................................................................... 5.11
CO2 Related Messages (PVM-2703 only)...................................................................................... 5.11
SpO2 Related Messages................................................................................................................ 5.11
NIBP Related Messages................................................................................................................ 5.12
IBP Related Message (PVM-2703 only)........................................................................................ 5.12
Other Messages............................................................................................................................. 5.12
Alarm Indications................................................................................................................................................ 5.13
Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 5.13
Individual Alarm Indications..................................................................................................................... 5.13
Vital Signs Alarms.......................................................................................................................... 5.14
Arrhythmia Alarms.......................................................................................................................... 5.17
Technical Alarms............................................................................................................................ 5.18
Other Alarms.................................................................................................................................. 5.20
Alarm Control Marks................................................................................................................................ 5.21
Individual Vital Signs Alarm Off Marks........................................................................................... 5.21
Flow of Alarm Function............................................................................................................................ 5.22

Silencing and Suspending Alarms...................................................................................................................... 5.23
Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 5.23
Silencing an Alarm......................................................................................................................... 5.23
Suspending Alarms........................................................................................................................ 5.23
Silencing Alarms After Alarm Occurrence................................................................................................ 5.25
Silencing Alarms............................................................................................................................ 5.26
Canceling Alarm Silence................................................................................................................ 5.26
Suspending Alarms Before Alarm Occurrence........................................................................................ 5.26
Suspending Alarms........................................................................................................................ 5.26
Suspending All Alarms Indefinitely................................................................................................. 5.27
Suspending All Alarms and NIBP STAT and Auto Measurement Indefinitely................................. 5.28
Turning Automatic Alarm Recording On/Off....................................................................................................... 5.30
Setting Alarms.................................................................................................................................................... 5.32
Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 5.32
Alarm Limits Ranges................................................................................................................................ 5.32
Vital Signs Alarms.......................................................................................................................... 5.33
Arrhythmia Alarms.......................................................................................................................... 5.36
Setting Vital Signs Alarms Individually..................................................................................................... 5.37
Automatically Setting All Upper and Lower Alarm Limits (Including ST).................................................. 5.38
Automatic Setting Range............................................................................................................... 5.38
Setting All Vital Signs Alarms to a Preset Pattern (Alarm Master)........................................................... 5.39
Checking Arrhythmia Alarm Settings........................................................................................................ 5.41
Interbed Alarm.................................................................................................................................................... 5.42
Checking the Alarm Function............................................................................................................................. 5.43

5. ALARM FUNCTION
This section explains:

• An overview of alarms
• Alarm types
• Alarm indications
• Silencing an alarm
• Suspending all alarms before occurrence
• Setting individual alarms, turning automatic alarm recording on or off and all
other functions for alarms
5
Overview of Alarms
What is an Alarm
When the monitor detects an abnormal patient condition, it can generate an alarm
sound, screen indication and alarm lamp indication. When the optional recorder
module is installed in the monitor, ECG waveforms and data can be recorded
at an alarm occurrence. You can set each individual alarm condition. There are
three types of alarms: vital signs, arrhythmias and technical alarms, and three
levels of alarm: crisis, warning and advisory. The different alarm types are fully
explained in the “Alarm Types” section and different alarm levels are explained
in the “Alarm Indications” section.
WARNING
Check the alarm settings when admitting a new patient and
whenever the patient condition changes and change the alarm
settings if necessary. The alarm settings return to the alarm master
settings on the SYSTEM SETUP window when:
• The patient is admitted or discharged on the ADMIT DISCHARGE
window.
• “PATIENT TYPE” is changed on the ADMIT DISCHARGE window.
• <SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION WINDOW> in the SYSTEM
SETUP window is set to Off and 30 minutes elapse after monitor
power off.
NOTE
When admitting a new patient, check the alarm settings.
Alarm indicator
Highlighted Alarm message

numeric data
Alarm sound

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Level
There are three alarm levels.
CRISIS: Patient is in critical condition and the patient’s life may be at
risk. Immediate action must be taken. Electrodes or probe off, or
incorrect lead or other cable connections may also cause this alarm.
WARNING: Patient is in critical condition. Prompt action should be taken.
Electrodes or probe off, or incorrect lead or other cable
connections may also cause this alarm.
ADVISORY: Electrodes, probe, cuff, lead and other cable connections
or settings on the monitor are not appropriate for accurate
measurement. Prompt action should be taken.
Alarm Priority
When several alarms occur at the same time, the alarm with the highest alarm
level is indicated.
Silencing/Suspending Alarms
You can temporarily silence current alarm sounds and indications for a 1, 2 or 3
minute period. See the “Silencing and Suspending Alarms” section.
WARNING
During alarm suspension (“ALARMS SUSPENDED” or “ALL
ALARMS OFF” message displayed), all alarms are turned off. Be
careful when you suspend the alarm.
The SUSPEND MONITORING, SUSPEND ALARMS or ALL ALARMS OFF

key is displayed on the MENU window. The key to be displayed on the MENU
window is set on the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s
Guide, Section 3.
The SUSPEND ALARMS and SUSPEND MONITORING key can be assigned

to one of the function keys. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
Alarm Master
For fast and easy alarm setup, a group of alarm items can be set all together
at one time. For example, there may be typical alarm settings at your hospital,
or you may have certain alarm settings for certain patients. There is one alarm
master for vital signs and one alarm master for arrhythmias. The alarm masters
are set by the administrator on the MASTER window of the SYSTEM SETUP
window.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Even when alarms are set by an alarm master, individual alarm settings can still
be changed on the ALARM LIMITS and ARRHYTH ALARMS windows or
the alarm setting window of each parameter window. See the “Setting Alarm”
section.
Automatic Recording
When the optional recorder module is installed in the monitor, you can set the
5
monitor to automatically record ECG waveforms and data when an alarm occurs.
See the “Turning Automatic Alarm Recording On/Off” section.
If a higher level alarm occurs during another alarm recording, the present alarm
recording is canceled and the higher level alarm is recorded.
Alarm Setting
Usually, alarms are set before monitoring, but alarms can be set or changed
anytime without interrupting monitoring.
If you turn the bedside monitor power off and 30 minutes elapses when <SHOW
ADMIT CONFIRMATION WINDOW> is set to Off or change the PATIENT
TYPE setting, all alarm settings return to the alarm master settings of the
SYSTEM SETUP window.
To set a parameter alarm to off, set the upper and lower limits to OFF.
Canceling the Technical Alarm

When you remove a sensor cable or probe cable from the bedside monitor and
touch the Silence Alarms key, the technical alarm can be canceled. Touching the
SUSPEND MONITORING, SUSPEND ALARMS and ALL ALARMS OFF
keys also cancel the technical alarm.
Adjusting Alarm Sound Volume

The alarm sound volume can be adjusted on the DISPLAY/SOUND window.
Refer to “Changing Sound Volume Settings” in Section 3.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Activation after Power On
CAUTION
After the monitor power is turned on, parameter-related alarms do
not function until the parameters are monitored.
starts when the connection cord is connected to the socket on the monitor and the
electrodes or probe are attached to the patient. The alarm activates when one of
the following occurs:
• ECG or SpO2 is monitored or NIBP is measured and a value is displayed
(when AUTO is selected for <ALARM ACTIVATION DELAY> on the
ALARM window of the SYSTEM SETUP window)
• ECG, SpO2 or IBP is continuously monitored for the selected time (when
1 min, 2 min or 3 min is selected for <ALARM ACTIVATION DELAY>)
• NIBP is measured (when 1 min, 2 min or 3 min is selected for <ALARM
ACTIVATION DELAY>)
ALARM HISTORY Window

The vital sign data is saved as a file on a vital sign or arrhythmia alarm
occurrence. These data can be viewed on the ALARM HISTORY window. Refer
to “Alarm History Window” in Section 6.
Alarm Escalation
If the APNEA, SpO2, CHECK ELECTRODES, ECG CANNOT ANALYZE or
SpO2 CHECK PROBE alarm occurs and no action is taken for a selected time,
the alarm level can be escalated. For details, refer to “ALARM Window” in

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Types
Alarms are divided into 4 categories: vital signs, arrhythmia, technical and
interbed alarms. The alarm name is displayed on the screen when an alarm
occurs. For the vital signs and arrhythmia alarms, waveforms and data can be
recorded in automatic alarm recording when the optional recorder module is
installed in the monitor. 5
For the alarm types which are not classified into alarm levels, only the message
is displayed.
Vital Signs Alarms

Vital sign alarm occurs when the parameter value exceeds the upper or lower
alarm limit.
Arrhythmia Alarms
Arrhythmia Name Description

Longer than 3 to 10 seconds (selectable) with no
ASYSTOLE
QRS complex.
VF Ventricular fibrillation longer than 4 seconds.
Ventricular tachycardia. 3 to 9 (selectable*1) or more
VT consecutive VPCs when heart rate exceeding the VT
heart rate limit (16 to 300 beats/min selectable*1).
Extreme tachycardia exceeding the EXTREME
EXT TACHY*1
TACHY limit.
Extreme bradycardia dropping below the
EXT BRADY*1
EXTREME BRADY limit.
Ventricular bradycardia. 3 or more consecutive
V BRADY*1 VPCs when heart rate dropping below V BRADY
heart rate limit (15 to 299 beats/min selectable).
VPC short run. 3 to 8 (selectable) consecutive VPCs
when heart rate exceeds the VPC RUN heart
rate limit (16 to 300 beats/min selectable*1).
VPC RUN
or
The selected number*4 of consecutive VPCs when
heart rate drops below the VT heart rate limit.
Supraventricular tachycardia. 3 to 9 (selectable)
or more consecutive normal QRS of regular R-R
SV TACHY*1
interval when heart rate exceeding the SV TACHY
TACHYCARDIA Heart rate above the upper heart rate limit.
BRADYCARDIA Heart rate below the lower heart rate limit.
PAUSE*1 1 to 3 seconds (selectable) with no QRS.
V RHYTHM*1 Ventricular rhythm. 3 or more consecutive VPCs.
COUPLET VPC couplet (paired VPCs). 2 consecutive VPCs.
Early VPC including R-on-T type. VPC with a time
interval from the preceding normal QRS complex of
EARLY VPC less than approximately one-third of the normal R-R
interval, at heart rate dropping below 120*2 beats/
min.

5. ALARM FUNCTION

Two different shaped VPCs within the last
MULTIFORM*1
3 minutes.
Ventricular bigeminy. 3 or more consecutive pairs of
BIGEMINY VPC and normal QRS. A dominant rhythm of N-V-
N-V-N-V (N = normal beat, V = ventricular beat)
Ventricular trigeminy. A dominant rhythm of N-N-
TRIGEMINY*1
V-N-N-V.
Frequent VPCs. VPC rate (VPCs/min) reaching
FREQ VPC or exceeding the preset limit of 1 to 99 VPCs/min
(selectable).
IRREGULAR RR*1 Consistently irregular R-R intervals.
R-R interval 1.75 times longer than the dominant
PROLONGED RR*1
R-R interval.
No QRS and pacing pulse within the bradycardia
NO PACER PULSE*1*3
limit. Oversensing.
No QRS from the preceding pacing pulse for the
PACER NON-
preset time interval (40 to 480 ms selectable). Non-
CAPTURE*1*3
capture.
*1 Available only when <ARRHYTHMIA TYPE> on the ECG page of the

SYSTEM SETUP window is set to “EXTENDED”.
*2 120 beats/min when <QRS DETECTION TYPE> is set to Adult, 150 beats/
min when <QRS DETECTION TYPE> is set to CHILD or NEONATE.
* Available only when <PACING DETECT> is set to ON.
3
*4 This number is set in the VT alarm setting.
Technical Alarms
You can see the detailed information of the technical alarms by touching the
Guide key on the upper right of the screen. For details, refer to “Guide Window”
in Section 1.
ECG Related Alarms
Alarm Name Description

Noise interference for more than 30 seconds and
CANNOT ANALYZE heart rate cannot be counted and arrhythmia cannot
be analyzed.
CHECK ELECTRODES Electrode loose or disconnected.
CHECK ELECTRODE Specified electrode (--) loose or disconnected.
CO2 Related Alarms (PVM-2703 only)

CO2 APNEA Apnea exceeded the apnea alarm limit.
CO2 CHANGE The CO2 adapter is damaged.
ADAPTER
CO2 CHECK SENSOR Insufficient sensor light.
CO2 connection cord is disconnected from the socket
CO2 CONNECTOR OFF
during measurement.
CO2 SENSOR ERROR CO2 sensor is damaged.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
SpO2 Related Alarms

CANNOT DETECT Pulse cannot be detected.
PULSE
CHANGE PROBE SpO2 probe or connection cord is damaged.
Finger probe is not attached to the patient firmly
CHECK PROBE or the amount of transmitted light is too small to
measure.
The probe is not attached at the appropriate site or 5
CHECK PROBE SITE
the probe is past its expiration date.
SpO2 connection cord is disconnected from the SpO2
CONNECTOR OFF
socket during monitoring.
LIGHT Too much light on probe.
INTERFERENCE
MODULE ERROR SpO2 hardware malfunction.
NIBP Related Alarms

AIR LEAK Cuff pressure does not change after inflation.
Measurement cannot be performed because the
CANNOT DETECT patient’s pulse wave is small, the cuff or hose leaks
PULSE air, the cuff hose is obstructed or the cuff is not
connected.
CHECK INTERVAL NIBP is measured at 1 minute intervals for more
SETTING than 30 minutes.
NIBP hose is disconnected from the cuff socket
CONNECTOR OFF
during monitoring.
Cuff pressure does not decrease after measurement
CUFF OCCLUSION
has completed.
Enormous pressure was applied by the pressure of
HIGH CUFF PRESS
the cuff.
MEAS TIME OUT The measuring time exceeded the specified time.
MODULE ERROR NIBP module malfunction.
SAFETY CIRCUIT Monitor automatically stopped inflating.
RUNNING
SYSTOLIC OVER Systolic value is outside the measurable range.
IBP Related Alarms (PVM-2703 only)

Blood pressure transducer is disconnected from the
PRESS CHECK
IBP connection cord or the IBP connection cord is
SENSOR
damaged.
PRESS CONNECTOR IBP connection cord is disconnected from the socket
OFF during measurement.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Temperature Related Alarms

Temperature probe or extension cable is
CONNECTOR OFF
disconnected from the TEMP socket.
TEMP CHECK Temperature probe is disconnected from the
SENSOR extension cable or the probe is damaged.
Other Alarms

Alarm concerning the – – – (parameter name)
– – – ALARM
occurred.
BATTERY ERROR Battery problems.
BATTERY WEAK Battery pack is nearly discharged.
The alarm output cable is disconnected from the
serial socket of the QI-202P or QI-203P interface
CHECK ALARM OUT
when the ALARM OUTPUT setting is set to
CABLE
CRISIS or CRISIS/WARNING on the SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION screen.
CLOCK IC FAILURE The clock IC is damaged.
COMMUNICATION
LAN cable problems or incorrect network settings.
LOSS
Patient information cannot be obtained from the HIS
HIS SYNC ERROR
server.
MPU MODULE MPU circuit malfunction.
ERROR
PARAMETER NOT Connected cord or cable of the parameter is not
AVAILABLE available on the monitor.
PRINT ERROR Printer problems.
TRANSMITTER The connection cord of the transmitter is
CONNECTOR OFF disconnected from the monitor.
Interbed Alarms
When an alarm occurs on an interbed bed, the interbed alarm occurs on this
bedside monitor. For details, refer to “Interbed Alarm” later in this section.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Messages
The following messages are monitoring information and are not considered
alarms.
ECG Related Messages
Message Description
ARRHYTHMIA Arrhythmia analysis is turned off.
ANALYSIS OFF
5
Monitoring lead is being changed by auto lead
AUTO LEAD CHANGE
change function.
LEARNING Learning QRS for arrhythmia analysis.
(During the first 30 seconds)
NOISE
Too much noise preventing analysis.
Paced QRS is detected. (This message appears only
PACING
when PACING DETECT is set to ON.)
Respiration Related Messages
Message Description
RESP OFF Respiration monitoring is turned off.
CO2 Related Messages (PVM-2703 only)
Message Description
Zero calibration is not performed when using a TG-
CO2 CAL??
950P/970P CO2 sensor kit.
CO2 CAL COMPLETE Calibration is complete.
CO2 CAL ERROR Calibration failed.
Zeroing is performed when using a TG-950P/970P
CO2 ZEROING
CO2 sensor kit.
CO2 ZEROING Calibration is complete when using a TG-950P/970P
COMPLETE CO2 sensor kit.
Zeroing failed when using a TG-950P/970P CO2
CO2 ZEROING ERROR
sensor kit.
SpO2 Related Messages
Message Description
Searching for the correct pulse wave. Auto gain
control is being done. When the message is
DETECTING PULSE*
displayed for more than 20 seconds, the detected
pulse is too small to measure.
LOW QUALITY Pulse waveform is not stable.
SIGNAL
WEAK PULSE Poor peripheral circulation.
* When this message is displayed for more than 30 seconds, the message
changes to the “CANNOT DETECT PULSE” alarm.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
NIBP Related Messages
Message Description
INFLATION PRESS Insufficient cuff inflation pressure.
LOW
INFLATION TIME Venous puncture cuff inflation time is passed.
PASSED
Measurement and cuff inflation started before the
PLEASE WAIT
cuff is deflated enough.
REMEASURING Remeasuring NIBP.
WEAK PULSE Patient’s pulse is small.
ZEROING NIBP zero balance adjustment is performed.
IBP Related Message (PVM-2703 only)
Message Description
PRESS OUT OF The measured value is outside the measurable range.
RANGE
PRESS ZERO Zero balance adjustment is performed.
CALIBRATING
PRESS ZERO Zero balance is not adjusted.
IMBALANCE
PRESS ZERO OUT OF Cannot adjust zero balance.
RANGE
PRESS ZERO Unstable zero balance.
UNSTABLE
PRESS ZEROING Zero balance adjustment is complete.
COMPLETE
Other Messages
Message Description
ALARM SILENCED Alarm is silenced.
ALARM SUSPENDED/ The SUSPEND MONITORING key was
SUSPENDED MONITORING touched.
The SUSPEND ALARMS key was touched.
ALARMS SUSPENDED: X min
Remaining suspended time is indicated.
The ALL ALARMS OFF key was touched to
ALL ALARMS OFF
turn all alarms OFF.
CLOSE PAPER MAGAZINE Recorder door is open.
FREEZE Waveforms are frozen.
INSERT REC PAPER No recording paper.
Alarm occurred on an interbed bed of the
Bed name INTERBED ALARM
bed name.
MONITOR OFF Monitor cannot access to interbed bed.
INVALID CARD Invalid SD card is inserted.
SIMULATED DATA The displayed data is simulated data.
Changing the parameter on the trend
UPDATING DATA
window.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Indications
Overview
The monitor can indicate alarms both visually and audibly:
• Alarm sound
• Alarm message or highlighted numeric data on the screen
• Alarm indicator: red blinking, yellow blinking or cyan or yellow lit LED 5
Alarm control marks indicating that various alarm functions are turned off are
also displayed.
The same color is set for all parameters. When an alarm occurs, the alarmed
parameter color changes according to the alarm level set on the SYSTEM
SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
CRISIS: red
WARNING: yellow
ADVISORY: cyan
or,
CRISIS: red
WARNING: orange
ADVISORY: yellow
The alarm indicator on the monitor indicates three alarm levels: crisis, warning and
advisory. The lamp blinks or lights according to the alarm level. The colors are set
on the SYSTEM SETUP window.
CRISIS: Blinking red
WARNING: Blinking yellow
ADVISORY: Lights in cyan or yellow
Individual Alarm Indications

The alarm level for the HR/PR, VPC, ST, RR, APNEA, CO2(E)*, CO2(I)*, SpO2,
NIBP, PRESS*, TEMP, ECG CHECK ELECTRODES, CANNOT ANALYZE,
SpO2 CHECK PROBE, and arrhythmia (ASYSTOLE, VF, VT, V BRADY,
EXT TACHY, EXT BRADY, SV TACHY, VPC RUN, TACHYCARDIA,
BRADYCARDIA, COUPLET, EARLY VPC, MULTIFORM, V RHYTHM,
PAUSE, BIGEMINY, TRIGEMINY, VPC, IRREGULAR RR, PACER NON-
CAPTURE, PROLONGED RR, NO PACER PULSE) alarms can be selected on
the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
* Only available for PVM-2703.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Technical alarm and

ECG message display area message display area
Vital sign alarm display area
Vital Signs Alarms
Alarm Sound/Display Alarm

Alarm Alarm Sound Alarm Display
Level Duration Indicator LED
NK1 (Continuous pip sound), Highlighted numeric
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or data and “HR/PR Blinking red
IEC standard (ceg-gC) ALARM” message
NK1 (Continuous bing bong
Highlighted numeric
sound), NK2 (Continuous ding
WARNING data and “HR/PR Blinking yellow
HR*/PR ding sound) or IEC standard During detection
ALARM” message
(ceg)
NK1 and NK2 (Single beep
Highlighted numeric
every 20 or 120 seconds) or IEC Lights in cyan/
ADVISORY data and “HR/PR
standard (ec every 20 or 120 yellow
ALARM” message
seconds)
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or data and “VPC Blinking red
Highlighted numeric
WARNING data and “VPC Blinking yellow
VPC ding sound) or IEC standard During detection
ALARM” message
(ceg)
Highlighted numeric
ADVISORY data and “VPC
ALARM” message
seconds)
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or data and “ST Blinking red
Highlighted numeric
WARNING data and “ST Blinking yellow
ST ding sound) or IEC standard During detection
ALARM” message
(ceg)
Highlighted numeric
ADVISORY data and “ST
ALARM” message
seconds)
* When arrhythmia analysis is turned on, the “TACHYCARDIA” or “BRADYCARDIA” message also appears.

5. ALARM FUNCTION

CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or data and “RR Blinking red
Highlighted numeric
WARNING data and “RR Blinking yellow
RR ding sound) or IEC standard During detection
ALARM” message
(ceg)
NK1 and NK2 (Single beep 5
Highlighted numeric
ADVISORY data and “RR
ALARM” message
seconds)
NK1 (Continuous pip sound), Highlighted
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or “APNEA ALARM” Blinking red
IEC standard (ceg-gC) message
Highlighted
WARNING “APNEA ALARM” Blinking yellow
APNEA ding sound) or IEC standard During detection
message
(ceg)
Highlighted
ADVISORY “APNEA ALARM”
message
seconds)
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or data and “SpO2 Blinking red
SpO2 NK1 (Continuous bing bong During detection
Highlighted numeric
WARNING data and “SpO2 Blinking yellow
ding sound) or IEC standard
ALARM” message
(ceg)
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or data and “NIBP Blinking red
Highlighted numeric
WARNING data and “NIBP Blinking yellow
NIBP ding sound) or IEC standard During detection
ALARM” message
(ceg)
Highlighted numeric
ADVISORY data and “NIBP
ALARM” message
seconds)
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or data and “PRESS Blinking red
Highlighted numeric
WARNING data and “PRESS Blinking yellow
PRESS* ding sound) or IEC standard During detection
ALARM” message
(ceg)
Highlighted numeric
ADVISORY data and “PRESS
ALARM” message
seconds)

5. ALARM FUNCTION

CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or data and “TEMP Blinking red
Highlighted numeric
WARNING data and “TEMP Blinking yellow
TEMP ding sound) or IEC standard During detection
ALARM” message
(ceg)
Highlighted numeric
ADVISORY data and “TEMP
ALARM” message
seconds)
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or data and “CO2(E) Blinking red
CO2(E)* NK1 (Continuous bing bong During detection
Highlighted numeric
WARNING data and “CO2(E) Blinking yellow
ALARM” message
(ceg)
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or data and “CO2(I) Blinking red
CO2(I)* NK1 (Continuous bing bong During detection
Highlighted numeric
WARNING data and “CO2(I) Blinking yellow
ALARM” message
(ceg)

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Arrhythmia Alarms
Alarm Sound/Display Alarm Indicator
Level Duration LED
NK1 (Continuous
ASYSTOLE pip sound), NK2
VF CRISIS (Continuous ping Highlighted message During detection Blinking red
VT sound) or IEC standard
(ceg-gC)
NK1 (Continuous
pip sound), NK2 5
CRISIS (Continuous ping Highlighted message Blinking red
VPC RUN sound) or IEC standard
COUPLET (ceg-gC)
EARLY VPC NK1 (Continuous bing
FREQ VPC bong sound), NK2
EXT TACHY* WARNING (Continuous ding ding Highlighted message During detection Blinking yellow
EXT BRADY* sound) or IEC standard
V BRADY* (ceg)
SV TACHY* NK1 and NK2 (Single
PAUSE* beep every 20 or
Lights in cyan/
ADVISORY 120 seconds) or IEC Highlighted message
yellow
standard (ec every 20
or 120 seconds)
NK1 (Continuous
pip sound), NK2
CRISIS (Continuous ping Highlighted message Blinking red
MULTIFORM* sound) or IEC standard
V RHYTHM* (ceg-gC)
BIGEMINY
NK1 (Continuous bing
TRIGEMINY*
bong sound), NK2
IRREGULAR RR*
WARNING (Continuous ding ding Highlighted message At detection Blinking yellow
PROLONGED RR*
sound) or IEC standard
NO PACER
(ceg)
PULSE*
PACER NON- NK1 and NK2 (Single
CAPUTRE* beep every 20 or
Lights in cyan/
yellow
standard (ec every 20
or 120 seconds)
* Available only when <ARRHYTHMIA TYPE> on the ECG page of the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to
“EXTENDED”.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Technical Alarms
ECG related alarms
Alarm Sound/Display Alarm Indicator
Level Duration LED
CHECK NK1 (Continuous bing
ELECTRODES bong sound), NK2
Highlighted numeric
WARNING (Continuous ding ding Blinking yellow
data and message
CHECK sound) or IEC standard
ELECTRODE – – (ceg)
During detection
(electrode lead NK1 and NK2 (Single
name) beep every 20 or
Lights in cyan/
yellow
CANNOT standard (ec every 20
ANALYSIS or 120 seconds)
CO2 related alarms (PVM-2703 only)

Alarm Display Sound/ Alarm
Alarm
Alarm Alarm Sound Home When a window Display Indicator
Level
screen is open Duration LED
CO2 CHANGE
ADAPTER
CO2 CHECK every 20 or 120 seconds) or During Lights in
ADVISORY Highlighted message
SENSOR IEC standard (ec every 20 or detection cyan/yellow
120 seconds)
CO2 SENSOR
ERROR
SpO2 related alarms

Alarm
Level
sound), NK2 (Continuous Blinking
CHANGE PROBE WARNING Highlighted message
ding ding sound) or IEC yellow
standard (ceg)
CANNOT
DETECT PULSE
CHECK PROBE
SITE NK1 and NK2 (Single beep
every 20 or 120 seconds) or Lights in
CONNECTOR ADVISORY Highlighted message
IEC standard (ec every 20 or cyan/yellow
OFF
120 seconds) During
LIGHT detection
INTERFERENCE
MODULE ERROR
WARNING
standard (ceg)
CHECK PROBE Highlighted message
ADVISORY
IEC standard (ec every 20 or cyan/yellow
120 seconds)

5. ALARM FUNCTION
NIBP related alarms

Alarm
Level
CUFF NK1 (Continuous bing bong
OCCLUSION sound), NK2 (Continuous Blinking
WARNING Highlighted message
SAFETY CIRCUIT
standard (ceg)
RUNNING
AIR LEAK 5
CANNOT
DETECT PULSE
CHECK
INTERVAL During
SETTING detection
CONNECTOR every 20 or 120 seconds) or Lights in
OFF IEC standard (ec every 20 or cyan/yellow
120 seconds)
HIGH CUFF
PRESS
MEAS TIME-OUT
MODULE ERROR
SYSTOLIC OVER
IBP related alarms (PVM-2703 only)
Alarm display Sound/ Alarm

Alarm
Level
PRESS CHECK
SENSOR NK1 and NK2 (Single beep
every 20 or 120 seconds) or During Lights in
PRESS IEC standard (ec every 20 or detection cyan/yellow
CONNECTOR 120 seconds)
OFF
Temperature related alarms

Alarm
Level
CONNECTOR NK1 and NK2 (Single beep
OFF every 20 or 120 seconds) or During Lights in
TEMP CHECK IEC standard (ec every 20 or detection cyan/yellow
SENSOR 120 seconds)

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Other Alarms
Sound/ Alarm
Alarm Alarm Level Alarm Sound Alarm Display Display Indicator
Duration LED
BATTERY ERROR
WARNING Highlighted message
BATTERY WEAK
standard (ceg)
CHECK ALARM
OUT CABLE
CLOCK IC FAILURE
COMMUNICATION
LOSS
During
HIS SYNC ERROR NK1 and NK2 (Single beep detection
MPU MODULE IEC standard (ec every 20 or cyan/yellow
ERROR 120 seconds)
PARAMETER NOT
AVAILABLE
PRINT ERROR
TRANSMITTER
CONNECTOR OFF

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Control Marks

When certain alarm functions are turned off, an alarm control mark is displayed
in the upper right corner of the screen.
Alarm is silenced by touching the Silence Alarms key on the

bedside monitor. Remaining minutes appears.
Alarms are suspended for a certain period.

5
Alarms are suspended infinitely or vital sign alarm limit is set to off.
Individual Vital Signs Alarm Off Marks

The vital sign alarm off mark can be displayed at every parameter which has
the vital signs alarm limit set to OFF. The upper/lower alarm limits can also be
displayed at each parameter.
Set this setting at <LIMIT DISPLAY> of the ALARM window on the SYSTEM
SETUP window. See the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3. The default setting is
VALUES.
LIMIT DISPLAY set to MARK LIMIT DISPLAY set to MARK DIM LIMIT DISPLAY set to VALUES
BRIGHT

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Flow of Alarm Function
Start monitoring
Suspend all alarms indefinitely
Suspend all alarms by touching the ALL ALARMS

OFF key on the MENU window
The “ALL ALARMS OFF” message with all alarms off mark
appears at the top of the screen. Suspend all alarms by touching the SUSPEND
No alarms are generated until the alarm function is MONITORING key on the MENU window
Suspend all alarms for a period

re-activated.
The “SUSPEND MONITORING” and “ALARMS SUSPENDED”
message with alarm suspended mark alternately appears at the
top of the screen. No alarms are generated until the system resumes
monitoring or alarm function is re-activated.
Suspend all alarms by touching the SUSPEND

ALARMS key on the MENU window
The “ALARMS SUSPENDED --- min” message appears at the
top of the screen. No alarms are generated for a set period.
Arrhythmia Technical Interbed

Vital sign alarm
alarm alarm alarm
Set the upper/lower limits ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS on Connect the monitor to the
on the ALARM LIMIT or off on the ECG window of the network
window or parameter SYSTEM SETUP window
Alarm setting and alarm behaviors
window
Off Not connected
Arrhythmia is No interbed
On not analyzed Connected operation
Set alarm on or off for each Set interbed alarm on the

arrhythmia and alarm threshold INTERBED page of the
Off on the ARRHYTH page of the SYSTEM SETUP window
No alarms SYSTEM SETUP window
generated NONE
On Off No alarms
No alarms generated ALL, CRISIS AND generated
On even if arrhythmia is WARNINGS, CRISIS
detected
An alarm is generated when An alarm is generated An alarm is generated An alarm is generated

the alarm setting value when an arrhythmia is when a technical alarm when an alarm is detected
is exceeded. detected. is detected. on an interbed bed.
Silence Alarms
Identify the cause of the generated alarm and silence the alarm Identify the cause of the
Silence an alarm
by pressing the [Silence Alarms] key generated alarm and

silence the alarm by
The “ALARM SILENCED --- min” message and the period in which
touching the SILENCE
the alarm is silenced appear at the top of the screen.
ALARM key on the
INTERBED window

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Silencing and Suspending Alarms
Overview
Silencing an Alarm
When an alarm occurs, you can silence the alarm sound and indications for one,
two or three minutes by touching the Silence Alarms key on the screen. When
5
a vital signs alarm or arrhythmia alarm is silenced, the alarm resumes after the
alarm silence ends. When a technical alarm other than the following alarms is
silenced, the alarm indication does not resume after the alarm silence ends. If the
following alarms are silenced, the alarm resumes after the alarm silence ends.
• BATTERY ERROR • BATTERY WEAK
• ECG CANNOT ANALYZE • NIBP CUFF OCCLUSION
• NIBP SAFETY CIRCUIT RUNNING • SpO2 CHANGE PROBE
When several alarms occur together and the Silence Alarms key is touched,
all alarms are silenced. To cancel vital sign or arrhythmia alarm silence, touch
the Silence Alarms key. <SILENCE ALARMS TIME> is set on the ALARM
window of the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide,
Section 3.
When the Monitor is Connected to the Central Monitor Network

When the bedside monitor is connected to a central monitor network, all alarms
other than NIBP alarm are temporarily silenced by touching the Silence Alarms
key on the central monitor. Refer to the central monitor Operator’s Manual for
details.
When the bedside monitor is disconnected from the central monitor network,
the “Communication Loss” alarm is indicated according to the setting on the
<COMMUNICATION LOSS NOTIFICATION> setting on the NETWORK
page of the ALARM window. Refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide for
details.
NOTE
• When <COMMUNICATION LOSS NOTIFICATION> is set to OFF, there
will be no communication loss alarm. When it is set to Off, always pay
careful attention to the communication status.
• When <COMMUNICATION LOSS NOTIFICATION> is set to NO
SOUND, an alarm for the same alarm condition does not occur again
while communication is still lost. While it is in NO SOUND, always pay
careful attention to the communication status.
Suspending Alarms
All alarms can also be suspended before they occur. During alarm suspension, all
alarms are off. This monitor has two types of alarm suspension according to the
settings of the SILENCE/SUSPEND page of the ALARM window.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Monitor Example of How This Function is How the Alarm Function

Key to Touch
Operation Used Comes Back
Suspends all alarms For electrode replacement. SUSPEND ALARMS When 1, 2 or 3 minutes set on
for 1, 2 or 3 minutes key on the screen the <SUSPEND ALARMS
TIME> elapse.
When the SUSPEND
ALARMS key is touched
again.
Suspends all When the patient is being examined. SUSPEND When the SUSPEND
alarms and NIBP MONITORING key MONITORING key is touched
STAT/SIM and on the screen again.
auto measurement When the patient is connected to a heart- When the condition set for
indefinitely lung machine or being examined. the <ALARM ACTIVATION
DELAY> is met. (See the table
below)
Suspends all alarms When you want to turn off an unnecessary ALL ALARMS OFF When the ALL ALARMS OFF
indefinitely alarm in such situations as when the key on the screen key is touched again.
patient’s vital signs are obviously out
of normal range and the medical staff
are aware that the patient is in an alarm
condition and are currently treating the
patient.
Setting of <ALARM ACTIVATION

DELAY> on the SYSTEM SETUP Condition
Window
Alarm function activates when ECG, SpO2 or IBP* is
monitored or NIBP** is measured and a value is displayed.
AUTO
The alarm function is also recovered when the heart rate is 0.
When one of the following requirements is met.
1 min ECG, SpO2 or IBP is continuously monitored for the
1
2 min selected time.
3 min 2 NIBP is measured (SYS, DIA or MAP value is measured).
3 Heart rate becomes 0.
* When SYS > DIA, the difference between these two values is 3 mmHg and this status continues for
** When SYS, DIA or MAP value is measured.
The SUSPEND MONITORING, SUSPEND ALARMS or ALL ALARMS OFF

key is displayed on the MENU window. The key to be displayed on the MENU
window is set on the ALARM window of the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer
to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
The SUSPEND ALARMS and SUSPEND MONITORING keys can be assigned

to one of the function keys. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
The alarm off key on the MENU window
Alarm off keys
ALARM INACTIVATION Setting Displayed Keys
SUSPEND ALARMS
ALL ALARMS OFF
Alarm off function

• SUSPEND MONITORING key
Use this key to temporarily stop patient monitoring for examination. When
this key is touched, all alarms and NIBP STAT/SIM and auto measurements
are suspended. Alarms resume when the SUSPEND MONITORING key is
touched again or when the <ALARM ACTIVATION DELAY> condition is
met.
• SUSPEND ALARMS key

Use this key to suspend all alarms for the time set in <SUSPEND ALARMS
TIME>.
• ALL ALARMS OFF key

Use this key to suspend all alarms indefinitely. Alarms resume when the ALL
ALARMS OFF key is touched again.
Silencing Alarms After Alarm Occurrence

During alarm silence,
• the “ALARMS SILENCED” message, the silenced mark and the remaining
minutes are displayed
• the alarm sound is silenced

5. ALARM FUNCTION
The alarm silence time can be set to 1, 2 or 3 minutes at <SILENCE ALARMS

TIME> on the ALARM window of the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the
Administrator’s Guide, Section 3. The default setting is 2 minutes.
If another alarm occurs during alarm silence, the alarm sound, indication and
recording occur as usual. The alarm silence does not affect alarms which occur
after the Silence Alarms key is touched. (A new occurrence of the silenced
alarm condition is treated as a different alarm.)
Silencing Alarms
Touch the Silence Alarms key. The “ALARMS SILENCED” message and the
alarm silenced mark and the time remaining in the alarm silence are displayed on
the screen.
Canceling Alarm Silence

Vital sign and arrhythmia alarm silence can be cancelled by pressing the
Silence Alarms key. The alarm silence mark disappears and all silenced alarms
are resumed. Technical alarm silence cannot be canceled.
Suspending Alarms Before Alarm Occurrence

Suspending Alarms
By touching the SUSPEND ALARMS key, all alarms for the patient are
suspended for 1, 2 or 3 minutes. The alarm suspend time can be set to 1, 2 or
3 minutes at <SUSPEND ALARMS TIME> on the ALARM window of the
SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3. The
default setting is 2 minutes.
During alarm suspension, all alarms are suspended and

• the “ALARMS SUSPENDED” message is displayed
• the alarm sound is silenced
• all alarm recording is suspended
Resuming Alarms
Alarms resume when the set minutes elapses or when the SUSPEND ALARMS
key is touched again.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Suspending All Alarms Indefinitely

You can suspend all alarms for an indefinite time by touching the ALL
ALARMS OFF key on the MENU window. When you start monitoring or during
monitoring, you can use this function to temporarily turn all alarms off.
The ALL ALARMS OFF key is displayed on the MENU window when it
is selected at <ALARM INACTIVATION> on the ALARM window of the
SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
5
WARNING
Do not turn all alarms off with the ALL ALARMS OFF key when
there is no medical staff around the patient or when the patient is
connected to a ventilator.
2. Touch the ALL ALARMS OFF key. The following window appears for
confirmation.
3. Touch the YES key. If you wish to cancel, touch the NO key.
The “ALL ALARMS OFF” message appears on the screen.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
When the <ALARM INDICATOR LIT> on the ALARM window of the

SYSTEM SETUP window is set to ON, the red lamp of the alarm indicator light
when all alarms are indefinitely suspended with the ALL ALARMS OFF key.
Resuming Alarms
To resume alarms, touch the ALL ALARMS OFF key again. Alarms can only
resume by touching the ALL ALARMS OFF key.
Suspending All Alarms and NIBP STAT and Auto Measurement

Indefinitely
You can suspend all alarms and NIBP STAT/SIM and auto measurements for an
indefinite time by touching the SUSPEND MONITORING key.
The SUSPEND MONITORING key is displayed on the MENU window when

the SUSPEND ALARMS is selected at <ALARM INACTIVATION> on the
ALARM window of the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s
Guide, Section 3.
2. Touch the SUSPEND MONITORING key.
The “SUSPEND MONITORING” and “ALARMS SUSPENDED” messages

appear on the screen alternately.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Resuming Alarms
To resume alarms, touch the “SUSPEND MONITORING” key again. Alarms
also resume when the <ALARM ACTIVATION DELAY> condition is met.
To resume NIBP measurement in STAT or Auto mode, touch the NIBP

START/STOP key. Refer to Section 13.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Turning Automatic Alarm Recording On/Off
If ALARM RECORDING on the RECORD window is set to ON and a vital sign

or arrhythmia alarm occurs, waveforms beginning 8 seconds before and ending
12 seconds after the alarm are automatically recorded. If this setting is OFF, you
can still record waveforms manually.
Recording is only available when the optional recorder module is installed in the
monitor.
You can select which waveform(s) to record by changing the recording pattern.
See Section 8.
To cancel recording while an alarm is being recorded, touch the Record key.
NOTE
When an arrhythmia alarm is turned OFF on the ARRHYTH ALARMS or
ARRHYTH ALARMS window of the ECG window, there will be no alarm
recording for that arrhythmia type even when <ALARM RECORDING> is
set to ON on the RECORD window.
To set automatic alarm recording on or off:

1. Display the RECORD window.
Touch the Menu key → RECORD key.
2. Touch the ALARM RECORDING key. The ALARM RECORDING window

appears.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
3. Touch the ON or OFF key to set alarm recording on or off.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Setting Alarms
Overview
There are three ways to set alarm limits and on/off settings:
• Set all alarm limits at the same time on one window.
• Set a group of alarm items all together to a preset pattern using an alarm
master.
• Set the alarms for individual parameters separately from the ECG, RESP/CO2,
SpO2, NIBP, PRESS and TEMP windows. See Sections 9 to 15.
Vital signs alarm limits can be set on two different windows: the ALARM
LIMITS window and the alarm setting page for the individual parameter
window. When you change an alarm setting on one window, the same setting on
the other window is also automatically changed.
Arrhythmia alarm limits can be set on MAIN tab - ECG page - PARAMETERS
window of the SYSTEM SETUP window.
When <SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION WINDOW> on the SYSTEM

SETUP window is set to Off, the setting remains in memory even when the
power is turned off. After 30 minutes, the setting returns to the master settings.
When <SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION WINDOW> in the SYSTEM SETUP
window is set to On, you can select whether to save or initialize the master
settings.
To set NIBP alarm limits for neonate, the cuff for neonates must be connected to
the NIBP socket on the monitor.
Alarm Limits Ranges

The following tables show the setting ranges for each alarm. Any upper and
lower limit can also be set to off.
CAUTION
When the alarm limit is set to OFF, there will be no alarm for that
limit. Be careful when you set the alarm limit to OFF.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Vital Signs Alarms

If the upper limit is set to a value above the maximum, or the lower limit is set to
a value below the minimum, the alarm for that upper/lower limit is automatically
set to OFF.
Setting Item Setting Range Step Default Setting Backup

ADULT: 140 beats/min
OFF, 16 to 300 beats/min*1
HR/PR Upper CHILD: 170 beats/min
(OFF, 31 to 300 beats/min)
(When SYNC NEONATE: 200 beats/min
SOURCE is set to
1 5
ADULT: 50 beats/min
OFF, 15 to 299 beats/min*2
SpO2 or PRESS) Lower CHILD: 75 beats/min
(OFF, 30 to 299 beats/min)
NEONATE: 100 beats/min
VPC*3 Upper OFF, 1 to 99 beats/min 1 OFF
ST-I, ST-II, ST-III, OFF, –1.99 to 2.00 mV 0.01
Upper OFF
ST-aVR, ST-aVL, OFF, –19.9 to 20.0 mm 0.1
ST-aVF, ST-V1 to OFF, –2.00 to 1.99 mV 0.01
ST-V6 Lower OFF
OFF, –20.0 to 19.9 mm 0.1
ADULT, CHILD: OFF
Upper OFF, 51 to 100%SpO2
NEONATE: 95%SpO2
SpO2 1
ADULT, CHILD: 90%SpO2
Lower OFF, 50 to 99%SpO2
NEONATE: 85%SpO2
Upper OFF, 2 to 150 counts/min
RR 2 OFF
Lower OFF, 0 to 148 counts/min
APNEA Upper OFF, 5 to 40 s 5 20 s
ADULT: 38.0°C
OFF, 0.1 to 45.0°C 0.1 CHILD: 38.5°C
NEONATE: 39.0°C
Upper
ADULT: 100°F
TEMP
OFF, 33.0 to 113.0°F 1.0 CHILD: 101°F
Master
NEONATE: 102°F
OFF, 0.0 to 44.9°C 0.1
Lower OFF
OFF, 32.0 to 112.0°F 1.0
ADULT: 180 mmHg
OFF, 15 to 260 mmHg 5 CHILD: 140 mmHg
NEONATE: 100 mmHg
Upper
ADULT: 24.0 kPa
OFF, 1.5 to 35.0 kPa 0.5 CHILD: 18.5 kPa
NEONATE: 13.5 kPa
NIBP-SYS
ADULT: 80 mmHg
OFF, 10 to 255 mmHg 5 CHILD: 65 mmHg
NEONATE: 50 mmHg
Lower
ADULT: 10.5 kPa
OFF, 1.0 to 34.5 kPa 0.5 CHILD: 8.5 kPa
NEONATE: 6.5 kPa
OFF, 15 to 260 mmHg 5
Upper OFF
OFF, 1.5 to 35.0 kPa 0.5
NIBP-DIA
Lower OFF
OFF, 1.0 to 34.5 kPa 0.5
Upper OFF
OFF, 1.5 to 35.0 kPa 0.5
NIBP-MAP
Lower OFF
OFF, 1.0 to 34.5 kPa 0.5

5. ALARM FUNCTION

OFF, 2 to 99 mmHg 1
Upper OFF
OFF, 0.2 to 13.0 kPa 0.1
CO2 (E)*4
OFF, 1 to 98 mmHg 1
Lower OFF
OFF, 0.1 to 12.9 kPa 0.1
ADULT, NEONATE: OFF
OFF, 1 to 99 mmHg 1
CHILD: 3
CO2 (I)*4 Upper
ADULT, NEONATE: 0.4
OFF, 0.1 to 13.0 kPa 0.1
CHILD: OFF
OFF, –48 to 300 mmHg 2
Upper OFF
OFF, –6.0 to 40.0 kPa 0.5
ART-SYS*4, ADULT: 80 mmHg
RAD-SYS*4, OFF, –50 to 298 mmHg 2 CHILD: 66 mmHg
AO-SYS*4, NEONATE: 50 mmHg
FEM-SYS*4 Lower
ADULT: 10.5 kPa
OFF, –6.5 to 39.5 kPa 0.5 CHILD: 9.0 kPa
NEONATE: 6.5 kPa
ADULT: OFF
OFF, –48 to 300 mmHg 2 CHILD: 200 mmHg
NEONATE: OFF
Upper
ADULT: OFF
NEONATE: OFF
DORS-SYS* 4
ADULT: 80 mmHg
NEONATE: 50 mmHg
Lower
ADULT: 10.5 kPa
OFF, –6.5 to 39.5 kPa 0.5 CHILD: 9.0 kPa Master
NEONATE: 6.5 kPa
ART-DIA*4, OFF, –48 to 300 mmHg 2
Upper OFF
RAD-DIA*4, OFF, –6.0 to 40.0 kPa 0.5
DORS-DIA*4, OFF, –50 to 298 mmHg 2
AO-DIA*4, Lower OFF
FEM-DIA*4 OFF, –6.5 to 39.5 kPa 0.5
OFF, –48 to 300 mmHg 2
Upper OFF
OFF, –6.0 to 40.0 kPa 0.5
ART-MEAN*4, ADULT: 60 mmHg
RAD-MEAN*4, OFF, –50 to 298 mmHg 2 CHILD: 46 mmHg
AO-MEAN*4, NEONATE: 30 mmHg
FEM-MEAN*4 Lower
ADULT: 8.0 kPa
NEONATE: 4.0 kPa
ADULT: OFF
NEONATE: OFF
Upper
ADULT: OFF
NEONATE: OFF
DORS-MEAN*4
ADULT: 60 mmHg
NEONATE: 30 mmHg
Lower
ADULT: 8.0 kPa
NEONATE: 4.0 kPa

5. ALARM FUNCTION

UA-SYS*4, OFF, –48 to 300 mmHg 2
PAP-SYS*4, Upper OFF
OFF, –6.0 to 40.0 kPa 0.5
RVP-SYS*4,
LVP-SYS*4, OFF, –50 to 298 mmHg 2
Lower OFF
PRESS-SYS*4 OFF, –6.5 to 39.5 kPa 0.5
UA-DIA*4, OFF, –48 to 300 mmHg 2
Upper OFF
PAP-DIA*4, OFF, –6.0 to 40.0 kPa 0.5
RVP-DIA*4, OFF, –50 to 298 mmHg 2
LVP-DIA*4, Lower OFF 5
PRESS-DIA*4 OFF, –6.5 to 39.5 kPa 0.5
Master
UA-MEAN*4,
UV-MEAN*4, OFF, –48 to 300 mmHg 2
PAP-MEAN*4, Upper OFF
CVP-MEAN*4, OFF, –6.0 to 40.0 kPa 0.5
RAP-MEAN*4,
RVP-MEAN*4,
LAP-MEAN*4, OFF, –50 to 298 mmHg 2
LVP-MEAN*4, Lower OFF
ICP-MEAN*4, OFF, –6.5 to 39.5 kPa 0.5
PRESS-MEAN*4
*1 When EXT TACHY alarm is set to ON on the ARRHYTH page - PARAMETERS window - SYSTEM SETUP window,
16 to EXT TACHY alarm limit.
* When EXT BRADY alarm is set to ON on the ARRHYTH page - PARAMETERS window - SYSTEM SETUP window,
2
EXT BRADY alarm limit to 299.

* Only when the <ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> is set to ON.
3
*4 Only available for PVM-2703 bedside monitor.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Arrhythmia Alarms
Setting Item Setting Range Step Default Setting

ON fixed ADULT, CHILD: 5 s
ASYSTOLE 1
3 to 10 s NEONATE: 3s
VF ON fixed – ON
ON fixed – ON
ADULT, CHILD: 100 bpm
VT 16 to 300 bpm* 1
NEONATE: 140 bpm
3 to 9 beats* 1 6 beats
ON, OFF – OFF
ADULT: 160 bpm
EXT TACHY* upper heart rate alarm
1 CHILD: 190 bpm
limit to 300
NEONATE: 220 bpm
ON, OFF – OFF
ADULT: 40 bpm
EXT BRADY* 15 to lower heart rate
1 CHILD: 60 bpm
alarm limit
NEONATE: 80 bpm
ADULT: ON
ON, OFF –
CHILD, NEONATE: OFF
V BRADY*
15 to 299 bpm 1
NEONATE: 60 bpm
ADULT: ON
ON, OFF –
CHILD, NEONATE: OFF
VPC RUN ADULT, CHILD: 100 bpm
16 to 300 bpm* 1
NEONATE: 140 bpm
3 to 8 beats 1 3 beats
ON, OFF – OFF
SV TACHY* 16 to 300 bpm 1
NEONATE: 210 bpm
3 to 9 beats 1 6 beats
ON, OFF – ON
PAUSE* ADULT, CHILD: 3.0 s
1.0 to 3.0 s 0.1
NEONATE: 1.5 s
ADULT: ON
V RHYTHM* ON, OFF –
CHILD, NEONATE: OFF
COUPLET ON, OFF – OFF
EARLY VPC ON, OFF – OFF
MULTIFORM* ON, OFF – OFF
BIGEMINY ON, OFF – OFF
TRIGEMINY* ON, OFF – OFF
IRREGULAR RR* ON, OFF – OFF
PROLONGED RR* ON, OFF – OFF
NO PACER PULSE* ON, OFF – OFF
PACER NON- ON, OFF – OFF
CAPTURE* 40 to 480 ms 4 400 ms
* Available only when <ARRHYTHMIA TYPE> on the ECG page of the SYSTEM
SETUP window is set to “EXTENDED”.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Setting Vital Signs Alarms Individually

1. Display the ALARM LIMITS window.
Touch the Menu key → ALARM LIMITS key.
Selected parameter
Upper limit
Upper limit slider
Parameter keys
Current measured Lower limit

value Lower limit slider Setting bar
2. Touch the parameter key for the limit you want to change.
3. Touch and drag the sliders to the desired level on the setting bar. Use the
or to adjust the setting.
If the upper limit is set to a value above the maximum or the lower limit is
set to a value below the minimum, the alarm is set to OFF.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to change alarm settings for other parameters.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Automatically Setting All Upper and Lower Alarm Limits (Including ST)
You can automatically set all upper and lower alarm limits (including ST) with
respect to the current measuring values. This function allows you to suitably set
alarm limits according to a patient.
NOTE
You cannot automatically set any parameters not currently measured or
assigned with invalid values.
Automatic Setting Range
Automatically set upper Automatically set lower

Alarm item Unit
limit value limit value
HR HR×1.25 HR×0.75 beat/min
PR PR×1.25 PR×0.75 count/min
ST ST+0.5 ST–0.5 mV
SpO2 —* SpO2–5 % SpO2
RR RR×1.25+4 RR×0.75–4 count/min
APNEA (60/RR)×2 — s
TEMP TEMP+0.5 TEMP–0.5 °C
NIBP SYS, DIA, MAP NIBP×1.25+10 NIBP×0.75–10 mmHg
CO2 (I) CO2 (I)×1.25 —
mmHg
CO2 (E) CO2 (E)×1.25 CO2 (E)×0.75
PRESS SYS, DIA, MEAN IBP×1.25+10 IBP×0.75–10 mmHg
* Not automatically set (the upper limit value is greater than the lower limit value).

2. Set the automatic setting.

i) Touch the AUTOMATIC key. The confirmation message “Automatically
set all parameters based on current data?” appears.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
ii) Touch the YES key. All upper and lower alarm limits (including ST) are
replaced by the values according to current measurements.
NOTE
Check for valid automatic settings.
Setting All Vital Signs Alarms to a Preset Pattern (Alarm Master)

For fast and easy alarm setup, a group of alarm items can be set all together to
one group of preset settings. This is called an alarm master. This is useful, for
example, if there are typical alarm settings at your hospital, or you have certain
alarm settings for certain patients.
You can also change individual alarm settings, as described in previous pages,
after setting all alarms with an alarm master.
The alarm masters are set by the administrator on the MASTER window of the
SYSTEM SETUP window.


5. ALARM FUNCTION
2. Touch the ALARM MASTER key. The “APPLY SETTINGS FROM

MASTER?” message appears.
3. Touch the YES key to change all settings to the values set on the MAIN
ALARMS page - MATER window - SYSTEM SETUP window.
Touch the NO key to cancel changing the alarm settings to the alarm master
settings.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Checking Arrhythmia Alarm Settings

You can check the arrhythmia alarm settings on the ARRHYTH ALARMS
window. You need a password to change the settings. Refer to Section 3 of the
There are 2 patterns of arrhythmia analysis, EXTENDED or STANDARD.

Select the arrhythmia type in the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the
5
For details about arrhythmia monitoring, refer to “Monitoring Arrhythmia” in
Section 9.
WARNING
For arrhythmia monitoring, set <ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> on the
PARAMETERS window of the SYSTEM SETUP window to ON.
Otherwise, there is no sound or indication for arrhythmia alarms.
CAUTION
When the alarm is turned OFF for an arrhythmia, there will be no
alarm for that arrhythmia type. There is no message or mark to
indicate that a certain arrhythmia alarm is turned off. Therefore, be
careful when you turn off an arrhythmia alarm.
1. Display the ARRHYTH ALARMS window.

Touch the Menu key → ARRHYTH ALARMS key.
2. Confirm the settings. An administrator can change the setting by touching the
SETUP key. Refer to “ARRHYTH Page” in Section 3 of the Administrator’s
Guide.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Interbed Alarm
When an interbed alarm occurs, the monitor acts as follows.
NOTE
Parameters which cannot be measured on this monitor are displayed as
“ALARM”.
The monitor action depends on the INTERBED ALARMS TO DISPLAY setting.

For details, refer to Section 7 “Interbed Window”.
INTERBED ALARMS TO DISPLAY ALL, CRISIS AND WARNING,

NONE
Setting CRISIS
Alarm Indicator Off
Three continuous ping sounds (only No sound
Alarm Sound
when the alarm is detected)
The bed ID of interbed The bed ID is highlighted in the alarm
alarm bed is displayed priority color.*1 The bed ID is displayed in white.
in the upper right corner.
When two or more alarms
Home are detected, the bed IDs
Screen alternate.
After is touched. Bed ID: remain highlighted Bed ID: remain in white font
Interbed alarm message is The bed ID and interbed alarm message is highlighted in the alarm priority
displayed color.*1*2
Multiple
Beds
Window
Bed ID: displayed in white

After is touched.
Alarm: remain highlighted
The alarm message and The bed ID and alarm message is highlighted in the alarm priority color.*1*2
bed ID are highlighted in
the alarm priority color.
When the vital sign alarm
Individual occurs, the measurement
Bed value is also highlighted.
Window
Bed ID: displayed in white

After is touched.
Alarm: remain highlighted
*1 The alarm priority is displayed as set on the interbed bed. The alarm priority color is set at <ALARM PRIORITY
COLOR> on the DISPLAY/SOUND page of the ALARM window of the SYSTEM SETUP screen. Refer to “ALARM
Window” in Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
* When the alarm of crisis or warning level occur, the message blinks.
2

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Checking the Alarm Function
You can check the alarm sound and indicator.
CAUTION
When the monitor is turned on and periodically, check that a single
beep sounds and the red, yellow, cyan and green alarm indicator 5
lamps blink once. This shows that the alarm is functioning properly.
1. Press the [Menu] key to display the menu screen.
2. Touch the ALARM CHECK key to start alarm checks.
3. Confirm the following.

• The alarm indicator blinks once in the order of the red, yellow, cyan and
green.
• There is a single beep sound.

Section 6 Review Windows
General................................................................................................................................................................. 6.3
Review Recording...................................................................................................................................... 6.3
Time Bar............................................................................................................................................................... 6.4
Scrolling the Time Bar................................................................................................................................ 6.4 6
TREND TABLE Window........................................................................................................................................ 6.5
Overview.................................................................................................................................................... 6.5
Displaying the TREND TABLE Window...................................................................................................... 6.5
Scrolling the Trend Table.................................................................................................................. 6.6
Selecting Parameters for the TREND TABLE Display................................................................................ 6.6
Selecting the Measurement Interval........................................................................................................... 6.7
Recording the Trend Table.......................................................................................................................... 6.8
Printing a Trend Table....................................................................................................................... 6.9
NIBP TABLE Window.......................................................................................................................................... 6.11
Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 6.11
Displaying the NIBP TABLE Window........................................................................................................ 6.11
Scrolling the NIBP Trend Table....................................................................................................... 6.12
Selecting Parameters for the NIBP Trend Display.................................................................................... 6.12
Recording the NIBP Trend Table.............................................................................................................. 6.13
Printing a NIBP Table..................................................................................................................... 6.15
TREND GRAPH Window.................................................................................................................................... 6.16
Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 6.16
Displaying the TREND GRAPH Window.................................................................................................. 6.17
Selecting Parameters for the Trendgraph Display.................................................................................... 6.18
Changing the Trendgraph Scale............................................................................................................... 6.19
Changing the Trendgraph Display Format................................................................................................ 6.20
Recording the Trendgraph........................................................................................................................ 6.22
Printing the Trendgraph.................................................................................................................. 6.23
RECALL Window................................................................................................................................................ 6.25
General..................................................................................................................................................... 6.25
Arrhythmia List............................................................................................................................... 6.25
Displaying the RECALL Window.............................................................................................................. 6.27
Scrolling the Arrhythmia Recall Files............................................................................................. 6.27
Selecting the Arrhythmia Types to be Saved as a Recall File.................................................................. 6.28
Displaying the Actual Size Waveform of the Selected Arrhythmia Recall File.......................................... 6.29
Arrhythmia Waveform Annotation................................................................................................... 6.29
Recording the Arrhythmia Recall Waveform............................................................................................. 6.30
Recording on the ARRHYTH HISTORY Window........................................................................... 6.30
Printing on the ARRHYTH HISTORY Window............................................................................... 6.31
Recording on the Actual Size ECG Waveform Window................................................................. 6.32
Printing on the Actual Size ECG Waveform Window...................................................................... 6.33
Full Disclosure Window...................................................................................................................................... 6.34
Displaying the FULL DISC Window.......................................................................................................... 6.34
Scrolling the Full Disclosure Waveform.................................................................................................... 6.37

Recording or Printing the Full Disclosure Waveform................................................................................ 6.37
Recording the Full Disclosure Waveform....................................................................................... 6.37
Printing the Full Disclosure Waveform........................................................................................... 6.38
Recording or Printing the Enlarged ECG Waveform................................................................................ 6.39
Recording the Enlarged ECG Waveform........................................................................................ 6.39
Printing the Enlarged ECG Waveform............................................................................................ 6.40
Alarm History Window........................................................................................................................................ 6.41
Displaying the ALARM HISTORY Window............................................................................................... 6.41
Scrolling the Alarm History Files.............................................................................................................. 6.42
Recording the Alarm History File............................................................................................................. 6.42
Recording the Alarm History Files................................................................................................. 6.42
OCRG Window................................................................................................................................................... 6.44
Displaying the OCRG Window................................................................................................................. 6.44
Changing the OCRG Display Setting....................................................................................................... 6.45
Changing the Trendgraph Scale for Heart Rate and SpO2 and Sensitivity for Respiration....................... 6.46
Recording or Printing the OCRG Trend.................................................................................................... 6.47
Recording the OCRG Trend........................................................................................................... 6.47
Printing the OCRG Trend............................................................................................................... 6.48

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
General
You can review saved data on the following review windows. All windows and
pages can display the data of past 120 hours.
• TREND TABLE window: Displays vital sign data of past 120 hours.
• NIBP TABLE window: Displays vital sign data at the NIBP
measurement of past 120 hours.
• TREND GRAPH window: Displays the trendgraph of the past 120 hours. 6
• RECALL window: Displays arrhythmia waveforms of 4 seconds
before and 4 seconds after the arrhythmia
detection. Up to 120 hours of files can be saved.
• FULL DISC window: Displays up to 120 hours of compressed and
expanded ECG waveforms.
• ALARM HISTORY window: Displays the table of vital sign alarms and
arrhythmia alarms. Up to 120 hours of files can
be saved.
• OCRG window: Displays the heart rate, SpO2 and impedance
respiration trendgraphs of the past 120 hours.
OCRG window is available when the patient
type setting is NEONATE.
NOTE
• When changing the review window, the data at the cursor on the
original window is displayed on the second window. For example, when
the FULL DISC window is called up from the ALARM HISTORY window,
the full disclosure is displayed with the time of the file selected on the
ALARM HISTORY window.
• When <SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION WINDOW> in the SYSTEM
than 30 minutes after turning power off, the stored data in the monitor
is deleted. Even if <SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION WINDOW> is set
to On, data is deleted when the monitor is turned off for more than
24 hours.
• The oldest file is deleted when the maximum number of files are saved.
• Do not disconnect the power cord while the monitor power is on. The
data may be lost.
Review Recording
You can record review data. For details of recording, refer to the Section 8
“Recording”.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Time Bar
The time bar is displayed at the lower part of the review window. You can
display the trendgraph, table, NIBP table, recall event, alarm history and full
disclosure of the time by touching the desired time on the time bar.
Scrolling the Time Bar

The time bar can be scrolled by touching the or key under the time bar.
: Scroll the time bar to the left.

: Scroll the time bar to the right.
The latest time is displayed in white and the older times are displayed in blue and
green alternately.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
TREND TABLE Window
Overview
The TREND TABLE window displays monitoring parameter data of up to
15 selected parameters as a table and you can change the display interval. One
page shows 6 files. Each file appears in a separate column. Up to 120 hours of
files of periodic vital signs can be created. The table can be recorded on the
optional recorder module.
6
NOTE
to On, data is deleted when the monitor is turned off for more than 24
hours.
• When the latest file is selected, this window is automatically updated.
Displaying the TREND TABLE Window

1. Touch the Menu key to display the MENU window.
2. Touch the TREND TABLE key. The TREND TABLE window appears.
When TREND TABLE is assigned to one of the function keys at the

upper left of the screen, the TREND TABLE window can be displayed by
touching the TREND TABLE function key. Refer to “KEYS Window” in the
Administrator’s Guide, Section 3 to assign a function to the function key.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Other review windows
Date and Selected file

time
Displays the
parameters
Scroll to display
selected in the
other parameter
PARAMETER
data
SETUP window
Records or prints the trend data Displays the Displays the Time bar
of the selected time period on PARAMETER INTERVAL window
the WS-201P recorder module SETUP window
or connected network printer
For details on the time bar, refer to the “Time Bar” section.
To return to the home screen, touch the Home key.
Scrolling the Trend Table

Use the vertical scroll bar on the window to scroll the trend table. The trend table
can be scrolled by touching the or key on the scroll bar.
Selecting Parameters for the TREND TABLE Display

1. Touch the SETUP key on the TREND TABLE window. The PARAMETER
SETUP window appears.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
2. Select the display position from the left column. Select the parameter from
the right column. The selected parameter appears in the display order on the
left column.
Selected parameters in the display order
Up to 15 parameters can be selected.
Selectable
parameters
Unselect the
parameter
Keys for displaying

other parameters
3. Repeat step 2 to select other parameters.
Selecting the Measurement Interval

1. Touch the INTERVAL key on the TREND TABLE window. The INTERVAL
window appears.
2. Select the interval for the trend table on the INTERVAL window.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Recording the Trend Table

The trend table displayed on the TREND TABLE window can be recorded on the
optional recorder module. You can select the font size. Refer to “RECORDER
Page” in Section 3 of the administrator’s guide.
1. Display the trend table you want to record on the TREND TABLE window.
2. Touch the RECORD key. The RECORD window appears.
3. Set the RECORD START TIME and RECORD END TIME with the
and key.
The initial RECORD START TIME and RECORD END TIME depend on
the REVIEW setting on the RECORDER page of the SYSTEM SETUP
window. For details, refer to “RECORDER page” in Section 3 of the
4. Confirm the NUMBER OF PAGES and touch the RECORD key. Recording
starts.
To stop recording, touch the Record key.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Recording example
NORMAL font LARGE font

6
Printing a Trend Table

You can print the trend table of the selected time period with a network printer.
and key or time slider.
3. Check the number of pages and touch the PRINT key in <PRINTER> box.
The “PRINTING” message appears on the screen and the table is printed.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Printing example

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
NIBP TABLE Window
Overview
The NIBP TABLE window displays monitoring parameter data of up to 15
selected parameters with NIBP as a table. Data for all parameters is automatically
entered into the table every time NIBP is measured. The table can be recorded on
the optional recorder module.
One page shows 6 measurements. Each measurement appears in a separate

6
column. Up to 120 hours of data can be registered to the NIBP trend table. If
more than 120 hours past, the oldest measurement data is deleted.
NOTE
hours.
Displaying the NIBP TABLE Window

2. Touch the NIBP TABLE key. The NIBP TABLE window appears.
When NIBP TABLE is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper left of
the screen, the NIBP TABLE window can be displayed by touching the NIBP
TABLE function key. Refer to “KEYS Window” in the Administrator’s Guide,
Section 3 to assign a function to the function key.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
“A” indicates NIBP

Date and time measurement on
vital sign alarm
“P” indicates
PWTT trigger NIBP
Displays the measurement
parameters
selected in the Scroll to display
PARAMETER other parameter
SETUP window data
Selected file
Records or prints the NIBP data Displays the PARAMETER Time bar
of the selected time period on SETUP window
the WS-201P recorder module
or connected network printer
Scrolling the NIBP Trend Table

Use the vertical scroll bar on the window to scroll the NIBP trend table. The
trend table can be scrolled by touching the or key on the scroll bar.
Selecting Parameters for the NIBP Trend Display

1. Touch the SETUP key on the NIBP TABLE window. The PARAMETER

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
2. Select the display position from the left column. Select the parameter from
the right column. The selected parameter appears in the display order on the
left column.
Selected parameters in the display order
Up to 15 parameters can be selected.
Selectable
parameters
Deselects the
parameter.
Keys for displaying

other parameters
3. Repeat step 2 to select other parameters.
Recording the NIBP Trend Table

The NIBP trend table displayed on the NIBP TABLE window can be recorded
on the optional recorder module. You can select the font size. Refer to
“RECORDER Page” in Section 3 of the administrator’s guide.
1. Display the NIBP trend table you want to record on the NIBP TABLE window.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
and key.
starts.
Recording example
NORMAL font
LARGE font

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Printing a NIBP Table

You can print the trend table of the selected time period with a network printer.
and key or time slider.
3. Check the number of pages and touch the PRINT key in <PRINTER> box.
The “PRINTING” message appears on the screen and the table is printed.
Printing example

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
TREND GRAPH Window
Overview
There are 2 trendgraphs on the TREND GRAPH window. You can select
common or separate scales for each trendgraph. Common scale trendgraph can
display trendgraphs for up to 3 selected parameters and separate scale trendgraph
can display trendgraphs for up to 2 selected parameters of the past 120 hours.
You can record trendgraphs on the optional recorder module.
The maximum, mean and minimum values of all monitoring parameters are
automatically acquired every 1 minute for the trendgraph. The acquired values
are 1 minute averaged data. The frequency of data display depends on the
selected trend time.
1 or 2 hours: 1 minute
4 hours: 2 minutes
8, 24 hours: 4 minutes
120 hours: 15 minutes
NOTE
When <SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION WINDOW> in the SYSTEM
deleted. Even if <SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION WINDOW> is set to
On, data is deleted when the monitor is turned off for more than 24 hours.
The following table shows the available trend parameters, screen displays and
scales.
Parameter Description Vertical Scale Range

HR Heart rate (beats/min) 0-300
PR Pulse rate (beats/min) 0-300
VPC VPC rate (VPCs/min) 0-100
RR Respiration rate (breaths/min) 0-150
–2.0-2.0 (mV)
ST ST level (mV, mm)
–20.0-20.0 (mm)
0-300 (mmHg)
NIBP NIBP (mmHg, kPa)
0-40.0 (kPa)
0-150 (mmHg)
CO2(E)*
CO2 partial pressure (mmHg, 0-20.0 (kPa)
kPa) 0-100 (mmHg)
CO2(I)*
0-13.0 (kPa)
Saturated oxygen from pulse
SpO2 0-100
oximeter (%SpO2)
0-300 (mmHg)
PRESS* IBP (mmHg, kPa)
0-40.0 (kPa)
0-45.0 (°C)
TEMP Temperature (°C, °F)
0-115.0 (°F)
* Only available for PVM-2703 bedside monitor.
The trendgraph can be recorded on the optional recorder module.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Displaying the TREND GRAPH Window

2. Touch the TREND GRAPH key. The TREND GRAPH window appears.
When TREND GRAPH is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper
left of the screen, the trendgraph window can be displayed by touching the
TREND GRAPH function key. Refer to “KEYS Window” in Section 3 of the
Other review windows Cursor can be dragged with your finger.
Scale
Displays the parameter

selected on the
PARAMETER SETUP
window.
Displays the SCALE

SETUP window.
Records or prints the

trendgraph on the
WS-201P recorder
module or connected
network printer.
Displays the PARAMETER Changes the trendgraph page. Time bar
SETUP window.
You can change time bar time interval by touching the or key under the
time bar. When the key is touched, the interval changes 120 hour → 24
hour → 8 hour → 4 hour → 2 hour → 1 hour. When the key is touched, the
interval changes 1 hour → 2 hour → 4 hour → 8 hour → 24 hour → 120 hour.
The time bar can be scrolled by touching the or key under the time bar.
You can select the trendgraph parameters and the display format on the
PARAMETER SETUP window, and the scale on the SCALE SETUP window.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Selecting Parameters for the Trendgraph Display

You can change the trendgraph parameters. COMMON scale can display up to
3 parameters and SEPARATE scale can display up to 2 parameters.
1. Touch the SETUP key on the TREND GRAPH window. The PARAMETER
2. Select the GRAPH 1 or GRAPH 2 page.
Selectable
parameters
Deselects the
parameter.
Trendgraph display Keys for displaying

position other parameters
3. Select the scale in the <TRENDGRAPH SCALE>.
4. Select the display position 1, 2 or 3 on the trendgraph.
5. Select the parameter by touching the desired parameter key. Use the NONE
key to deselect the parameter.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Changing the Trendgraph Scale

You can change the trendgraph scale for each parameter.
1. Touch the SCALE key on the TREND GRAPH window. The SCALE
Trendgraph
parameter
Upper limit slider
Setting bar
Lower limit slider
2. Select the parameter of position 1, 2 or 3.
3. Touch and drag the sliders to the desired level on the setting bar.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Changing the Trendgraph Display Format

You can change the display format of the trendgraph. Selecting MAX-MIN
key displays the maximum and minimum values on the trendgraph. Selecting
AVERAGE key displays the mean values on the trendgraph.
MAX-MIN
AVERAGE

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
1. Touch the SETUP key on the TREND GRAPH window. The PARAMETER
2. Select the GRAPH 1 or GRAPH 2 page.
3. Select MAX-MIN or AVERAGE in the <TRENDGRAPH STYLE> box.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Recording the Trendgraph

The trendgraph displayed on the TREND GRAPH window can be recorded on
the optional recorder module.
1. Display the trendgraph you want to record on the TREND GRAPH window.
3. Touch the RECORD key. Recording starts.
Recording example
The trendgraphs are recorded as displayed on the TREND GRAPH window.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Printing the Trendgraph

The trendgraphs displayed on the GRAPH 1 or GRAPH 2 page can be printed
when the monitor is connected to a network printer.
1. Display the trendgraph you want to print on the GRAPH 1 or GRAPH 2

page.
3. Touch the PRINT key in <PRINTER> box. Printing starts.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Printing example

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
RECALL Window
General
An ECG waveform of 4 seconds before and 4 seconds after the arrhythmia
detection is saved as an arrhythmia recall file. Up to 120 hours of files can
be created. When more than 120 hours of files are created, the oldest file is
automatically deleted.
To create arrhythmia recall files: 6

• <ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> on the SYSTEM SETUP window must be set
to ON. Refer to “ARRHYTH Page” in Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
• The type of arrhythmias you want to save as files must be selected on the
ARRHYTHMIA EVENT SETUP window. Refer to “Selecting the Arrhythmia
Types to be Saved as a Recall File” section.
NOTE
hours.
The arrhythmia recall window displays the recall files. Up to 8 files can be
displayed on one page. The actual size arrhythmia waveform can be displayed by
touching a recall file.
Arrhythmia List
The arrhythmias are listed in the priority of highest to lowest. When several
arrhythmias occur at the same time, only the arrhythmia of the highest priority is
saved as the recall file.
Longer than 3 to 10 seconds (selectable) with no
ASYSTOLE
QRS complex.
Ventricular tachycardia. 3 to 9 (selectable*1) or more
VT consecutive VPCs when heart rate exceeding the VT
Extreme tachycardia exceeding the EXTREME
EXT TACHY*1
TACHY limit.
Extreme bradycardia dropping below the
EXT BRADY*1
EXTREME BRADY limit.
Ventricular bradycardia. 3 or more consecutive
V BRADY*1 VPCs when heart rate dropping below V BRADY

6. REVIEW WINDOWS

VPC short run. 3 to 8 (selectable) consecutive VPCs
when heart rate exceeds the VPC RUN heart rate
limit (16 to 300 beats/min selectable*1).
VPC RUN
or
The selected number*4 of consecutive VPCs when
heart rate drops below the VT heart rate limit.
Supraventricular tachycardia. 3 to 9 (selectable)
or more consecutive normal QRS of regular R-R
SV TACHY*1
interval when heart rate exceeding the SV TACHY
Early VPC including R-on-T type. VPC with a time
interval from the preceding normal QRS complex of
EARLY VPC less than approximately one-third of the normal R-R
interval, at heart rate dropping below 120*2 beats/
min.
Two different shaped VPCs within the last
MULTIFORM*1
3 minutes.
Ventricular bigeminy. 3 or more consecutive pairs of
BIGEMINY VPC and normal QRS. A dominant rhythm of N-V-
Ventricular trigeminy. A dominant rhythm of N-N-
TRIGEMINY*1
V-N-N-V.
VPC Ventricular premature contraction.
R-R interval 1.75 times longer than the dominant
PROLONGED RR*1
R-R interval.
No QRS and pacing pulse within the bradycardia
NO PACER PULSE*1*3
limit. Oversensing.
No QRS from the preceding pacing pulse for the
PACER NON-
preset time interval (40 to 480 ms selectable). Non-
CAPTURE*1*3
capture.
*1 Available only when <ARRHYTHMIA TYPE> on the ECG page of the
SYSTEM SETUP window is set to “EXTENDED”.
* 120 beats/min when <QRS DETECTION TYPE> is set to Adult, 150 beats/
2
min when <QRS DETECTION TYPE> is set to CHILD or NEONATE.

*3 Available only when <PACING DETECT> is set to ON.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Displaying the RECALL Window

2. Touch the RECALL key to display the RECALL window.
When RECALL is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper left of
the screen, the RECALL window can be displayed by touching the RECALL
function key. Refer to “KEYS Window” in the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3
to assign a function to the function key.
Compressed
ECG of the recall
file
Arrhythmia type
Date and time

of file creation Selected file
Scroll to display
other recall files.
Displays the selected

arrhythmia types in
the ARRHYTHMIA
EVENT SETUP
window.
Records or prints the Displays the ARRHYTHMIA Time bar
arrhythmia recall data on the EVENT SETUP window.
WS-201P recorder module or
connected network printer.
When there is no recall file, the “NO DATA” message is displayed.
Scrolling the Arrhythmia Recall Files

Use the vertical scroll bar on the window to scroll the arrhythmia recall file. The
arrhythmia recall file can be scrolled by touching the or key on the scroll
bar.
6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Selecting the Arrhythmia Types to be Saved as a Recall File

Select the arrhythmia types to create files for. You can select individual
arrhythmia types separately or select all arrhythmia type together.

1. Touch the SETUP key on the RECALL window. The ARRHYTHMIA

EVENT SETUP window appears.
Selected arrhythmia
type is highlighted.
When ARRHYTHMIA TYPE is STANDARD
When ARRHYTHMIA TYPE is EXTENDED
2. Select the arrhythmia type individually.
To set all arrhythmia types together, touch the ALL key.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Displaying the Actual Size Waveform of the Selected Arrhythmia Recall File
The RECALL window displays the actual size ECG of the selected recall file.
1. Touch the or key to display the recall file of the arrhythmia recall
waveform which you want to display in actual size.
2. Touch the center of the recall file. The arrhythmia waveform is displayed in
the actual size.
6
Date and time Arrhythmia
of file creation type
ECG Lead
ECG sensitivity
Vital signs
numeric values QRS annotation
at the time the
recall file is
created.
Records or prints the actual size ECG on the WS-201P

recorder module or connected network printer.
Arrhythmia Waveform Annotation

Each beat of a stored arrhythmia waveform is automatically classified and
annotated as follows.
QRS Annotation Description

N Normal QRS complex
V Ventricular premature contraction
P Paced QRS
? Impossible to classify or during learning
– Noise

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Recording the Arrhythmia Recall Waveform

The arrhythmia recall data can be recorded by the recorder module. The
recording can be performed on both the file window and waveform window.
Recording on the ARRHYTH HISTORY Window

1. Display the RECALL window.
and key.
starts.
The arrhythmia recall data is recorded as displayed on the RECALL window.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Recording example
Printing on the ARRHYTH HISTORY Window

1. Select the arrhythmia recall waveform you want to print.
and key.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
The arrhythmia waveform is printed as displayed on the ARRHYTH

HISTORY page.
Printing example
Recording on the Actual Size ECG Waveform Window

1. Select the arrhythmia recall waveform you want to record.
2. Touch the RECORD key. The RECORD window opens.
3. Check the NUMBER OF PAGES and touch the RECORD key. Recording
starts.
To stop recording the table, touch the Record key.
The 10 seconds of arrhythmia waveforms can be recorded.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Recording example
6
Printing on the Actual Size ECG Waveform Window
1. Select the arrhythmia recall waveform you want to record.
2. Touch the RECORD key. The RECORD window opens.
The 8 seconds of selected arrhythmia waveform and the previous and the next
waveforms are printed.
Printing example

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Full Disclosure Window
ECG full disclosure of 120 hours can be saved. The full disclosure waveforms
can be reviewed, scrolled and recorded, in either compressed or expanded form.
NOTE
On, data is deleted when the monitor is turned off for more than
24 hours.
• When the cursor is on the latest waveform, this window is automatically
updated.
The FULL DISC window displays one minute full disclosure waveform on
each line. The 5 second actual size waveform selected by the cursor on the full
disclosure is displayed on the actual size ECG window.
Displaying the FULL DISC Window

2. Touch the FULL DISC key to display the FULL DISC window.
When FULL DISC is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper left of
the screen, the FULL DISC page can be displayed by touching the FULL DISC
function key. Refer to “KEYS Window” in Section 3 of the Administrator’s
Guide to assign a function to the function key.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Displayed time When 5 s is selected,

range the waveform is
actual size.
Time ECG lead
60 second
full disclosure
waveform
Cursor Scrolls time
6
Vital signs
numeric values
at the cursor
Records or prints the full disclosure Time bar

data on the WS-201P recorder module
or connected network printer.
NOTE
It may take some time for the data to be displayed.
When there is no full disclosure waveform, the “NO DATA” message is

displayed.
The full disclosure is refreshed every minute.
When the FULL DISC window is called up from the RECALL window, the full
disclosure is displayed with the time of the RECALL window.
When the FULL DISC window is called up from the ALARM HISTORY
window, the full disclosure is displayed with the time of the file selected on the
ALARM HISTORY window.
Touch the waveforms to display the 5 seconds of enlarged waveforms. Touch

again to restore the previous display.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Displayed
time range
ECG lead
Time ECG sensitivity
5 second actual QRS annotation

size waveform
Cursor
Scrolls time
Records or prints
the waveform
on the WS-201P
recorder module or
connected network
printer Time bar
When the ECG measurement is set to OFF, the SpO2 waveform is displayed. For
turning ECG measurement off, refer to Section 9.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Scrolling the Full Disclosure Waveform

Use the vertical scroll bar on the window to scroll the full disclosure waveform.
The full disclosure waveform can be scrolled by touching the or key on the
scroll bar. The cursor can also be dragged with your finger.
Cursor
Recording or Printing the Full Disclosure Waveform

The displayed full disclosure waveform can be recorded on the optional recorder
module and connected network printer.
Recording the Full Disclosure Waveform

1. Display the full disclosure waveform you want to record.
and key.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
starts.
Recording example
Printing the Full Disclosure Waveform

1. Display the full disclosure waveform you want to print.
and key.
4. Touch PRINT key in <PRINTER> box.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Printing example
Recording or Printing the Enlarged ECG Waveform

The displayed enlarged waveform can be recorded or printed on the optional
recorder module or connected network printer.
Recording the Enlarged ECG Waveform

1. Display the enlarged waveform you want to record by touching the part of
the waveform.
starts.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Recording example
Printing the Enlarged ECG Waveform

1. Display the enlarged waveform you want to print by touching the ZOOM IN
key.
Printing example

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Alarm History Window
Alarm data can be listed on the ALARM HISTORY window. Up to 120 hours of
files can be saved and up to 8 data can be displayed on the ALARM HISTORY
window. The alarm history is created anytime when an alarm occurs.
When the FULL DISC window is displayed from the ALARM HISTORY
window, the waveforms of the selected alarm file on the ALARM HISTORY
window can be displayed. 6
NOTE
24 hours.
Displaying the ALARM HISTORY Window

2. Touch the ALARM HISTORY key to display the ALARM HISTORY

window.
When ALARM HISTORY is assigned to one of the function keys at the

upper left of the screen, the ALARM HISTORY window can be displayed by
touching the ALARM HISTORY function key. Refer to “KEYS Window” in the
Administrator’s Guide, Section 3 to assign a function to the function key.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Date and
time of
alarm
occurrence
Parameter
Alarm type Selected file
Alarm
message
Scrolls files
Records the alarm history Time bar

data on the WS-201P
recorder module.
Scrolling the Alarm History Files

Use the vertical scroll bar on the window to scroll the alarm history file.
The alarm history file can be scrolled by touching the or key on the scroll
bar.
Recording the Alarm History File

To record the numeric data of the selected alarm history file, touch the RECORD
key.
Recording the Alarm History Files

1. Display the alarm history page you want to record.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
and key.
starts.
The alarm history files are recorded as displayed on the ALARM HISTORY
window.
Recording example

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
OCRG Window
The OCRG window displays heart rate and SpO2 acquired every 1 minute for the
trendgraph and compressed respiration waveform of the past 120 hours.
NOTE
24 hours.
• The OCRG window is available only when PATIENT TYPE is
NEONATE. For details, refer to “Selecting Patient Type” in Section 3.
The following table shows the available trend parameters, screen displays and
scales.
Parameter Description Vertical Range

HR Heart rate (beats/min) 210-60, 160-80, 220-100
Saturated oxygen from pulse
SpO2 100-60, 100-80
oximeter (%SpO2)
Respiration measured by impedance
RESP (IMP) ×1/4, ×1/2, ×1, ×2, ×4
method
Displaying the OCRG Window

1. Press the [Menu] key to display the MENU window.
2. Touch the OCRG key to display the OCRG window.
When OCRG is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper left of the
screen or one of the function keys on the remote control keys, the OCRG
page can be displayed by touching the OCRG function key. Refer to “KEYS
Window” in Administrator’s Guide, Section 3 to assign a function to the
function key.
6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Displays other review windows. Cursor can be dragged with your finger.
Scale
Records or prints the 6

trendgraph on the
WS-671P recorder
module or connected
network printer.
Time bar Displays the SETTINGS window. Displays the SCALE SETUP window.
To return to the home screen, press the [Home] key.
Changing the OCRG Display Setting

1. Touch the SETUP key on the OCRG window to display the SETTINGS
window.
2. Select the 1 cm/min or 3 cm/min key in the <SETTINGS> box.
1 cm/min: OCRG display with the horizontal scale 1 cm/min

3 cm/min: OCRG display with the horizontal scale 3 cm/min

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Changing the Trendgraph Scale for Heart Rate and SpO2 and Sensitivity for Respiration
1. Touch the SCALE key on the OCRG window to display the SCALE SETUP
window.
2. Touch the HR, SpO2 or RESP(IMP) key on the left and select the desired
scale or sensitivity on the right.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
Recording or Printing the OCRG Trend

The OCRG trend displayed on the OCRG window can be recorded or printed on
the optional WS-201P recorder module or connected network printer with the
optional QI-202P or QI-203P interface.
Recording the OCRG Trend

1. Display the OCRG trend you want to record on the OCRG window.

Time slider
3. Set the RECORD START TIME and RECORD END TIME with the or
key or time slider.
starts.

6. REVIEW WINDOWS
The OCRG trend is recorded as displayed on the OCRG window.
Recording example
Printing the OCRG Trend

1. Display the OCRG trend you want to print on the OCRG window.

Time slider
3. Set the RECORD START TIME and RECORD END TIME with the or
key or time slider.
6. REVIEW WINDOWS
4. Check the number of pages and touch the PRINT key. The “PRINTING”
message appears on the screen and the OCRG trend is printed as displayed
on the OCRG window.
Printing example

Section 7 Interbed Window
Registering Interbed Beds.................................................................................................................................... 7.3

Removing an Interbed Bed......................................................................................................................... 7.3
Displaying the Numeric Data of All Interbed Beds................................................................................................ 7.4
Displaying the Interbed Bed Data......................................................................................................................... 7.5
Interbed Alarm...................................................................................................................................................... 7.6
Interbed Alarm Setting............................................................................................................................... 7.7 7

7. INTERBED WINDOW
When the bedside monitor is connected to a central monitor network, the

bedside monitor data can be sent to the central monitor. The bedside monitor can
display monitoring data of up to 8 other beds in the network on the INTERBED
window. When an alarm occurs at an interbed bed, the “ALARM bed name” of
the alarmed interbed appears on the home screen of this bedside monitor if you
have previously registered the other bed as an interbed bed on the INTERBED
window.
To use the interbed function, the following settings must be set.

• Register the beds to be managed by the interbed function on this monitor.
• Set <INTERBED ALARMS TO DISPLAY> on the INTERBED page of the
SYSTEM SETUP window to ALL, CRISIS AND WARNING, or CRISIS.
• Set <AUTO INTERBED DISPLAY> on the SETTINGS window of the
INTERBED window to ON to automatically display the VIEW OTHER BEDS
window of the alarmed bed when an alarm occurs on that bed.
WARNING WARNING
Do not monitor a patient’s vital signs only by the When an alarm occurs:
interbed function. The patient must be monitored • Check the patient first and take necessary
on the interbed bed or central monitor. measure to ensure patient’s safety.
• Remove the cause of the alarm.
• Check the alarm settings on the bedside
monitor and change the alarm settings if
necessary.
NOTE
The monitor must be connected to a network to use the interbed function.

7. INTERBED WINDOW
Registering Interbed Beds
To view another bed, you must register the bed as an interbed bed. Only
registered beds can be viewed. You can register up to 16 interbed beds. Any bed
in the monitor network can be registered as an interbed bed.
When registering an interbed bed, the power of the bedside monitor to be

registered must be turned on.
1. Display the SELECT BEDS window.

Press the Menu key → INTERBED key → SELECT BEDS tab. 7
Registered beds
Group key
Beds in the
selected group Scroll beds
2. In the <SELECTED BEDS> box, select the position to register the interbed
bed.
3. Touch the GROUP key to select the group to which the desired bed belongs
and select the bed from the bed list. The beds which are already registered as
interbed beds cannot be selected.
4. Check that the selected bed appears in the <SELECTED BEDS> box.
Removing an Interbed Bed

1. In the <SELECTED BEDS> box, select the interbed bed to be removed.
2. Touch the VACANT key.

7. INTERBED WINDOW
Displaying the Numeric Data of All Interbed Beds
The numeric data of all registered interbed beds can be displayed on the Multiple
Beds window. The parameters that can be displayed are: heart rate and SpO2.
NOTE
When the instrument which is registered to the interbed bed is turned off
or not connected to the network correctly, the “MONITOR OFF” message
is displayed and measurement value and alarm are not displayed.
Display the VIEW OTHER BEDS window.

Press the Menu key → INTERBED key → VIEW OTHER BEDS tab.
Interbed bed ID
Patient name
Touching a patient name
opens the individual bed
window.
Interbed alarm

7. INTERBED WINDOW
Displaying the Interbed Bed Data
On the individual bed window of the INTERBED window, following numeric

data can be displayed. Other parameters cannot be displayed.
Numeric Data
• Heart rate
• VPC
• ST
• Respiration rate
• CO2 7
• SpO2
• NIBP
• TEMP
• PRESS
NOTE
When the instrument which is registered to the interbed bed is turned off
or not connected to the network correctly, the “MONITOR OFF” message
is displayed and measurement value and alarm are not displayed.
1. Display the VIEW OTHER BEDS window.

Press Menu key → INTERBED key → VIEW OTHER BEDS tab.
Interbed bed ID Interbed alarm appears here.
Numeric display area Silences the interbed alarm.
2. Touch the desired bed on the Multiple Beds window to display the individual
bed window.
To change beds, touch the key to close the window and select the desired
bed.

7. INTERBED WINDOW
Interbed Alarm
When an alarm occurs on an interbed bed, a highlighted bed name appears

at the top right corner of the home screen. This interbed alarm message does
not indicate the type of alarm. The VIEW OTHER BEDS window can be
automatically displayed when an alarm occurs and <AUTO INTERBED
DISPLAY> is set to on.
NOTE
When the alarm function is turned off by “all alarms off” or “alarm
suspended” on the interbed bed, the interbed alarm does not occur on
this bedside monitor.
Only one interbed ID can be displayed at a time on the home screen. When more
than one interbed alarm occurs, the alarm message appears and the alarming
interbed IDs are alternately displayed one at a time.
On the INTERBED window, the bed ID and patient name of the alarmed bed is
highlighted.
NOTE
The interbed alarm for another bed is lower level than any other alarm for
this bed. Therefore, the interbed alarm might not be indicated during an
alarm for this bed.
The interbed alarm can be set to on or off. When set to ON, the highlighted
bed name in the alarm level color is displayed on the upper right corner of the
home screen when an interbed alarm occurs. When set to OFF, only the non-
highlighted message is displayed.
You can also silence the interbed alarm by touching the key on the individual
bed window of the INTERBED window. Silencing the interbed alarm on this
monitor also silences the alarm on the alarmed bed itself. The alarm silence
indication on the alarmed bed depends on the alarmed bed specifications. The
alarm silence time depends on the setting on the alarmed bed.
For the monitor action when the interbed alarm is silenced, refer to “Interbed
Alarm” in Section 5.
NOTE
When several interbed alarms occur, all interbed alarms are silenced
by touching the key on the individual bed window of the INTERBED
window.
The interbed alarm can only be suspended on the alarmed bed.

7. INTERBED WINDOW
Interbed Alarm Setting
CAUTION
The interbed window only appears on the home screen when an
interbed alarm occurs and <AUTO INTERBED DISPLAY> is set to
On.
1. Display the SETTINGS window.

Press the Menu key → INTERBED key → SETTINGS tab.
2. Select auto interbed display ON or OFF in the <AUTO INTERBED

DISPLAY> box. When this is set to ON, the multiple beds window is
automatically displayed when an alarm occurs.
3. Touch the Home key return to the home screen.

Section 8 Recording
Overview of Recording......................................................................................................................................... 8.2

Recording Modes....................................................................................................................................... 8.2
Manual Waveform Recording/Printing.............................................................................................. 8.4
Recording/Printing on the Review Windows.................................................................................... 8.4
Periodic Recording........................................................................................................................... 8.4
Alarm Recording.............................................................................................................................. 8.5
Recording on NIBP Measurement................................................................................................... 8.5
Recording Mode Annotations..................................................................................................................... 8.5 8
Recording Priority....................................................................................................................................... 8.6
Recording Sensitivity.................................................................................................................................. 8.6
Recording Speed........................................................................................................................................ 8.6
Recording Related Message...................................................................................................................... 8.6
Recorded Data........................................................................................................................................... 8.7
Changing the Recording Speed........................................................................................................................... 8.8
Changing the Recording Pattern.......................................................................................................................... 8.9
Manually Recording/Printing Waveforms............................................................................................................ 8.10
Recording Waveforms on the Optional Recorder Module........................................................................ 8.10
Recording Waveforms on the Bedside Monitor with No Recorder........................................................... 8.11
Manual Printing on the Network Printer................................................................................................... 8.11
Setting Periodic Recording................................................................................................................................. 8.12
Changing Settings for Automatic Periodic Recording............................................................................... 8.12
Printing on a Network Printer............................................................................................................................. 8.14
Recording on NIBP Measurement...................................................................................................................... 8.15

8. RECORDING
Overview of Recording
A variety of waveforms and data can be recorded by the optional recorder

module.
This section provides an overview of recording.
The “Changing the Recording Pattern” section explains how to change the
recording pattern for all recordings except for the review data recordings.
The “Manually Recording Waveforms” section explains how to manually record

waveforms at any time.
The “Setting Periodic Recording” section explains necessary settings for

performing automatic periodic recording.
Some recording procedures are explained in other sections.

• To record trendgraphs and table, see Section 6.
• To record arrhythmia recall files, see Section 6
• To record alarm history, see Section 6.
• To record full disclosure, see Section 6.
• To record OCRG trend graph, see Section 6.
• For alarm recording, see Section 5.
To load recording paper, see “Loading Recording Paper” in Section 2.
Recording Modes
The following recording modes are available.
Recording Length/Time of Operations/Conditions/Settings Recorded

Recorded Data
Mode Recorded Data for Recording Annotation
Record key is touched
Real time/ Up to three waveforms Time set at MANUAL
delayed selected on the RECORD RECORD TIME on Select the second and third parameters
MANUAL
waveform window with numerical the SYSTEM SETUP for waveform recording on the
recording* data window RECORD window
Time set in RECORD
RECORD key in the RECORD
Trendgraph Trendgraph on the window. Refer to TREND
window on the TREND GRAPH
recording window “TREND GRAPH GRAPH
window is touched
Window” in Section 6.
Time set in RECORD
Trend table window. Refer to TREND
Table on the window window on the TREND TABLE
recording “TREND TABLE DATA
window is touched
Time set in RECORD
NIBP table window. Refer to NIBP
Table on the window window on the NIBP TABLE window
recording “NIBP TABLE TREND
is touched

8. RECORDING
Recording Length/Time of Operations/Conditions/Settings Recorded

Recorded Data
Mode Recorded Data for Recording Annotation
Time set in RECORD
Acquired arrhythmia window. Refer to
window on the RECALL window is
waveform “RECALL Window”
Arrhythmia touched
in Section 6.
recall RECALL
recording
Arrhythmia waveform on Data displayed on the window on the RECALL window
the window window (when the actual size waveform is
displayed) is touched
Time set in RECORD
Alarm history Alarm history on the window. Refer to ALARM
window on the ALARM HISTORY
recording window “ALARM HISTORY HISTORY
window is touched
Time set in RECORD
Full disclosure data on window. Refer
window on the FULL DISC window is 8
the window to “FULL DISC
Full touched
Window” in Section 6. FULL DISC-
disclosure
RECORD key in the RECORD LOSURE
recording
Actual size waveform on window on the FULL DISC window
10 seconds
the window (when the actual size waveform is
displayed) is touched
RECORD key on the RECORD
OCRG Data displayed on the
OCRG on the window window of the OCRG window is OCRG
recording window
touched
<ALARM RECORDING> on the
Up to three waveforms RECORD window must be set to ON
Vital signs selected on the RECORD From 8 seconds before Alarm for vital signs parameter must
alarm window and vital to 12 seconds after be turned on
recording sign data at an alarm alarm occurrence Select the second and third parameters
occurrence for waveform recording on the
RECORD window
<ALARM RECORDING> on the
RECORD window must be set to ON ALARM
Alarm for arrhythmia must be turned
Up to three waveforms
on
Arrhythmia selected on the RECORD From 8 seconds before
<ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> on the
alarm window and vital to 12 seconds after
SYSTEM SETUP window must be set
recording sign data at an alarm alarm occurrence
to ON
occurrence
Select the second and third parameters
for waveform recording on the
RECORD window
<PERIODIC REC INTERVAL> on the
Up to three waveforms
RECORD window must be set to ON
Periodic selected on the RECORD
10 seconds Select the second and third parameters TIMER
recording window with numerical
for waveform recording on the
data at the set interval
RECORD window
Recording <RECORD ON NIBP MEAS> on the RECORD
on NIBP All monitored parameters — SYSTEM SETUP window must be set ON NIBP
measurement to ON MEAS
* Real time or delayed recording can be selected on the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide,
Section 3.

8. RECORDING
Manual Waveform Recording/Printing

Up to three waveforms selected on the RECORD window are recorded. For
details, refer to the “Manually Recording/Printing Waveforms” section.
With recorder: Recorded on the optional recorder module whenever the
Record key is touched.
No recorder: Not available
Bedside monitor connected to central monitor network:
Recorded on the central monitor recorder whenever the
Record key on the bedside monitor is touched. In this case, ECG
and the parameter selected for the second waveform are record.
Bedside monitor connected to a network printer:
Printed on the network printer whenever the RECORD key on
PRINTER box is touched.
Recording/Printing on the Review Windows

For details, refer to Section 6.
Periodic Recording
Up to three waveforms selected on the RECORD window and vital signs data are
recorded automatically at the set interval.
Set the following items on the RECORD window. The time interval is set on the
SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
• Select ON for periodic recording. When OFF is selected, periodic recording is
turned off.
• Recording pattern
Recording example

8. RECORDING
Alarm Recording
When a vital sign alarm or arrhythmia alarm occurs, up to three waveforms
selected on the RECORD window and vital sign data are automatically recorded.
The recorded waveforms are from 8 seconds before to 12 seconds after the alarm
occurrence. Set alarm recording on or off on the RECORD window. For details,
refer to Section 5.
CAUTION
Alarm recording is not performed when:
• Alarm is suspended.
• Alarm recording is set to Off.
8
Recording example
Recording on NIBP Measurement

When NIBP is measured, all monitored parameters are recorded. To set
the recording on NIBP measurement on or off, refer to Section 3 of the
Recording Mode Annotations

One of the following annotations is recorded on each page of the recording paper
as shown below.
TIMER: Automatic periodic recording. Refer to the

“Setting Periodic Recording” section.
ALARM: Automatic recording at a vital sign or arrhythmia
alarm occurrence. Refer to “Turning Automatic
Alarm Recording On/Off” in Section 5.
TREND GRAPH: Trendgraph recording. Refer to “TREND GRAPH
TREND DATA: Trend table recording. Refer to “TREND TABLE
NIBP TREND: NIBP trend recording. Refer to “NIBP TABLE
RECALL: Arrhythmia waveform recording. Refer to
“Arrhythmia Recall Window” in Section 6.
ALARM HISTORY: Alarm history recording. Refer to “Alarm History

8. RECORDING
FULL DISCLOSURE: Full disclosure recording. Refer to “Full

Disclosure Window” in Section 6.
OCRG: OCRG recording on the OCRG window. Refer to
“OCRG Window” in Section 6.
RECORD ON NIBP MEAS: Recording on NIBP measurement.
MANUAL: Manual recording.
Recording Priority
If more than one recording mode is activated at the same time, only the highest
priority mode is used.
Manually stopping recording Manual recording Alarm recording Periodic recording

by the Record key Recording on NIBP measurement
High Recording priority Low
During alarm recording, if a higher priority alarm occurs, the current recording is
canceled and the higher priority alarm is recorded for 20 seconds.
During any type of recording, if a lower or equal priority alarm recording or

any other type of recording occurs, the lower or equal priority recording is not
performed; only the current recording is performed.
Recording Sensitivity
The sensitivity of the waveforms recorded on the recording paper is the same as
the sensitivity of the waveforms displayed on the screen.
To change the sensitivity, change the sensitivity setting on the parameter setting
window as described in Sections 9 to 15.
Recording Speed
The recording speed can be set at <RECORDING SPEED> on the RECORD
window. Refer to “Changing the Recording Speed” in this section.
Recording Related Message

The following messages appears in the following conditions.
When out of recording paper:
When the recorder door is open:

8. RECORDING
Recorded Data
The following data can be printed.
Printed Items Example

Patient name John Smith
Bed ID BED-001
Date and time 21-07-2009 10:30
Reason for recording TIMER, ALARM, etc.
Sensitivity ×2
Paper speed 25 mm/s
ECG related message MONITOR*1
Pacing detect ON
QRS detection type ADULT
Arrhythmia analysis version ECG: 01-01
Heart rate (beats/min) HR: 100 8
ECG lead II
Number of VPCs VPC: 10/min
ST level –0.04 mV
Pulse rate (beats/min) PR: 80
SpO2 (%) SpO2: 98
NIBP: SYS/DIA (MAP) (mmHg),
NIBP: 132/61 (80) mmHg 17:24
measurement time
Respiration rate (resp/min) RR: 14
Temperature (°C/°F) TEMP: 36.4°C
Arrhythmia name COUPLET
Waveform annotation*2 N, V, P etc.
*1 Selected setting for FILTERS on the ECG window is recorded. Refer to
Section 9. When the “CHECK ELECTRODES” alarm occurs, “CHECK
ELECTRODES” is recorded instead of the FILTERS setting.
* Recorded when the recording mode is MANUAL (DELAY mode), ALARM
2
or RECALL and <ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> on the ECG window of the

SYSTEM SETUP window is set to ON.

8. RECORDING
Changing the Recording Speed
Recording speed can be selected from 12.5 mm/s, 25 mm/s or 50 mm/s for
recording with the optional recorder module.
Recording speed and waveform sweep speed on the screen can be set separately.

2. Touch the RECORDING SPEED key. The RECORDING SPEED window

opens.
3. Select the speed by touching the speed key.

8. RECORDING
Changing the Recording Pattern
Up to three parameter waveforms can be selected for a recording pattern.
The selected recording pattern applies to all recording except recording on the
review windows. ECG (TRACE 1) is the default setting.

2. Touch the TRACE 1, TRACE 2 or TRACE 3 key. The TRACE 1, TRACE 2

or TRACE 3 window opens.
3. Select the parameter by touching the parameter key. Select the NONE key to
not assign any parameter.
CO2 and PRESS are only

available for PVM-2703.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set other TRACE.

8. RECORDING
Manually Recording/Printing Waveforms
Recording Waveforms on the Optional Recorder Module

Waveforms and data can be recorded manually on the recorder module.
There are four settings:

• Recording pattern: This setting determines which of the measured
parameter waveforms is recorded. See the
“Changing the Recording Pattern” in this section.
• Real-time or Delay mode: In DELAY mode, recording begins with the
waveforms acquired 8 seconds before recording
starts. In REAL TIME mode, recording begins with
the waveforms acquired when recording starts. To
select real-time or delayed manual recording mode,
refer to “RECORD Window” in the Administrator’s
Guide, Section 3.
• Recording length: CONTINUOUS, 10, 20 or 30 seconds can be
selected for the recording length on the SYSTEM
SETUP window. Refer to “RECORD Window” in
the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
• Recording speed: The recording speed is set at <RECORDING
SPEED> on the RECORD window.
1. If necessary, select the recording pattern on the RECORD window. Refer to

the “Changing the Recording Pattern” in this section.
2. To start recording, touch the Record key.
3. To stop recording, touch the Record key again.

Record key
Recording example

8. RECORDING
Recording Waveforms on the Bedside Monitor with No Recorder

When the bedside monitor with no optional recorder module is connected to a
central monitor network, waveforms and data can be recorded manually from
the bedside monitor on the central monitor recorder. Three waveforms selected
for the TRACE 1, TRACE 2 and TRACE 3 are recorded with the recording
length selected on the bedside monitor. When CONTINUOUS is selected for the
recording length, 30 seconds is automatically selected.
1. If necessary, select the recording pattern on the RECORD window. Refer to

the “Changing the Recording Pattern” in this section.
2. To start recording, touch the Record key.
8
Manual Printing on the Network Printer
When the bedside monitor is connected to a network printer, all monitoring
waveforms and numeric data can be printed on the network printer. The
waveforms from 7 seconds before to 3 seconds after PRINT WAVE key of the
function key is touched are printed.
For details about printing on the network printer, refer to the “Printing on a
Network Printer” in this section.

8. RECORDING
Setting Periodic Recording
You can record up to three waveforms with numerical data periodically.
A 10 second waveform can be automatically recorded at a preset interval that

you can set from 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 and 120 minutes.
Recording starts at the next interval for periodic recording.
For example, if you start automatic periodic recording at 9:20 with a 30 min
interval and <PERIODIC RECORD START TIME> is set to CLOCK, periodic
recording will be performed at 9:30, 10:00, 10:30 and so on. If you start at 9:20
with a 120 min interval, periodic recording will be performed at 10:00, 12:00,
14:00 and so on.
For example, if you start automatic periodic recording at 9:20 with a 30 min
interval and <PERIODIC RECORD START TIME> is set to PERIOD, periodic
recording will be performed at 9:20, 9:50, 10:20 and so on. If you start at 9:20
with a 120 min interval, periodic recording will be performed at 9:20, 11:20,
13:20 and so on.
Changing Settings for Automatic Periodic Recording

There are three settings:
• Periodic recording on/off: On must be selected on the PERIODIC REC
INTERVAL window to automatically record
waveform and data at periodic interval.
• Recording time interval: You can set the desired interval for automatic
periodic recording at <PERIODIC REC
INTERVAL> on the SYSTEM SETUP window.
Time selection is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 and 120
minutes. Default setting is 15 min. See “RECORD
Window” in the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
• Periodic record start time: You can select the start time for the periodic
recording at <PERIODIC RECORD START
TIME> on the SYSTEM SETUP window. When
selecting CLOCK, recording starts at the nearest
interval based on the clock hour. When selecting
PERIOD, recording starts when you touch the ON
key in the PERIODIC REC INTERVAL window.
Default setting is CLOCK. See “RECORD
Window” in the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.

8. RECORDING

2. Touch the PERIODIC REC key. The PERIODIC REC window opens.
The recording interval selected

on the RECORD window of the
SYSTEM SETUP window
3. Select ON or OFF for performing periodic recording.

8. RECORDING
Printing on a Network Printer
When the bedside monitor is connected to a network printer, the following

printing is available. To print on the network printer, the printer properties (IP
address, printer type and paper size) must be set on the RECORD window of the
SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
NOTE
Printing cannot be canceled once it is started.
• Real-time waveform printing:

Prints the waveforms from 7 seconds before to 3 seconds after the PRINT
WAVE key of the function key is touched. Refer to the “Manually Recording/
Printing Waveforms” in this section.
• Printing data on the review windows:

Prints the displayed trendgraphs when the PRINT key on the RECORD
window of the TREND GRAPH window is touched.
The data of selected time period can be printed when PRINT key on the
RECORD window of the TREND TABLE or NIBP TREND window is
touched.
The displayed 8 seconds of arrhythmia recall waveform and the one file before
and after of arrhythmia recall waveform is printed when the PRINT key on the
RECORD window of the RECALL window is touched.
The compressed or actual size full disclosure waveform selected by the cursor
can be printed when the PRINT key on the RECORD window of the FULL
DISC window is touched.
• Printing OCRG on the OCRG window:

The displayed OCRG on the OCRG window can be printed when the PRINT
key on the RECORD window is touched.

8. RECORDING
Recording on NIBP Measurement
You can record the monitored parameter values each time NIBP is measured.
Set the RECORD ON NIBP MEAS on the NIBP window of the SYSTEM
SETUP window to ON. Refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
To stop the recording, touch the Record key.
Record key
Recording example

Section 9 ECG Monitoring
General................................................................................................................................................................. 9.2
Preparing for ECG Monitoring.............................................................................................................................. 9.3
Preparation Flowchart................................................................................................................................ 9.3
Number of Electrodes and Measuring Leads............................................................................................. 9.3
Electrode Position...................................................................................................................................... 9.3
3 Electrode Leads............................................................................................................................ 9.3
6 Electrode Leads............................................................................................................................ 9.4
Electrode Positions for Detecting the Pacemaker Pulse............................................................................ 9.5
Changing the Electrode Lead........................................................................................................... 9.5
Changing the Electrode Positions.................................................................................................... 9.5 9
Selecting Electrodes and Lead................................................................................................................... 9.6
Types of Electrodes and Lead.......................................................................................................... 9.6
Connecting Cables and Attaching Disposable Electrodes......................................................................... 9.7
Connecting the Electrode Cable to the Monitor............................................................................... 9.7
Attaching Disposable Electrodes to the Patient............................................................................... 9.8
Monitoring ECG.................................................................................................................................................... 9.9
ECG Information on the Home Screen..................................................................................................... 9.10
ECG Data Display.................................................................................................................................... 9.10
Measuring ST Level................................................................................................................................. 9.11
Detached Electrode Detection and Display.............................................................................................. 9.11
AC Interference and Display..................................................................................................................... 9.12
Monitoring Arrhythmia........................................................................................................................................ 9.13
General..................................................................................................................................................... 9.13
Arrhythmia Analysis Data Display.................................................................................................. 9.14
Changing Arrhythmia Monitoring Settings................................................................................................ 9.15
Turning Arrhythmia Analysis On or Off........................................................................................... 9.15
Selecting the Patient Type for QRS Detection................................................................................ 9.15
Learning the ECG Waveform for Arrhythmia Detection (VPC Learning)........................................ 9.16
Checking the Dominant QRS......................................................................................................... 9.18
Changing ECG Settings..................................................................................................................................... 9.20
Changing the Monitoring Lead................................................................................................................. 9.21
Optimum Lead................................................................................................................................ 9.21
Changing a Lead............................................................................................................................ 9.22
Changing the ECG Sensitivity.................................................................................................................. 9.23
Changing the Heart Rate/Pulse Rate, VPC and ST Alarm Limits............................................................ 9.25
Checking Arrhythmia Alarm Settings........................................................................................................ 9.26
Turning ECG Measurement On or Off...................................................................................................... 9.28
Turning Pacing Spike Detection On or Off................................................................................................ 9.30
Changing the Number of Electrodes........................................................................................................ 9.32
Selecting the Filter Type........................................................................................................................... 9.33
Changing the Sync Sound Source........................................................................................................... 9.34
Use with an Electrosurgical Unit......................................................................................................................... 9.36

9. ECG MONITORING
General
To monitor ECG, attach disposable electrodes to the patient and connect them
to the ECG/RESP socket on the monitor. Two leads can be monitored with
arrhythmia analysis and ST level measurement.
WARNING
The bioelectric impedance measurement sensor of a minute
ventilation rate-adaptive implantable pacemaker may be affected by
cardiac monitoring and diagnostic equipment which is connected to
the same patient. If this occurs, the pacemaker may pace at its
maximum rate and give incorrect data to the monitor or diagnostic
equipment. In this case, set the <IMPEDANCE MEASUREMENT>
on the RESP window to OFF on the bedside monitor.
NOTE
When a line isolation monitor is used, noise from the line isolation monitor
may resemble actual ECG waveforms on the bedside monitor and cause
false heart rate alarms or no alarm at all.

9. ECG MONITORING
Preparing for ECG Monitoring
1. Select the electrode lead and electrodes.
2. Connect the electrode lead to the ECG connection cord and connect the
ECG connection cord to the ECG/RESP socket on the left side panel of the
monitor.
3. Attach the disposable electrodes to the patient and attach the electrode lead
to the electrodes.
4. Monitoring starts. Set necessary settings.
Number of Electrodes and Measuring Leads

The leads which can be monitored differ according to the type of electrode lead
and number of electrodes used. This monitor automatically identifies the number
of electrodes attached to the patient.
No. of
Lead Features
Electrodes
3 I, II, III Can measure at the thoracic wall.
6 I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1 to V6 Similar to the standard 12 lead.
Electrode Position
3 Electrode Leads
Electrode Position
L/LA
Symbol Lead Color (Clip Color) Electrode Position
R/RA
R Red (Red-beige)
Right infraclavicular fossa
RA White (White-beige)
L Yellow (Yellow-beige)
Left infraclavicular fossa
LA Black (Black-beige)
F Green (Green-beige) Lowest rib on the left anterior
F/LL LL Red (Red-beige) axillary line
Lead Connection
Lead I Lead II Lead III
R/RA L/LA R/RA L/LA R/RA L/LA
F/LL F/LL F/LL

9. ECG MONITORING
6 Electrode Leads
Electrode Position
The 5-electrode method with lead II and lead V5 is effective for monitoring
myocardial ischemia. You can improve monitoring accuracy considerably
L/LA
R/RA by adding lead V4 to this combination. Ca and Cb (Va and Vb) can be at any
position of the standard 12 leads C1 to C6 (V1 to V6), but C4 and C5 (V4 and
Cb/Vb
Ca/Va V5) are most appropriate for myocardial ischemic monitoring.
Symbol Lead Color (Clip Color) Electrode Position

N (RF/RL) F/LL R Red (Red-beige)
Right infraclavicular fossa
RA White (White-beige)
L Yellow (Yellow-beige)
Left infraclavicular fossa
LA Black (Black-beige)
F Green (Green-beige) Lowest rib on the left anterior
LL Red (Red-beige) axillary line
N (RF) Black (Black-beige) Right anterior axillary line at the
N (RL) Green (Green-beige) same level as F.
Fifth intercostal space on the left
Ca White (Brown-white)
midclavicular line. (C4 position of
Va Brown (Blue-brown)
standard 12 leads)
Left anterior axillary line at the
Cb White (Black-white)
same level as Ca. (C5 position of
Vb Brown (Orange-brown)
standard 12 leads)
Lead Position
Standard limb leads
Lead I Lead II Lead III
R/RA L/LA R/RA R/RA L/LA

L/LA
F/LL F/LL F/LL
N (RF/RL) N (RF/RL) N (RF/RL)
Monopolar limb leads

aVR lead aVL lead aVF lead
R/RA L/LA R/RA L/LA R/RA

L/LA
F/LL F/LL F/LL
N (RF/RL) N (RF/RL) N (RF/RL)
Monopolar chest leads

V1 to V6 leads
to
R/RA L/LA
F/LL
N (RF/RL)

9. ECG MONITORING
Electrode Positions for Detecting the Pacemaker Pulse

If the pacemaker pulse cannot be detected, change the electrode lead or electrode
positions as follows.
Changing the Electrode Lead

If the pacemaker pulse cannot be detected with lead II, use lead I or lead III.
Changing the Electrode Positions

If the pacemaker pulse cannot be detected with lead I or lead III, change the
electrode position as follows.
1. With the lead II position, move the F/LL electrode up.

L/LA
R/RA
F/LL
Lead II
2. If step 1 was not effective, move the R/RA electrode down.

R/RA L/LA
F/LL
Lead II
3. If step 2 was not effective, move the R/RA and F/LL electrodes closer
together.
L/LA
R/RA
F/LL If the pacemaker pulse is still not detected, the pacing pulse on the body
surface may be too small. The sensitivity performance is limited.
Lead II

9. ECG MONITORING
Selecting Electrodes and Lead

Select the appropriate electrodes and lead according to the purpose.
CAUTION
Only use Nihon Kohden specified electrodes and electrode leads.
When other type of electrodes or electrode leads are used, the
“CHECK ELECTRODES” message may be displayed and ECG
monitoring may stop.
CAUTION
• When using the electrodes with DIN type lead, use only Vitrode
V or N electrodes. If other electrodes are used, the electrode lead
might not be properly connected and ECG monitoring may be
unstable.
• Do not use electrodes of different metals. ECG monitoring may be
unstable if electrodes of different metals are used.
NOTE
• When using a defibrillator together with the monitor, use Ag/AgCl
electrodes. Other types of electrodes, stainless steel in particular, will
adversely affect the ECG waveform by slowing the baseline recovery
on the monitor and result in no monitoring immediately following
defibrillation.
• Electrode leads other than Nihon Kohden’s might not be defibrillator-
proof.
• Do not use different types of electrodes together. This might cause ECG
monitoring to become unstable.
Types of Electrodes and Lead
No. of Electrodes Disposable Electrodes Electrode Lead ECG Connection Cord

Vitrode L-150, L-150X, BR-903P (IEC)/BR-903PA (AHA) JC-906P (IEC)/JC-906PA
F-150M, F-150S (Clip type, 0.8 m) (AHA), 3 m
JC-916P (IEC), 1.5 m
3
(I, II, III)
Disposable Electrode with DIN type lead, Vitrode V-090M3, V-09IO3,

V-120S3, N-03IS3
Vitrode L-150, L-150X, BR-906P (IEC)/BR-906PA (AHA) (Clip
F-150M, F-150S type, 0.8 m)
6
(I, II, III, aVR, aVL,
aVF, 2 from V1 to V6)
Disposable Electrode with DIN type lead, Vitrode V-060M6, V-06IO6

9. ECG MONITORING
Connecting Cables and Attaching Disposable Electrodes

Connecting the Electrode Cable to the Monitor
1. Connect the electrode lead and ECG connection cord so that their white
panels face the same side.
White panels
When using the electrode with DIN type lead, connect the electrode lead
of the electrode directly to the ECG connection cord according to the panel
symbols.
9
2. Connect the ECG connection cord to the ECG/RESP socket on the monitor.
When connecting the 3-electrode lead
When using more than 3 electrodes with DIN type lead with JC-906P/JC-906PA
ECG connection cord, the number of electrodes must be set on the ECG window.
Refer to the “Changing the Number of Electrodes” section.

9. ECG MONITORING
Attaching Disposable Electrodes to the Patient

Attach the electrodes to the patient by referring to the manual provided with the
electrodes.
WARNING
After attaching the electrode to the patient and connecting the cable
to the monitor, check that electrodes are attached to the patient and
check that the cable is connected to the monitor properly. When the
electrodes are removed from the patient, do not touch the metal part
of the electrode with bare hands or let the metal part of the electrode
contact the metal part of the bed or any other conductive parts.
Failure to follow this warning may cause electrical shock or injury to
the patient by discharged energy.
CAUTION
Do not reuse disposable electrodes.
NOTE
• To maintain good contact between the electrode and skin, check that
the paste of the disposable electrode is not dry.
• When contact of the disposable electrode becomes poor, replace the
electrode with a new one immediately. Otherwise, contact impedance
between the skin and electrode increases and the correct ECG cannot
be obtained.
To obtain a stable ECG:

• Shave excess hair.
• Rub the patient’s skin with a piece of cotton where the electrodes are to be
attached.
• If the skin is dirty, clean with soap and water. Dry completely.

9. ECG MONITORING
Monitoring ECG
When electrodes are attached to the patient and cables are connected properly,
ECG and heart rate appear on the screen. The monitor automatically learns the
patient’s dominant ECG.
One lead appears on the home screen. Up to two leads can be displayed on the
home screen when monitoring with six electrodes.
CAUTION CAUTION
When the “CHECK ELECTRODE” message is When the “NOISE” or “CANNOT ANALYZE”
displayed, ECG is not monitored properly and the message is displayed, ECG data and alarm are
ECG alarm does not function. Check the not reliable. Remove the cause by checking the
9
electrode, electrode leads and connection cord, electrodes, electrode leads, patient’s body
and if necessary, replace with new ones. movement, EMG and peripheral instruments
grounding. Also make sure that an electric
blanket is not used.
CAUTION
During NIBP cuff inflation, heart rate counting
accuracy is not guaranteed by noise interference.
NOTE
• After adjusting the sensitivity of the ECG on the screen and changing
necessary settings, check that the dominant QRS is appropriate.
• The maximum heart rate range is 300 beats/min. “300” is displayed on
the screen even when the patient’s heart rate is above 300.

9. ECG MONITORING
ECG Information on the Home Screen

ECG waveform QRS detection type Filter setting
Sensitivity of
the first trace
QRS sync mark Lead of the

first trace
Heart rate
ST level of the
first trace Sensitivity of the
second trace
VPC
Lead of the
ST level of the second trace
second trace
ECG Data Display

The following ECG related data is acquired when ECG is monitored.
Displayed Data
Screen/Window <ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> is <ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> is
set to ON*1 set to OFF*1
Heart rate Heart rate
ST level ST level
Arrhythmia classification message “ASYSTOLE” alarm occurrence
Home screen
Number of VPC per minute
Arrhythmia alarm occurrence (when
arrhythmia alarm is set to ON*2)
Heart rate trendgraph Heart rate trendgraph
ST level trendgraph ST level trendgraph
TREND GRAPH window
Number of VPC trendgraph Heart rate list
(Refer to the Operator’s Manual or
Heart rate list ST level list
Section 6 of the User’s Guide)
ST level list
Number of VPC list
RECALL window Recall files of the arrhythmias set to “ASYSTOLE” recall files
(Refer to the Operator’s Manual or be saved*3
Section 6 of the User’s Guide)
*1 Arrhythmia analysis can be turned on or off on the PARAMETERS window → ECG page on the SYSTEM
SETUP window.
* Alarm on/off can be set individually for certain arrhythmias on the ARRHYTH page on the PARAMETERS
2
window of the SYSTEM SETUP window.

When alarm recording is turned on, the data and waveform are recorded at the arrhythmia alarm occurrence.
*3 The arrhythmia waveforms to be saved as recall files are set on the RECALL window of the Review window.

9. ECG MONITORING
Measuring ST Level
The ST level is the amplitude between the baseline and ST wave. The ECG
waveform is averaged for 15 seconds to remove artifacts. The baseline and the
ST wave are detected from the averaged ECG, and the ST level is measured.
NOTE
Baseline
ST level
• If there are too many arrhythmias or there is noise on the ECG, ST level
might not be measured and ST level is not displayed on the screen.
ST wave • Although the ST algorithm has been tested for accuracy of the ST
analysis result, the significance of the ST level changes need to be
determined only by a physician.
• If there is baseline drift on the ECG, ST waves are distorted and the ST
measurement may be impossible.
Detached Electrode Detection and Display 9

When an electrode or electrode lead is detached during ECG monitoring, a
“CHECK ELECTRODES” alarm occurs.
When monitoring with 6 electrodes and <AUTO LEAD CHANGE> on the

ECG page of the PARAMETERS window is set to on, and the “CHECK
ELECTRODES” message is displayed for more than 5 seconds, the lead for the
first trace on the home screen is automatically changed to a stable lead.
Five seconds after the detached electrode or electrode lead is attached again, the
lead of the first trace returns to the lead prior to auto lead change.
While the “CHECK ELECTRODES” message is displayed, the correct ECG

waveform is not displayed. To prevent incorrect reading of ECG during an
error condition, the ECG waveform is temporarily replaced with a square wave
and flat line. Check the electrodes if this message appears. Refer to “Screen
Messages” section of the Operator’s Manual.
CAUTION
When the “CHECK ELECTRODE” message is displayed, ECG is not
monitored properly and the ECG alarm does not function. Check the
electrode, electrode leads and connection cord, and if necessary,
replace with new ones.
When the “CHECK ELECTRODES” message appears, the ECG waveforms

become square waves for 2 seconds, then change to flat lines above the baseline.

9. ECG MONITORING
AC Interference and Display

To prevent incorrect reading of ECG during an error condition, when there is a
large AC interference (hum) on the waveform, the “CHECK ELECTRODES”
message appears and the waveform appears as shown below, depending on the
filter setting on the ECG window.
When the waveform looks like this, check that the bedside monitor is properly
grounded.
Hum noises may interfere if the electrodes are dry. Replace the electrodes with
new ones.
When <FILTERS> is set to DIAG

Noise superimposes on the waveform.
When <FILTERS> is set to MONITOR or MAXIMUM

When noise superimposes on the waveform and it is difficult to detect QRS
waves, the ECG waveforms become square waves for 2 seconds, then change to
flat lines above the baseline.

9. ECG MONITORING
Monitoring Arrhythmia
General
The following functions are available for arrhythmia monitoring.
• Arrhythmia alarm indication (alarm sound, screen message and alarm indicator
lamp). Refer to the Operator’s Manual or Section 5 of the User’s Guide.
• Arrhythmia waveform storage (Arrhythmia recall files). Refer to the
Operator’s Manual or Section 6 of the User’s Guide.
• Arrhythmia waveform recording. Refer to the Operator’s Manual or Section 8
of the User’s Guide.
• VPC display and trendgraph. Refer to the Operator’s Manual or Sections 4 and
6 of the User’s Guide.
9
WARNING
SYSTEM SETUP window to ON. Otherwise, there is no sound or
indication for arrhythmia alarms (except for ASYSTOLE).
When arrhythmia analysis is set to on, arrhythmia analysis starts as soon as

the ECG monitoring starts. The monitor automatically detects and classifies
arrhythmia by comparing each beat of the real-time ECG waveform to a
reference ECG waveform (dominant QRS). If the following points of a QRS do
not match the dominant QRS, that QRS is recognized as an arrhythmia.
• RR interval
• QRS width
• QRS amplitude
• QRS polarity
It is important to check the dominant QRS on the ECG window at the start of
ECG monitoring for accurate arrhythmia monitoring.
CAUTION
At the start of ECG monitoring, check that the dominant QRS is
appropriate. Otherwise arrhythmia monitoring may be inaccurate.
When the QRS wave or RR interval changes too frequently, it becomes difficult
for the monitor to distinguish between the normal ECG and arrhythmia. To solve
this problem, the monitor uses pattern matching and multi template matching for
analyzing arrhythmia. However, when the patient’s QRS changes rapidly, check
that the appropriate dominant QRS is used for arrhythmia analysis.

9. ECG MONITORING
Arrhythmia Analysis Data Display

When the monitor detects an arrhythmia, the arrhythmia alarm and data are
indicated. The message display interval depends on the priority setting on the
ALARM window of the SYSTEM SETUP window. For details on this setting,
refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
Highlighted heart rate Arrhythmia alarm messages
The following arrhythmias are analyzed.

ASYSTOLE Longer than 3 to 10 seconds (selectable) with no QRS complex.
Ventricular tachycardia. 3 to 9 (selectable*1) or more consecutive VPCs when heart rate exceeding the VT
VT
EXT TACHY*1 Extreme tachycardia exceeding the EXTREME TACHY limit.
EXT BRADY*1 Extreme bradycardia dropping below the EXTREME BRADY limit.
Ventricular bradycardia. 3 or more consecutive VPCs when heart rate dropping below V BRADY heart
V BRADY*1
rate limit (15 to 299 beats/min selectable).
VPC short run. 3 to 8 (selectable) consecutive VPCs when heart rate exceeds the VPC RUN heart rate
limit (16 to 300 beats/min selectable*1).
VPC RUN
or
The selected number*4 of consecutive VPCs when heart rate drops below the VT heart rate limit.
Supraventricular tachycardia. 3 to 9 (selectable) or more consecutive normal QRS of regular R-R interval
SV TACHY*1
when heart rate exceeding the SV TACHY heart rate limit (16 to 300 beats/min selectable).
Early VPC including R-on-T type. VPC with a time interval from the preceding normal QRS complex of
EARLY VPC less than approximately one-third of the normal R-R interval, at heart rate dropping below 120*2 beats/
min.
MULTIFORM*1 Two different shaped VPCs within the last 3 minutes.
Ventricular bigeminy. 3 or more consecutive pairs of VPC and normal QRS. A dominant rhythm of N-V-
BIGEMINY
TRIGEMINY*1 Ventricular trigeminy. A dominant rhythm of N-N-V-N-N-V.
Frequent VPCs. VPC rate (VPCs/min) reaching or exceeding the preset limit of 1 to 99 VPCs/min
FREQ VPC
(selectable).
VPC Ventricular premature contraction.
PROLONGED RR*1 R-R interval 1.75 times longer than the dominant R-R interval.
NO PACER PULSE*1*3 No QRS and pacing pulse within the bradycardia limit. Oversensing.
PACER NON- No QRS from the preceding pacing pulse for the preset time interval (40 to 480 ms selectable). Non-
CAPTURE*1*3 capture.
*1 These arrhythmias become available when “EXTENDED” is selected for <ARRHYTHMIA TYPE> on the SYSTEM
SETUP screen.
*2 120 beats/min when <QRS DETECTION TYPE> is set to ADULT, 150 beats/min when <QRS DETECTION TYPE> is
set to CHILD or NEONATE.
*3 Available only when <PACING DETECT> is set to ON.

9. ECG MONITORING
The QRS is annotated as follows.

P Paced QRS
– Noise
Changing Arrhythmia Monitoring Settings

Check the following settings for arrhythmia monitoring.
Turning Arrhythmia Analysis On or Off
WARNING
9
You can turn the arrhythmia analysis on or off on the ECG page of the
PARAMETERS window of the SYSTEM SETUP window. When arrhythmia
monitoring is necessary, select ON. For details, refer to Section 3 of the
Selecting the Patient Type for QRS Detection
CAUTION
At the start of ECG monitoring, check that the correct patient type is
set for <QRS DETECTION TYPE> on the ECG window. If an
inappropriate patient type is set, heart rate cannot be counted
accurately and noise or P waves may be counted as QRS and
cardiac arrest may be overlooked.
Select the monitoring patient type. The selected patient type is displayed on the
home screen.
30 minutes after monitor power off, this QRS detection patient type setting
returns to the master setting on the ARRHYTH page of the MASTER window.
Refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
The QRS settings depend on the patient type.
QRS DETECTION TYPE Setting

Items
ADULT CHILD NEONATE
Detect narrow QRS Not available Not available Available
Same as the
QRS detection sensitivity Automatic sensitivity <SENSITIVITY> Automatic sensitivity
setting

9. ECG MONITORING
1. Display the ECG window.

Touch Menu key → ECG key.
2. Touch the QRS DETECTION TYPE key. The QRS DETECTION TYPE
window opens.
3. Select the patient type.
Learning the ECG Waveform for Arrhythmia Detection (VPC

Learning)
The monitor automatically detects and classifies arrhythmia waveforms when
arrhythmia analysis is set to on. To do this, the monitor compares each beat of
the real-time ECG waveform to a reference ECG waveform (dominant QRS).
The monitor automatically samples this dominant QRS in the following

situations:
• When ECG monitoring begins
• When the “CHECK ELECTRODES” alarm message is resolved
• When the monitoring lead is changed
• When the <PACING DETECT> setting is changed
• When the <QRS DETECTION TYPE> setting is changed

9. ECG MONITORING
• When the waveform changes from ventricular rhythm to supraventricular

rhythm and satisfies the conditions specified by Nihon Kohden.
Learning takes a few seconds. During learning, a “LEARNING” message is

displayed on the screen. After learning, the dominant QRS is replaced with the
new one and the monitor resumes analyzing the ECG waveforms.
NOTE
• To make the monitor learn, <ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> on the ECG
page of the PARAMETERS window of the SYSTEM SETUP window
must be set to ON.
• During learning, only the following alarms function.
- ASYSTOLE - PAUSE
- VF - BRADYCARDIA
- VT - TACHYCARDIA
• When monitoring a patient with wide QRS tachycardia, the monitor may
9
misjudge the ECG and there may be VT or VF alarms during learning.
In that case, change to an electrode lead in which a narrower QRS is
obtained. If a narrower QRS cannot be obtained in any electrode lead,
do the learning during the VT alarm. This waveform will be the dominant
QRS. You can make the monitor “relearn” the reference ECG waveform
at any time, for example, when the automatic VPC classification is
questionable.
• After ECG learning, confirm that the acquired dominant QRS is the
stable ECG of the patient.
You can make the monitor “relearn” the reference ECG waveform at any time,
for example, when the automatic VPC classification is questionable.
CAUTION
If there is any doubt about the arrhythmia analysis, make the monitor
relearn the patient’s ECG and check that the dominant QRS is
appropriate. Otherwise, an important arrhythmia may be overlooked.


9. ECG MONITORING
2. Touch the ECG1 LEAD/SENSITIVITY FILTERS/LEARN key. The ECG1

LEAD/SENSITIVITY FILTERS/LEARN window opens.
3. Touch the LEARN key. The monitor learns the reference ECG waveform
and the dominant QRS is refreshed.
Dominant QRS Date and time the dominant

QRS is acquired
NOTE
The ECG waveform on the ECG1 LEAD/SENSITIVITY window is
delayed 5 seconds.
4. Check that the dominant QRS is appropriate for arrhythmia analysis.
Checking the Dominant QRS

The monitor detects QRS of the monitoring ECG and classifies them into
templates. The monitor selects the most typical QRS, called dominant QRS, and
uses it for analyzing arrhythmia. Whenever ECG is learned or relearned, the
dominant QRS is refreshed.
The ECG on the ECG1 LEAD/SENSITIVITY/FILTERS/LEARN window are

annotated by the following QRS classification.

P Paced QRS
– Noise
If there is any doubt about the arrhythmia analysis, make the monitor relearn the
patient’s ECG and check the dominant QRS.

9. ECG MONITORING

9
3. The dominant QRS and ECG of the first trace is displayed on the ECG1
LEAD/SENSITIVITY FILTERS/LEARN window.
QRS annotation
Dominant QRS
NOTE
The ECG waveform on the ECG1 LEAD/SENSITIVITY window is
delayed 5 seconds.
4. Check that the dominant QRS is appropriate.
To change the dominant QRS, touch the LEARN key to relearn the ECG.
The dominant QRS is refreshed.

9. ECG MONITORING
Changing ECG Settings
Change settings on the ECG window. The following settings can be changed for
ECG monitoring.
• Monitoring lead
• ECG sensitivity
• Learn ECG. Refer to the “Monitoring Arrhythmia” section.
• Heart rate, VPC and ST alarm limits and setting
• Check dominant QRS. Refer to the “Monitoring Arrhythmia” section.
• Pacing on/off
• Number of electrodes
• Filter mode
• Sync source
• QRS detection type
• ECG measurement on or off
The following items can be set on the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to
• Auto lead change on/off when electrode is detached
• Arrhythmia analysis on/off. Refer to the “Monitoring Arrhythmia” section.
• Arrhythmia alarms
• ECG electrode lead type (IEC or AHA)
• Heart rate sync sound pitch (High, Middle, Low)
• ECG display color
• Arrhythmia type (standard or extended)
• Pacing mark display on/off
• Pacing mark position
• Monitoring lead name for Ca-Cb
• Alarm indicator sync with QRS on/off
• Cascade ECG waveform on/off
The ST level unit (mV or mm) can be set on the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
screen. Refer to Section 2 of the Administrator’s Guide.
The ECG sweep speed is the speed set for <SWEEP SPEED> on the SWEEP
SPEED window of the DISPLAY/SOUND window.

9. ECG MONITORING
Changing the Monitoring Lead

One lead can be monitored with 3 electrodes and two leads can be monitored
with 6 electrodes on the home screen.
No. of Electrodes Lead

3 I, II, III
6 I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1 to V6
When monitoring with 6 electrodes, the lead of the first trace can be
automatically changed to a stable lead when there is an electrode detachment or
the “CHECK ELECTRODES” message is displayed for more than 5 seconds.
Refer to the “Auto Lead Change On or Off” section of the Administrator’s
Guide.
Optimum Lead
NOTE 9
Follow the physician’s instructions for lead position when available.
It is generally considered that Lead II and Lead V1 are suitable for arrhythmia
monitoring and that Lead V4 and Lead V5 are suitable for myocardial ischemia
monitoring.
Some types of ECGs are difficult for automatic analysis, and heart rate or
arrhythmia detection level is not accurate for some patients. In these cases, use
the following procedure to find the appropriate lead for automatic analysis.
1. Measure the patient’s ECG with the standard 12 ECG leads using an ECG
instrument.
2. Select the optimum lead according to the following guidelines:

i) Select the lead with the monophasic QRS waves which are at least
0.5 mV and have the least difference in amplitude compared with a VPC
or pacing pulse.
0.5 ≤ QRS1/QRS2 ≤ 2
ii) Select the lead with less than 0.2 mV amplitude of the P-wave.
P ≤ 0.2 mV
iii) Select the lead with a T-wave amplitude which is less than one-third of
the QRS wave.
T1 ≤ 1/3QRS1, T2 ≤ 1/3QRS2
QRS1
P T1 T2
QRS2

9. ECG MONITORING
Changing a Lead
You can change the lead of traces on the home screen.
NOTE
When the <ELECTRODES> setting is changed, the lead setting
automatically changes to II. Change the number of electrodes setting
before changing the lead.


3. Select the lead from the <LEAD> box at the bottom of the window. The first
trace changes to the selected lead.

9. ECG MONITORING
To change the lead for the second trace on the home screen, touch the ECG2
LEAD/SENSITIVITY key on the ECG window and select the lead for the
second trace.
9
Changing the ECG Sensitivity

The sensitivity determines the size of the waveform on both the screen and
recording paper.
The sensitivity of the first trace can be set manually or automatically. When you
select auto sensitivity, the sensitivity is automatically determined according to
the average QRS amplitude of the previous 16 beats. When sensitivity is set
automatically, “AUTO” appears beside the sensitivity on the screen.
QRS Wave Amplitude Auto Sensitivity

< 5 mm ×4
< 10 mm ×2
< 20 mm ×1
< 30 mm × 1/2
≥ 30 mm × 1/4
NOTE
• During learning or when there is noise, auto sensitivity is not possible.
• The sensitivity of the second trace cannot be set automatically.
• When <QRS DETECTION TYPE> on the ARRHY ANALYSIS page is
set to “NEONATE”, the sensitivity is set automatically.

9. ECG MONITORING


3. Select the sensitivity.
For first trace
To change the sensitivity for the second trace, display the ECG2 LEAD/
SENSITIVITY window and select the sensitivity for the second trace.

9. ECG MONITORING
Changing the Heart Rate/Pulse Rate, VPC and ST Alarm Limits
CAUTION
You can set the upper and lower heart rate/pulse rate, VPC and ST level of the
first trace alarm limits on the ECG window. You can set all alarms, including the
upper and lower heart rate alarm limits, on the ALARM LIMITS window (See
the Operator’s Manual or Section 5 of the User’s Guide).
Setting Range
NOTE
VPC alarm limit can only be set when <ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> on
the SYSTEM SETUP window is ON. 9
HR/PR: Upper limit: When <SYNC SOURCE> is set to ECG:

16 to 300 beats/min in 1 beat/min steps, OFF
When <SYNC SOURCE> is set to PRESS or SpO2:
When EXT TACHY alarm is set to ON:
16 to EXT TACHY alarm limit in 1 beat/min steps
(default setting: ADULT-140, CHILD-170,
NEONATE-200)
Lower limit: When <SYNC SOURCE> is set to ECG:
OFF, 15 to 299 beats/min in 1 beat/min steps
When EXT BRADY alarm is set to ON:
EXT BRADY alarm limit to 299 in 1 beat/min steps
NEONATE-100)
VPC: Upper limit: 1 to 99 beats/min in 1 beats/min steps, OFF
(default setting: 10 beats/min)
ST: Upper limit: –1.99 to +2.00 mV in 0.01 mV steps (–19.9 to +20.0
mm in 0.1 mm steps), OFF (default setting: OFF)
Lower limit: OFF, –2.00 to +1.99 mV in 0.01 mV steps (–20.0 to
+19.9 mm in 0.1 mm steps) (default setting: OFF)

2. Touch the HR/PR key to change the heart rate/pulse rate alarm limits.
Touch the VPC key to change the VPC alarm limit.
Touch the ST key to change the ST level of the first trace alarm limits.

9. ECG MONITORING
Selected parameter
Upper limit
Lower limit
Current measured value Setting bar Lower limit slider Upper limit slider
or key to adjust the setting.
If the upper limit is set to a value above the maximum, the upper limit alarm
is set to OFF. If the lower limit is set to a value below the minimum, the
lower limit alarm is set to OFF.
Checking Arrhythmia Alarm Settings
WARNING
CAUTION
When the alarm is turned OFF for an arrhythmia, there will be no
alarm for that arrhythmia type. There is no message or mark to
indicate that a certain arrhythmia alarm is turned off. Therefore, be
careful when you turn off an arrhythmia alarm.
NOTE
When an arrhythmia alarm is turned OFF, there will be no alarm recording
for that arrhythmia type even when alarm recording is set to ON on the
RECORD window.
You can check the arrhythmia alarm settings. Only an administrator can change
the settings. Refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.

9. ECG MONITORING
Parameter Detection Condition (Default Setting) Alarm ON/OFF Setting

3 to 10 seconds ((ADULT, CHILD: 5 s NEONATE:
ASYSTOLE ON fixed
3 s)
VF ––– ON fixed
16 to 300 beats/min (ADULT, CHILD: 100 NEONATE:
VT 140)* ON fixed
Value set in VPC RUN to 9 beats (6)*
Upper heart rate alarm limit to 300 beats/min (ADULT:
EXT TACHY* ON/OFF (OFF)
160, CHILD 190, NEONATE: 220)
15 to lower heart rate alarm limit (ADULT: 40, CHILD
EXT BRADY* ON/OFF (OFF)
60, NEONATE: 80)
ON/OFF (ADULT: ON CHILD,
V BRADY* 15 to 299 beats/min (ADULT, CHILD: 50 NEONATE: 60)
NEONATE: OFF))
3 to 8 VPCs (3)
VPC RUN 16 to 300 beats/min (ADULT, CHILD: 100 NEONATE:
NEONATE: OFF))
140)*
3 to 9 VPCs (6)
SV TACHY* 16 to 300 beats/min (ADULT, CHILD: 170 NEONATE: ON/OFF (OFF)
210) 9
PAUSE* 1.0 to 3.0 s (ADULT, CHILD: 3.0 NEONATE: 1.5) ON/OFF (ON)
V RHYTHM* –––
NEONATE: OFF))
COUPLET ––– ON/OFF (OFF)
EARLY VPC ––– ON/OFF (OFF)
MULTIFORM* ––– ON/OFF (OFF)
BIGEMINY ––– ON/OFF (OFF)
TRIGEMINY* ––– ON/OFF (OFF)
IRREGULAR RR* ––– ON/OFF (OFF)
PROLONGED RR* ––– ON/OFF (OFF)
NO PACER PULSE* ––– ON/OFF (OFF)
PACER NON-CAPTURE* 40 to 480 ms (400) ON/OFF (OFF)
* These arrhythmias become available when “EXTENDED” is selected for <ARRHYTHMIA TYPE> on the SYSTEM
SETUP screen.

Administrator’s guide, Section 3.


9. ECG MONITORING
2. Touch the ARRHYTH ALARMS key. The ARRHYTH ALARMS window

opens.
Threshold setting
ON/OFF setting
3. Check the arrhythmia alarm settings. An administrator can change the setting
by touching the SETUP key. Refer to “ARRHYTH Page” in Section 3 of the
Turning ECG Measurement On or Off

You can turn ECG measurement on or off.
ON: Measurement data and alarms related to ECG are displayed. When ECG
measurement is turned from OFF to ON, the waveform on the home
screen automatically changes from pulse waveform to ECG waveform
and the SYNC SOURCE automatically changes to ECG.
OFF: Measurement data and alarms related to ECG are not displayed. The
waveform on the home screen automatically changes from ECG
waveform to pulse waveform. The SYNC SOURCE automatically
changes from ECG to SpO2.
CAUTION
When the ECG measurement is OFF, ECG alarms do not occur even
if each ECG alarm item is set to ON.
NOTE
• You cannot turn off the ECG measurement when ECG is monitored.
• When ECG data is received, the ECG measurement is automatically
set to ON. If the ECG measurement does not start, set ECG
measurement to ON manually.

9. ECG MONITORING

9
2. Touch the ECG MEASUREMENT key. The ECG MEASUREMENT
window opens.
3. Touch the “ON” or “OFF” key to set ECG measurement on or off.
5. Press the Home key to return to the home screen.

9. ECG MONITORING
When ECG measurement is turned off, other parameters are enlarged on the
home screen.
When the ECG measurement is turned off, HR, VPC and ST on the TREND
TABLE, NIBP TABLE and TREND GRAPH window is not displayed. The ECG
full disclosure waveform is not displayed on the FULL DISC window.
Turning Pacing Spike Detection On or Off

When the patient has an implanted cardiac pacemaker, the pacing pulse may be
counted as QRS and the heart rate may be miscounted. The pacing pulse is a
very small wave which cannot be displayed on the monitor. When pacing spike
detection is set to ON, the pacemaker spikes are rejected which allows correct
heart rate counting. When pacing mark is set to ON on the SYSTEM SETUP
window, the pacing mark is displayed on the ECG. Refer to Section 3 of the
When pacing spike detection is set to OFF, the non-paced mark appears in
the upper right of the screen.
WARNING WARNING
Turn the pacing pulse detection* to ON when Even when the pacing pulse detection is set to
monitoring a pacemaker patient. Otherwise the ON, the pacemaker pulse can be overlooked or
pacemaker pulse is not rejected. However, even detected as QRS. You cannot confirm the
when the pacing pulse detection is set to ON, the pacemaker operation only from the detected
pacemaker pulse might not be rejected. When the pacemaker pulse.
pacemaker pulse is not rejected, the pacemaker
pulse is detected as QRS and false heart rate
may be indicated or critical arrhythmia such as
asystole may be overlooked. Keep pacemaker
patients under close observation.
* For the pacemaker pulse rejection capability of PVM-2703

bedside monitor, refer to the “Specifications - ECG” in
Operator’s Manual.

9. ECG MONITORING
NOTE
When you monitor a premature baby or infant and the monitor miscounts
the narrow width QRS, set this to OFF.

2. Touch the PACING DETECT key. The PACING window opens.
3. Touch the ON or OFF key to select on or off.

9. ECG MONITORING
Changing the Number of Electrodes

Select the type and number of electrodes.

2. Touch the ELECTRODES key. The ELECTRODES window opens.
3. Select the type and number of electrodes.

STANDARD: Any electrodes other than DIN type. The number of
electrodes (3 or 6) is automatically recognized by the monitor.
INDIV 6: Monitoring with 6 DIN type electrodes.

9. ECG MONITORING
Selecting the Filter Type

There are following types for ECG filter.
DIAG: This mode is best for viewing the details of the waveform. It is
similar to the real ECG. (0.05 to 60 Hz)
MONITOR: Low-cut and high-cut filter. (0.3 to 40 Hz)
MAXIMUM: Baseline drift-free, hum (AC) and high-cut filter. Appropriate when
there is noise from AC or ESU. (1 to 18 Hz)
NOTE
• When performing defibrillation, set the <FILTERS> to MONITOR or
MAXIMUM. The waveform recovery may become slow due to electrode
polarization when DIAG is set.
• When DIAG is selected, the frequency response is 0.05 to 60 Hz. Be
aware of this when monitoring the ECG.
9
2. Touch the ECG1 LEAD/SENSITIVITY/FILTERS/LEARN key. The ECG1

LEAD/SENSITIVITY/FILTERS/LEARN window opens.
3. Select filter type in the <FILTERS> box.

9. ECG MONITORING
Changing the Sync Sound Source

You can select ECG, SpO2 pulse (SpO2) or arterial blood pressure pulse (PRESS)
as the sync sound source. The sync source can also be changed on the SpO2 and
PRESS windows.
When pulse wave and pressure waveform are irregular because of an IABP,
select ECG.
NOTE
• When heart rate is unstable because of an ESU, select SpO2 or
PRESS.
• When the connection cord of SpO2 or IBP of the arterial blood pressure
is disconnected from the monitor and an alarm occurs when the sync
source is set to SpO2 or PRESS, the sync source changes to ECG
when the alarm is silenced by touching the Silence Alarms key. The
sync source returns to SpO2 or PRESS when the SpO2 or IBP is
monitored again. When using PRESS as the sync source, adjust zero
balance.
• When the sensor is detached from the patient and alarm occurs, and
the sync source is set to SpO2 or PRESS, the sync source does not
change to ECG when the alarm is silenced, and “- - -” is displayed for
PR.
• PRESS is only available for PVM-2703.
When the sync source is set to ECG and ECG is not measured, there is no sync
sound.
When SpO2 is selected, the pulse rate is displayed to the left of the heart rate on
the screen and the sync mark synchronizes with the pulse.

9. ECG MONITORING

9
2. Touch the SYNC SOURCE key. The SYNC SOURCE window opens.
3. Select the sync source.

ECG: QRS
PRESS: Pulse wave of arterial blood pressure
SpO2: SpO2 pulse

9. ECG MONITORING
Use with an Electrosurgical Unit
For use with an electrosurgical unit (ESU), this monitor has a circuit to
protect the patient from skin burn and to reduce ESU interference on the ECG
waveform. However, the effectiveness of this circuit depends on electrode
position and monitor setup. With an ESU, pay attention to the following points.
WARNING
When the monitor is used with an electrosurgical unit (ESU), firmly
attach the entire area of the ESU return plate. Otherwise, the current
from the ESU flows into the electrodes of the monitor, causing
electrical burn where the electrodes are attached. For details, refer to
the ESU manual.
WARNING
When using the monitor with an ESU, locate the monitor and ESU
and ground the instruments properly. Check the ECG and value on
the monitor. Otherwise noise from the ESU may interfere with the
ECG and the heart rate and arrhythmia analysis may be incorrect.
• Arrangement
Install the monitor as far from the ESU as possible. If possible, locate them on
opposite sides of the operating table.
• Power supply
Noise from the ESU may interfere with the ECG signal through the AC power
line. Supply power to the monitor and ESU from different outlets located as far
from each other as possible. Do the equipotential grounding properly.
3 electrodes
Power supply and Power supply and

grounding for ESU grounding for monitor
ESU Operating table

PVM-2701/2703 monitor
• Measure with 3-electrode lead

Use the minimum number of electrodes. Use new electrodes.

9. ECG MONITORING
• Minimize noise
1. Select an ECG lead where the active ECG electrodes are located as far
from the incision as possible.
2. Position the + and – electrodes as close as possible.
3. Select the leads where the angle (θ) between the active electrodes and the
incision is as small as possible.
4. Set the electrosurgical return plate as close to the incision as possible.

As far as possible from electrode and
as near as possible to incision.
Return plate
Incision
Make small
• Set the following items on the ECG window.

FILTERS: MAXIMUM
SYNC SOURCE: SpO2
• Noise is superimposed on the waveform and the respiration rate cannot be

monitored accurately in the impedance method. When monitoring respiration,
turn respiration monitoring off.

Section 10 Respiration Monitoring
General............................................................................................................................................................... 10.2
Impedance Method................................................................................................................................... 10.2
Preparing for Respiration Monitoring in Impedance Method.............................................................................. 10.3
Preparation Flowchart.............................................................................................................................. 10.3
Electrode Position and Waveform Examples............................................................................................ 10.3
Electrode Position.......................................................................................................................... 10.4
Amplitude....................................................................................................................................... 10.4
Connecting Cables and Attaching Disposable Electrodes....................................................................... 10.5
Monitoring Respiration........................................................................................................................................ 10.6
Respiration Information on the Home Screen.......................................................................................... 10.6
Changing Respiration Settings........................................................................................................................... 10.7
10
Changing the Monitoring Lead in Impedance Method............................................................................. 10.7
Changing the Respiration Sensitivity........................................................................................................ 10.8
Turning Respiration Measurement On or Off in Impedance Method...................................................... 10.10
Changing the Respiration Rate and Apnea Alarm Limits....................................................................... 10.11
Changing the Respiration Waveform Sweep Speed.............................................................................. 10.13

10. RESPIRATION MONITORING
General
On this monitor, respiration can be measured by impedance method.
Impedance Method
In the impedance method, respiration is measured and monitored by attaching the
ECG electrodes to the patient and connecting them to the ECG/RESP socket on
the monitor. This method measures changes in impedance between the R and F
(RA and LL) or R and L (RA and LA) ECG electrodes.
WARNING
The bioelectric impedance measurement sensor of a minute
ventilation rate-adaptive implantable pacemaker may be affected by
cardiac monitoring and diagnostic equipment which is connected to
the same patient. If this occurs, the pacemaker may pace at its
maximum rate and give incorrect data to the monitor or diagnostic
equipment. In this case, set the <IMPEDANCE MEASUREMENT>
on the RESP window to OFF on the bedside monitor.

Preparing for Respiration Monitoring in Impedance Method
The procedure is the same as for monitoring ECG.
1. Select the electrode lead.
2. Connect the electrode lead to the ECG connection cord and connect the
ECG connection cord to the ECG/RESP socket on the left side panel of the
monitor.
3. Attach the disposable electrodes to the patient and attach the electrode lead
to the electrodes. Attach R and F (RA and LL) or R and L (RA and LA) with
the lungs between the electrodes.
4. Monitoring starts. Set necessary settings. 10
Electrode Position and Waveform Examples

Respiration can be measured by the impedance method when the R (RA) and F
(LL) or R (RA) and L (LA) electrodes are placed so that the lungs are between
the electrodes.
The optimum electrode positions for ECG monitoring of a patient are not always
optimum for respiration monitoring of the patient. Select the optimum positions
for both ECG and respiration measurements.
The amplitude of the respiration waveform differs according to the electrode

position. The following shows different examples of respiration waveforms
according to the electrode position when monitoring with the impedance method.

Electrode lead and position 162 cm 47 kg female 153 cm 45 kg female
R/RA L/LA
1
F/LL
Standard R-F/RA-LL
R/RA L/LA
2
F/LL
R-L/RA-LA
R/RA L/LA
3
F/LL
R-F/RA-LL with higher F/LL position
Electrode Position
R or RA F or LL L or LA
Lowest rib on the left
1 Right infraclavicular fossa —
anterior axillary line
2 Right infraclavicular fossa — Left infraclavicular fossa
Fifth intercostal space on
3 Right infraclavicular fossa —
the left midaxillary line
Amplitude
Respiration measurement is influenced by movement of the chest and abdomen. The
1 amplitude of the waveform changes greatly according to slight change of the F (LL)
electrode position. It also differs considerably between different patients.
Respiration measurement is influenced by movement of the chest. Detects thoracic
2
respiration. There is a great difference in amplitude between different patients.
Respiration amplitude is large, and therefore, detection rate is good. The electrode
3
position is similar to lead II of the ECG. This position is highly recommended.

170 cm 60 kg male 179 cm 94 kg male 160 cm 50 kg male
10
Connecting Cables and Attaching Disposable Electrodes

Connecting cables and attaching disposable electrodes are the same as for the
ECG monitoring. Refer to “Preparing for ECG Monitoring” in Section 9.

Monitoring Respiration
When preparation is done properly, the respiration waveform appears on the

screen.
In impedance method, the respiration data do not appear on the screen when
respiration monitoring in impedance method is set to OFF (the “RESP OFF”
message appears). When using an ESU, noise is superimposed on the waveform
and the respiration measurement cannot be monitored accurately.
Respiration Information on the Home Screen
Sensitivity
Respiration sync mark

Respiration waveform
Respiration rate

Changing Respiration Settings
Change settings on the RESP window (PVM-2701) or RESP/CO2 window

(PVM-2703). The following settings can be changed for respiration monitoring.
• Turning respiration monitoring on/off
• Changing monitoring lead
• Respiration sensitivity
• Respiration rate and apnea alarm limits
• Respiration waveform sweep speed
The respiration waveform sweep speed can also be set on the DISPLAY/SOUND
window. Refer to Section 3.
The noise reduction for impedance respiration monitoring can be turned on or

off and the respiration data display color can be set on the SYSTEM SETUP
window. Refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
10
NOTE
The screens in this manual are for PVM-2703. The procedure is the same
for PVM-2701.
Changing the Monitoring Lead in Impedance Method

The lead which can be monitored in the impedance method is R-F (RA-LL) or
R-L (RA-LA). The selected lead appears on the home screen.
1. Display the RESP or RESP/CO2 window.

Touch Menu key → RESP or RESP/CO2 key.
2. Touch the RESP LEAD/SENSITIVITY key. The RESP LEAD/

SENSITIVITY window opens.

3. Select the lead. Select the lead with the larger respiration amplitude and
smaller heart beat.
Respiration waveform
Changing the Respiration Sensitivity

The sensitivity determines the size of the waveform on both the screen and
recording paper.
The respiration waveform amplitude differs according to the sensitivity and the
NOISE REDUCTION ON IMPEDANCE RESP setting on the SYSTEM SETUP
window. The following amplitudes for the respiration rate can be counted. Refer
to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide for the NOISE REDUCTION ON
IMPEDANCE RESP setting.
NOISE REDUCTION ON Countable Amplitudes

Sensitivity
IMPEDANCE RESP Setting for the Respiration Rate
× 1/4 Larger than 0.375 mm
× 1/2 Larger than 0.75 mm
OFF ×1 Larger than 1.5 mm
×2 Larger than 3 mm
×4 Larger than 6 mm
ON All sensitivities Larger than 10 mm


2. Touch the RESP LEAD/SENSITIVITY key. The RESP LEAD/

SENSITIVITY window opens.
10
3. Select the appropriate sensitivity from ×1/4, ×1/2, ×1, ×2 and ×4 in the
<SENSITIVITY> box.

Turning Respiration Measurement On or Off in Impedance Method

Even when respiration measurement is set up, you can turn respiration
measurement off if you do not need it. When respiration is turned off, respiration
waveform does not appear and the “RESP OFF” message appears on the home
screen. When respiration is not available, no respiration data appears.
NOTE
When using an ESU, noise is superimposed on the waveform and the
respiration measurement cannot be monitored accurately.

2. Touch the IMPEDANCE MEASUREMENT key. The IMPEDANCE

MEASUREMENT window opens.
3. Select ON or OFF to turn impedance measurement on or off.

Changing the Respiration Rate and Apnea Alarm Limits
CAUTION
You can set the upper and lower respiration rate and apnea alarm limits on the
RESP or RESP/CO2 window. You can set all alarms, including the upper and
lower respiration rate and apnea alarm limits, on the ALARM LIMITS window
(See the Operator’s Manual or Section 5 of the User’s Guide).
Setting Range
Respiration rate upper limit: 2 to 150 counts/min in 2 counts/min steps, OFF
(default setting: OFF)
Respiration rate lower limit: OFF, 0 to 148 counts/min in 2 counts/min steps
Apnea upper limit: 5 to 40 s in 5 s steps, OFF (default setting: 20) 10


2. Touch the RR key to change the respiration rate alarm setting.

Touch the APNEA key to change the apnea alarm setting.
Selected parameter
Upper limit slider
Upper limit
Setting bar
Lower limit
Current value of the selected parameter Lower limit slider

Changing the Respiration Waveform Sweep Speed

The respiration waveform sweep speed on the screen can be selected. This
setting can also be changed on the DISPLAY/SOUND window.

10
2. Touch the RESP SWEEP SPEED or RESP/CO2 SWEEP SPEED key. The
RESP SWEEP SPEED or RESP/CO2 SWEEP SPEED window opens.
3. Select the sweep speed.

Section 11 CO2 Monitoring
General............................................................................................................................................................... 11.2
Mainstream Method.................................................................................................................................. 11.2
Measurement Error with the TG-900P/TG-920P CO2 Sensor Kit............................................................. 11.2
Use with Volatile Anesthetic Agents......................................................................................................... 11.4
Preparing for CO2 Monitoring............................................................................................................................. 11.5
Mainstream Method....................................................................................................................... 11.5
Types of CO2 Sensor Kits for Mainstream Method................................................................................... 11.5
TG-900P CO2 Sensor Kit............................................................................................................... 11.6
TG-920P CO2 Sensor Kit............................................................................................................... 11.6
TG-950P CO2 Sensor Kit............................................................................................................... 11.8
TG-970P CO2 Sensor Kit............................................................................................................... 11.9
Connecting the CO2 Sensor Kit to the Monitor....................................................................................... 11.10
11
Connecting the CO2 Sensor Kit to the Respiration Circuit...................................................................... 11.10
Performing Zero Calibration when Using a TG-950P/TG-970P CO2 Sensor Kit.................................... 11.10
Calibrating by Air.......................................................................................................................... 11.11
Calibrating with N2 Gas................................................................................................................ 11.12
Monitoring CO2 ................................................................................................................................................. 11.13
CO2 Information on the Home Screen.................................................................................................... 11.13
Changing CO2 Settings..................................................................................................................................... 11.15
Changing the Scale................................................................................................................................ 11.15
Changing the CO2, Respiration Rate and Apnea Alarm Limits.............................................................. 11.16
Setting the Inspiration Composition........................................................................................................ 11.17
Changing the CO2 Waveform Sweep Speed.......................................................................................... 11.19
Changing Duration for Holding ETCO2 Maximum Value......................................................................... 11.19
Inspection of Measuring Accuracy.................................................................................................................... 11.21
Daily Inspection of Measuring Accuracy................................................................................................ 11.21
Inspection of Measuring Accuracy (Precise Method)............................................................................. 11.21
NOTE
CO2 monitoring is only available for PVM-2703.

11. CO2 MONITORING
General
On this monitor, CO2 can be measured by mainstream method.
To monitor CO2 by the mainstream method, connect the TG-900P, TG-920P,

TG-950P or TG-970P CO2 sensor kit to the patient’s respiration circuit or directly
to the patient and connect the CO2 sensor kit to the PRESS/CO2 socket on the
monitor.
Mainstream Method
In the mainstream method, the sensor is located directly in the respiration circuit.
There are two types of sensors for different calculation methods.
Semi-quantitative method using the TG-900P/TG-920P CO2 sensor kit

Measurements are based on the assumption of no CO2 gas in the inspiration.
The CO2 concentration in the respiration is calculated by taking the CO2
concentration in the inspiration as 0 mmHg (0 kPa).
Quantitative method using the TG-950P/TG-970P CO2 sensor kit

The CO2 partial pressure in both inspiration and expiration is measured.
The mainstream CO2 measurement method has the following merits and limits
compared to the sidestream method. Understand these points when performing
measurements.
Merits
• No delay in the measurement time.
• Measurement is stable over a long period of time.
• Few measurement troubles due to mixture of water droplets.
Limits
• TG-900P, TG-950P or TG-970P CO2 sensor kit cannot be used on non-
intubated patients.
• Due to the weight of the TG-900P or TG-950P CO2 sensor kit, load is easily
imposed on the tracheal tube.
• The dead space volume is relatively large.
Measurement Error with the TG-900P/TG-920P CO2 Sensor Kit

With the TG-900P/TG-920P CO2 sensor kit, measurements are based on the
assumption that the inspiration contains no CO2 gas. If CO2 gas mixes in the
inspiration, measured values will be lower than normal.

11. CO2 MONITORING
CAUTION
Supply adequate oxygen when measuring CO2 partial pressure of
a patient connected to a Jackson Rees, Mapleson D or any other
respiration circuit where CO2 gas may be present during inspiration.
The semi-quantitative method measures CO2 partial pressure based
on the assumption of no CO2 gas in the inspired air; it assumes
CO2 partial pressure 0 mmHg (0 kPa) in the inspiration of every
respiration. If the inspired air contains CO2 gas, the measured CO2
value may be lower than the actual value.
CAUTION
When measuring CO2 partial pressure of a patient with an oxygen
mask, set the oxygen supply to 5 L/min or more. If CO2 gas remains
in the oxygen mask and mixes with the inspired air, the measured
value may be lower than the actual value.
When CO2 is mixed in inspiration
Actual CO2 waveform CO2 waveform on the monitor 11

40 mmHg 40 mmHg
5.3 kPa 5.3 kPa
Measured value becomes lower
CO2 mixed in inspiration

0 0
Measurement Error when CO2 is Mixed in the Inspired Air

ETCO2 (mmHg)
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
(1.3 kPa) (2.7 kPa) (4.0 kPa) (5.3 kPa) (6.7 kPa) (8.0 kPa) (9.3 kPa) (10.7 kPa)
10
(1.3 kPa)
5
(0.7 kPa)
0
Error (mmHg)
5
( 0.7 kPa)
10
( 1.3 kPa)
15
( 2.0 kPa)
20
( 2.7 kPa)
25
( 3.3 kPa)
CO2 mixed in inspired air
1 mmHg (0.1 kPa)
2 mmHg (0.3 kPa)
4 mmHg (0.5 kPa)
8 mmHg (1.1 kPa)

11. CO2 MONITORING
CAUTION
The TG-900P and TG-920P CO2 sensor kits do not adjust the
measurement value to compensate for different atmospheric
pressure. Be careful when reading the value when using the CO2
sensor kit at high altitudes because the measurement value may be
inaccurate.
The measurement value drops 0.13 kPa (1 mmHg) for 5.33 kPa (40 mmHg) CO2
gas when an atmospheric pressure drops 3.3 kPa.
CAUTION
The measured value may be incorrect when the operating
temperature changes greatly or there is excess condensation in the
airway adapter or nasal adapter.
Use with Volatile Anesthetic Agents
CAUTION
When using an anesthetic instrument with a volatile anesthetic
agent, the CO2 measurement may be inaccurate.
Volatile anesthetic agents affect the CO2 value. Be aware of this when using
volatile anesthetic agent.
Example: At 1 atmospheric pressure, 5% (38 mmHg, 5.07 kPa) CO2 and N2
mixture gas, no condensation
Anesthetic Difference
Concentration
Gas TG-900P TG-920P TG-950P TG-970P
+0.9 mmHg +0.6 mmHg +0.2 mmHg +0.3 mmHg
Halothane 4%
+0.12 kPa +0.08 kPa +0.03 kPa +0.04 kPa
Enflurane 5%
+0.20 kPa +0.20 kPa +0.05 kPa +0.12 kPa
Isoflurane 5%
+0.24 kPa +0.23 kPa +0.11 kPa +0.22 kPa
Sevoflurane 6%
+0.37 kPa +0.36 kPa +0.17 kPa +0.28 kPa
Desflurane 24%
+0.93 kPa +0.88 kPa +0.43 kPa +0.39 kPa

11. CO2 MONITORING
Preparing for CO2 Monitoring
NOTE
When using N2O anesthetic gas (nitrous oxide), set the gas composition
on the GAS COMP window. Refer to the “Setting the Inspiration
Composition” section.
Mainstream Method
1. Select the CO2 sensor kit and airway adapter/nasal adapter.
2. Connect the CO2 sensor kit to the PRESS/CO2 socket on the monitor.
3. When using a TG-950P or TG-970P CO2 sensor kit, perform zero calibration.
4. Connect the CO2 sensor to the respiration circuit or attach the CO2 sensor to
the patient. 11
5. Start measurements and change necessary settings.
Types of CO2 Sensor Kits for Mainstream Method

There are four types of CO2 sensor kit for CO2 mainstream monitoring.
Model Method Attachment

TG-900P Semi-quantitative Used on an intubated patient
Attach to the patient nose or used on an
TG-920P Semi-quantitative
intubated patient
TG-950P Quantitative Used on an intubated patient
Used on an intubated patient with
TG-970P Quantitative
YG-211T/213T/214T
WARNING WARNING
Select the airway adapter or nasal adapter taking When using the airway adapter or nasal adapter
the patient weight and ventilation volume into on a patient with low ventilatory volume, the
consideration. If an inappropriate airway adapter CO2 may mix in the inspiration due to the
or nasal adapter is used, the resistance in the airway adapter’s dead space volume, resulting
respiration circuit increases or the measurement in inaccurate measured values or difficulty in
value is incorrect. detecting apnea. Perform ventilation taking into
consideration the dead space volume.

11. CO2 MONITORING
CAUTION CAUTION
The CO2 data may be inaccurate when monitoring When monitoring CO2, make sure that the
a patient with an extremely high respiration rate or gas composition is entered. Otherwise the
irregular respiration. Read the measured values measurement result may be inaccurate.
carefully.
CAUTION CAUTION
When using an anesthetic instrument with a The airway adapter/nasal adapter is non-
volatile anesthetic agent, the CO2 measurement sterilized and disposable. Use only for a single
may be inaccurate. patient and single use. Failure to follow this
instruction causes cross infection.
NOTE
The measurement may be inaccurate when monitored in the following
conditions. Read the measured values carefully.
• When used in environments with high concentration nitrous oxide gas.
• When used in environments with sudden temperature changes.
• When used in environments with severe humidity.
TG-900P CO2 Sensor Kit

The TG-900P CO2 sensor kit measures the partial pressure of the expired CO2 of
an intubated patient by the semi-quantitative method. It consists of a TG-101T
CO2 sensor and JG-900P CO2 adapter. It requires a YG-101T airway adapter for
monitoring CO2.
TG-101T CO2 sensor
JG-900P CO2 adapter YG-101T airway adapter
Model Weight Dead Space Volume Supply Code

YG-101T 10 kg or more 5 cc R801

The TG-920P CO2 sensor kit measures the partial pressure of the expired CO2
of a patient by the semi-quantitative method. This CO2 sensor kit can be used on
both intubated and not intubated patients. It consists of a TG-121T CO2 sensor
and JG-920P CO2 adapter. It requires a YG-120T, YG-121T or YG-122T nasal
adapter when attached on a patient who is not intubated or YG-111T airway
adapter when attached on an intubated patient for monitoring CO2.

11. CO2 MONITORING
TG-121T CO2 sensor

YG-111T airway adapter
JG-920P CO2 adapter
YG-120T YG-121T YG-122T

(for nasal breathing) (for naso-oral) (for oxygen cannula)
Nasal tube
Holder for
oxygen cannula
Clip Mouth guide
Mouth guide
Type of Adapter Model Weight Dead Space Volume Supply Code

11
Airway adapter YG-111T 7 kg or more 4 mL R804
YG-120T V921
Nasal adapter YG-121T 10 kg or more 1.2 mL V922
YG-122T V923
WARNING WARNING
The only oxygen cannula that can be used with • When you use YG-122T together with an
YG-122T is manufactured by HUDSON RCI®. Do oxygen cannula, check that the oxygen cannula
not use any other oxygen cannula. Other oxygen is correctly attached on the patient by referring
cannulas cannot be attached and oxygen cannot to other parameters and by observing the
be delivered to the patient through the nostrils. patient periodically.
• If arterial oxygen partial pressure does not
increase, immediately stop using the oxygen
WARNING
cannula with the CO2 sensor kit and select
Check that the oxygen cannula tube is not bent,
another way to supply oxygen.
broken, or blocked by the nasal tube. If the ends
of the oxygen cannula tube turn too far up or
down, it causes insufficient O2 supply or the CO2
value may be incorrect.
CAUTION
When using the YG-121T/YG-122T nasal adapter
on a patient with bleeding disorder, poor general
medical condition or malnutrition, observe the
patient condition all the time. The mouth guide
touches the mouth and may cause pressure
sores.

11. CO2 MONITORING
When Using an Oxygen Cannula

As the graphs show, the expired volume is decreased at the end of expiration.
If too much oxygen is supplied or oxygen is directly delivered to the nose, the
oxygen flow affects the expired gas flow. Therefore, the actual CO2 waveform
will be inaccurate (the solid line in the graph) compared with the typical pattern
(the dashed line).
CAUTION
With the TG-950P/TG-970P CO2 sensor kit, measured value may
be incorrect when the operating temperature changes greatly. In this
case, wait for about 30 minutes to acquire correct measurement.
of an intubated patient by the quantitative method. It consists of a TG-201T CO2
sensor and JG-950P CO2 adapter. It requires a YG-201T or YG-202T airway
adapter for monitoring CO2.
TG-201T CO2 sensor
JG-950P CO2 adapter

YG-201T/YG-202T airway adapter

11. CO2 MONITORING
WARNING
The TG-970P CO2 sensor kit cannot correctly measure the ETCO2
value and respiration rate during high frequency oscillation (HFO).
Do not diagnose the patient from the ETCO2 Value and respiration
rate.
CAUTION
With the TG-950P/TG-970P CO2 sensor kit, measured value may
be incorrect when the operating temperature changes greatly. In this
case, wait for about 30 minutes to acquire correct measurement.
of an intubated patient by the quantitative method. It consists of a TG-221T CO2
sensor and JG-970P CO2 adapter. It requires an airway adapter for monitoring
CO2.
11
TG-970P CO2 sensor kit
TG-221T CO2 sensor
JG-970P CO2 adapter
YG-211T airway adapter

YG-213T airway adapter YG-214T airway adapter
Dead Space Supply

Model Patient Weight
Volume Code
YG-211T Adult/child 7 kg or more 4 mL R805
YG-213T Child/neonate 2 to 7 kg 0.5 mL R806
YG-214T Child/neonate 2.5 to 7 kg 1.8 mL R807

11. CO2 MONITORING
Connecting the CO2 Sensor Kit to the Monitor

Connect the CO2 sensor kit to the PRESS/CO2 socket on the monitor.
When connecting the TG-920P CO2 sensor kit
Connecting the CO2 Sensor Kit to the Respiration Circuit

Connect the CO2 sensor kit to the patient or respiration circuit by referring to the
CO2 sensor kit manual.
Performing Zero Calibration when Using a TG-950P/TG-970P CO2 Sensor Kit

When using the TG-950P or TG-970P CO2 sensor kit, perform zero calibration in
the following conditions.
• When the airway adapter is replaced with a new one.
• When a different type of airway adapter is used.
• When the operating temperature changes.
• When the measurement room is changed.
• Whenever necessary.
Zero calibration can be performed in two ways: calibration with air and
calibration with N2 gas. Both methods are performed on the RESP/CO2 window.
• Calibration with air
Expose the airway adapter to air. Calibrates with about 0.2 mmHg (0.03 kPa)
CO2 in the air.
• Calibration with N2 gas
Flow N2 gas into the airway adapter.
NOTE
The calibrated value is saved in memory in the connector of the CO2
sensor kit. Once calibrated, you don’t need to calibrate again when
connecting the CO2 sensor kit to the different socket of a different unit.

11. CO2 MONITORING
Calibrating by Air
1. Display the CO2 ZERO CAL window. The TG-950P or TG-970P CO2 sensor
kit must be connected to the monitor for the CO2 ZERO CAL window to be
displayed.
Touch Menu key → RESP/CO2 key → CO2 ZERO CAL key.
2. Select AIR CAL under <SELECT CALIBRATION METHOD>. The

“EXPOSE SENSOR TO AIR” message appears.
3. Expose the airway adapter to air and touch the YES key to start calibration. 11
When the “CALIBRATION COMPLETE” message is displayed, the

calibration is complete. The calibrated date and time appears.
4. Reconnect the airway adapter to the respiration circuit. CO2 can be

monitored.

11. CO2 MONITORING
Calibrating with N2 Gas

For handling the N2 gas cylinder, refer to the N2 gas manual.
1. Connect the airway adapter to the N2 gas cylinder.
2. Display the CO2 ZERO CAL window. The TG-950P or TG-970P CO2 sensor
kit must be connected to the monitor for the CO2 ZERO CAL window to be
displayed.
Touch Menu key → RESP/CO2 key → CO2 ZERO CAL key.
3. Select N2 CAL under <SELECT CALIBRATION METHOD>. The “FLOW

N2 GAS” message appears.
4. Open the N2 gas cylinder so that the N2 gas flows into the airway adapter and
touch the YES key to start calibration.
When the “CALIBRATION COMPLETE” message is displayed, the

calibration is complete. The calibrated date and time appears.
5. Reconnect the airway adapter to the respiration circuit. CO2 can be

monitored.

11. CO2 MONITORING
Monitoring CO2
After completing the preparation, CO2 data and waveform appear on the screen.
CAUTION CAUTION
When the “CHANGE ADAPTER” or “SENSOR When using an anesthetic instrument with a
ERROR” message is displayed, check the CO2 volatile anesthetic agent, the CO2 measurement
sensor kit and replace it if necessary. CO2 cannot may be inaccurate.
be monitored while the message is displayed.
CO2 Information on the Home Screen

When Using a TG-900P/TG-920P CO2 Sensor Kit
NOTE
This monitor performs calibration automatically at periodic interval and in
the following conditions.
11
• At the monitor power on
• Patient’s first respiration
• The airway adapter/nasal adapter is removed from the CO2 sensor and
connected again
• Respiration stopped for 20 seconds
• Signal changed rapidly due to temperature change
During calibration, the CO2 waveform appears as the calibrated
waveform, but the respiration rate and measured value are not affected.
Respiration rate from CO2 End tidal CO2 CO2 waveform Scale of CO2 waveform

11. CO2 MONITORING
When Using a TG-950P or TG-970P CO2 Sensor Kit

NOTE
Perform calibration in the following conditions.
• When the airway adapter is replaced with a new one.
• When a different type of airway adapter is used.
• When the operating temperature changes.
• When the measurement room is changed.
• Whenever necessary.
Scale of CO2
waveform
Respiration rate from CO2 End tidal CO2 CO2 waveform
Respiration sync mark Inspired CO2

11. CO2 MONITORING
Changing CO2 Settings
Change the settings on the RESP/CO2 window. The following settings can be
changed for CO2 monitoring.
• CO2 waveform sweep speed

• Scale
• Respiration rate, apnea and CO2 alarm settings
• Inspiration composition
• Max hold on or off
The CO2 unit can be set to mmHg or kPa on the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The CO2 data display color can be set on the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to
11
Changing the Scale
The scale can be changed for the CO2 waveform.
The CO2 scale can also be changed on the TREND GRAPH window.
1. Display the CO2 SCALE window.

Touch Menu key → RESP/CO2 key → CO2 SCALE key.

11. CO2 MONITORING
2. Select the scale by touching the desired scale key. You can adjust the scale
using the scale slider.
Scale slider
Changing the CO2, Respiration Rate and Apnea Alarm Limits
CAUTION
limit. Depending on the setting, the alarm off mark might not be
displayed on the screen. Be careful when you set the alarm limit to
OFF.
You can set the upper and lower CO2, respiration rate and apnea alarm limits on
the RESP/CO2 window. You can set all alarms, including the upper and lower
CO2, respiration rate and apnea alarm limits, on the ALARM LIMITS window
(See the Operator’s Manual or Section 5 of the User’s Guide).
Setting Range
CO2(E) upper limit: 2 to 99 mmHg in 1 mmHg steps (0.2 to 13.0 kPa in
0.1 kPa steps), OFF (default setting: OFF)
CO2(E) lower limit: OFF, 1 to 98 mmHg in 1 mmHg steps (0.1 to 12.9
kPa in 0.1 kPa steps) (default setting: OFF)
CO2(I) upper limit*: 1 to 99 mmHg in 1 mmHg steps (0.1 to 13.0 kPa
in 0.1 kPa steps), OFF (default setting: ADULT,
NEONATE: OFF, CHILD: 3 mmHg (0.4 kPa))
Respiration rate upper limit: 2 to 150 counts/min in 2 counts/min steps, OFF
Respiration rate lower limit: OFF, 0 to 148 counts/min in 2 counts/min steps
Apnea upper limit: 5 to 40 s in 5 s steps, OFF (default setting: 20)
* CO2(I) alarm upper limit can be set when using a TG-950P or TG-970P CO2
sensor kit.

11. CO2 MONITORING
1. Display the RESP/CO2 window.

Touch Menu key → RESP/CO2 key.
2. Touch the CO2 (E) key to change the end tidal CO2 alarm setting.
Touch the CO2(I) key to change the inspired CO2 alarm setting. This setting
is only available when CO2 is monitored with TG-950P or TG-970P CO2
sensor kit.
Touch the RR key to change the respiration rate alarm setting.
Touch the APNEA key to change the apnea alarm setting.

Selected parameter
Upper limit slider
Upper limit
11
Current value of the

selected parameter Lower limit slider Setting bar Lower limit
Setting the Inspiration Composition

When N2O is mixed in the inspiration or when a high concentration of oxygen
is inspired, sensitivity of CO2 absorbing infrared ray is affected, and as a result
measurements cannot be performed correctly. When using anesthetic gas or
a respirator, set the inspiration composition. The monitor corrects the CO2
concentration automatically according to the setting.

11. CO2 MONITORING
CAUTION CAUTION
When monitoring CO2, make sure that the When using an anesthetic instrument with a
gas composition is entered. Otherwise the volatile anesthetic agent, the CO2 measurement
measurement result may be inaccurate. may be inaccurate.
1. Display the CO2 GAS COMP window.

Touch Menu key → RESP/CO2 key → CO2 GAS COMP key.
2. Set the composition of the inspired gas.

• When not using gas that influences measurement
→ Select AIR.
• When using a respirator or high concentration of oxygen
→ Select O2+AIR and set the O2 gas ratio on the O2 setting bar.
• When using anesthetic gas
→ Select O2+N2O and set the gas ratio on the O2 and N2 setting bar.

11. CO2 MONITORING
Changing the CO2 Waveform Sweep Speed

The CO2 waveform sweep speed on the screen can be selected. This setting can
also be changed on the DISPLAY/SOUND window.
1. Display the RESP/CO2 SWEEP SPEED window.

Touch Menu key → RESP/CO2 key → RESP/CO2 SWEEP SPEED key.
2. Select the sweep speed.

11
Changing Duration for Holding ETCO2 Maximum Value

Select the time for holding the maximum ETCO2 value. This setting is effective
only when using the TG-950P* or TG-970P CO2 sensor kit. When using the TG-
900P or TG-920P CO2 sensor kit, this item is automatically set to OFF.
* This function is not available in some versions.
Settings
OFF: The maximum value is updated each breath
10 sec: The maximum value for latest 10 seconds (default setting)
20 sec: The maximum value for latest 20 seconds

11. CO2 MONITORING
OFF
ETCO2 value 60 46
[mmHg] 40 40
30 35 31
20
10 10
Time
10 sec
ETCO2 value 60
46
[mmHg] 40
40 35
30
31
20
10 10 10
Time
10 s
10 s
10 s
10 s
10 s
10 s
20 sec
ETCO2 value
60
[mmHg] 46
40 40 35
30
31
20
10 10 10
Time
20 s
20 s
20 s
20 s
20 s
20 s
1. Display the MAX HOLD window.

Touch Menu key → RESP/CO2 key → MAX HOLD key.
2. Select the time to measure the CO2 value.

11. CO2 MONITORING
Inspection of Measuring Accuracy
Daily Inspection of Measuring Accuracy

Perform daily accuracy inspection using your own respiration.
Put the larger end of the airway adapter (side for connecting to the patient’s
mask and tracheal tube) into your mouth and after stabilizing breathing, breathe
in the same way as in the resting state at a rate of 5 seconds per breath (12
breaths/min). Breathing too quickly or taking deep breaths will disable standard
measurements.
The standard ETCO2 concentration is 40 mmHg (5.3 kPa). Check that the CO2
gas concentration display is from 35 to 45 mmHg (4.7 to 6.0 kPa).
Inspection of Measuring Accuracy (Precise Method)
CAUTION 11
Follow the CAUTION label on the CO2 gas cylinder.
Check the measurement accuracy every half year and whenever you suspect
the monitor is not reading correctly. This procedure does not calibrate the CO2
sensor. It only checks the measurement accuracy. If the measurement accuracy is
not appropriate, contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
For details, refer to the Service Manual.

Section 12 SpO2 Monitoring
General............................................................................................................................................................... 12.2
Preparing for SpO2 Monitoring............................................................................................................................ 12.4
Selecting a Probe..................................................................................................................................... 12.4
Nihon Kohden Reusable Probes.................................................................................................... 12.4
Nihon Kohden Disposable Probes................................................................................................. 12.5
Connecting Cables and Attaching the Probes.......................................................................................... 12.6
Connecting Cable to the Monitor.................................................................................................... 12.6
Attaching the Probe to the Patient................................................................................................. 12.6
Monitoring SpO2 ................................................................................................................................................ 12.7
SpO2 Information on the Home Screen.................................................................................................... 12.7
Changing SpO2 Settings..................................................................................................................................... 12.8
Changing the Sensitivity........................................................................................................................... 12.8
Changing the SpO2 and Pulse Rate Alarm Limits.................................................................................... 12.9
Changing the Sync Sound Source......................................................................................................... 12.11
12
Selecting Sync Sound Pitch................................................................................................................... 12.13
Selecting the Response Mode............................................................................................................... 12.14
Selecting SpO2 Sensitivity Mode............................................................................................................ 12.15
Displaying Pulse Rate and Pulse-amplitude Index (PI) on the Home Screen........................................ 12.16
Displaying the SQI Bar Graph on the Home Screen.............................................................................. 12.16

12. SpO2 MONITORING
General
To monitor SpO2, attach a probe to the patient and connect it to the SpO2 socket
on the left side panel of the monitor.
SQI bar graph

SQI bar graph The SQI bar graph shows the pulse waveform signal quality for SpO2
measurement.
SQI Bar Graph Signal Quality
4 green bars The signal quality is high.
3 green bars There may be some artifact.
The signal quality is reduced due to large
2 yellow bars* artifact. If this state continues for a long time,
check the patient and probe attachment.
The signal quality is very low. Check the
1 red bar*
patient and probe attachment.
0 bars The signal cannot be measured.
* If the SQI bar graph shows 1 or 2 bars, the “LOW QUALITY SIGNAL” message
appears in the screen.
WARNING WARNING
SpO2 measurement may be incorrect in the When not monitoring SpO2, disconnect the SpO2
following cases. connection cord from the SpO2 socket. Otherwise,
• When the patient’s carboxyhemoglobin or noise from the probe sensor may interfere and
methemoglobin increases abnormally. incorrect data is displayed on the screen.
• When dye is injected in the blood.
• When using an electrosurgical unit.
• During CPR.
• When measuring at a site with venous pulse.
• When there is body movement.
• When the pulse wave is small (insufficient
peripheral circulation).

12. SpO2 MONITORING
WARNING WARNING
Check the circulation condition by observing the • When using the TL-201T finger probe, do
skin color at the measurement site and pulse not fasten the probe and cable to the finger
waveform. Change the measurement site every 8 by wrapping with tape. This may cause burn,
hours for disposable probes and every 4 hours for congestion or pressure necrosis from poor
reusable probes (every 8 hours for TL-630T3/ blood circulation.
TL-631T3 probe). The skin temperature may • When using probes other than the TL-201T
increase at the attached site by 2 or 3°C (4 or finger probe, to avoid poor circulation, do
5°F) and cause a burn or pressure necrosis. not wrap the tape too tight. Check the blood
When using the probe on the following patients, circulation condition by observing the skin
take extreme care and change the measurement color and congestion at the skin peripheral to
site more frequently according to symptoms and the probe attachment site. Even for short-term
degree. monitoring, there may be burn or pressure
• Patient with a fever necrosis from poor blood circulation, especially
• Patient with insufficient peripheral circulation on neonates or low birth weight infants whose
• Neonate or low birth weight infant with delicate skin is delicate. Accurate measurement cannot
skin be performed on a site with poor peripheral
circulation.
WARNING
When monitoring SpO2 of a patient who is
12
receiving photodynamic therapy, the light from
the finger probe sensor may cause a burn.
Photodynamic therapy uses a photosensitizing
agent that has a side effect of photosensitivity.
The SpO2 probe manufactured by Nihon Kohden have two

wavelengths with peaks in the range of 650 and 950 nm. The
maximum light intensity is less than 5.5 mW/sr.
CAUTION CAUTION
Turn off the power of mobile phones, small wireless If the attachment site is dirty with blood or bodily
devices and other devices which produce strong fluids, clean the attachment site before attaching
electromagnetic interference around a patient (except the probe. If there is nail polish on the attachment
for devices allowed by the hospital administrator). site, remove the polish. Otherwise, the amount of
Radio waves from devices such as mobile phones or transmitted light decreases, and measured value
small wireless devices may be mistaken as pulse may be incorrect or measurement cannot be
waves and the displayed data may be incorrect. performed.
CAUTION CAUTION
Normal external light does not affect monitoring While a patient is on medication which causes
but strong light such as a surgical light or sunlight vasodilation, the pulse waveform may change
may affect monitoring. If affected, cover the and in rare cases the SpO2 value might not be
measuring site with a blanket. displayed.
NOTE
Do not attach the probe to the same limb that is used for NIBP
measurement. The SpO2 measurement may be incorrect.
12. SpO2 MONITORING
Preparing for SpO2 Monitoring
1. Select the probe.
2. Connect the probe to the SpO2 connection cord and connect the SpO2
connection cord to the SpO2 socket on the monitor.
3. Attach the probe to the patient.
4. Monitoring starts. Set necessary settings.
Selecting a Probe
Select the appropriate probe according to the purpose.
CAUTION CAUTION
Only use the specified probes. Otherwise, SpO2 Do not use a probe which is deteriorated by
cannot be monitored. aging. Accurate measurement cannot be
performed.
Nihon Kohden Reusable Probes
SpO2 Connection Cord/

Model Patient (Weight) Attachment Site
SpO2 Adapter
Finger Probe TL-201T Adults, children Finger SpO2 Connection Cord
(Weight more than 20 kg) JL-900P
Multi-site Probe TL-220T Adults, infants Finger or toe

(Weight 3 kg or more)
Neonates Instep and sole

(Weight 3 kg or less)
Finger Probe TL-630T3/TL-631T3 Adults, children Finger or toe

(TL-630T3: Weight more
than 50 kg
TL-631T3: Weight more
than 20 kg)

12. SpO2 MONITORING
Nihon Kohden Disposable Probes
CAUTION
The disposable probe is not sterilized. Use the disposable probe only
for a single patient. Never reuse the disposable probe for another
patient because it causes cross infection.

Model Patient (Weight) Attachment Site
SpO2 Adapter
TL-260T Adults, children Finger or toe SpO2 Connection Cord

(Weight less than 3 kg)
TL-051S/TL-052S Adults Finger

(Weight more than 50 kg)

(Weight less than 3 kg) 12
Cable length TL-051S: 80 cm

TL-052S: 160 cm
TL-061S/TL-062S Adults, children Finger
(Weight from 15 to 50 kg)
Children, infants Toe

Cable length TL-061S: 80 cm

TL-062S: 160 cm

12. SpO2 MONITORING

Model Patient Attachment Site
SpO2 Adapter
TL-271T (80 cm)/TL-271T3 (160 cm) Adult Finger or toe SpO2 Connection Cord
TL-272T (80 cm)/TL-272T3 (160 cm) Child

TL-273T (80 cm)/TL-273T3 (160 cm) Neonate Instep and sole

(Weight less than 3 kg)
Adult Finger or toe

(Weight more than 40 kg)
TL-274T (80 cm)/TL-274T3 (160 cm) Infant

Connecting Cables and Attaching the Probes

SpO2 connection cord Connecting Cable to the Monitor
1. Open the stopper of the SpO2 connection cord and connect the probe
connector firmly.
2. Close the stopper.
Stopper
Probe connector 3. Connect the SpO2 connection cord to the SpO2 socket on the monitor.
When connecting the TL-201T finger probe
Attaching the Probe to the Patient

Refer to the probe manual.
12. SpO2 MONITORING
Monitoring SpO2
When the preparation is done properly, the SpO2 value and pulse waveform
appear on the screen.
CAUTION CAUTION
When the probe is attached on an appropriate When a message indicates a faulty probe or
site with sufficient circulation and an error faulty SpO2 connection cord, stop monitoring and
message about probe attachment repeatedly replace the probe or SpO2 connection cord with a
appears, the probe may be deteriorated. Replace new one.
it with a new one.
NOTE
In order to maintain sufficient blood circulation, keep the measurement
site warm by covering with a blanket or something similar. Warming the
site is effective, especially for a patient with a small pulse amplitude.
SpO2 Information on the Home Screen 12

Pulse rate (appears when sync sound
source is set to SpO2)
Pulse sync mark

(appears in SpO2 color
synchronizing with pulse
when sync sound source
is set to SpO2)
SpO2
sensitivity
SpO2 pulse
SpO2 waveform

12. SpO2 MONITORING
Changing SpO2 Settings
Change settings on the SpO2 window. The following settings can be changed for
SpO2 monitoring.
• Pulse waveform sensitivity
• SpO2 and pulse rate alarm limits
• Sync source
• Sync sound pitch
• Response mode
• Sensitivity mode
• Display SQI bar graph in SpO2 numeric data area
The SpO2 data and SpO2 pulse rate display color can be set on the SYSTEM
SETUP window. Refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
The SpO2 pulse waveform sweep speed is the speed set for <SWEEP SPEED>
on the DISPLAY/SOUND window.
Changing the Sensitivity

The sensitivity determines the size of the pulse waveform on both the screen and
recording paper.
The sensitivity can be set manually or automatically. When you select auto
sensitivity, the sensitivity is automatically determined according to the present
SpO2 pulse waveform. When sensitivity is set automatically, “AUTO” appears
beside the sensitivity on the screen.
NOTE
The pulse wave amplitude varies according to the ratio of the pulsation
component to the entire transmitted IR signal. When the pulsation
component ratio is 1%, the pulse wave amplitude is about 10 mm at ×1
sensitivity on the display.

12. SpO2 MONITORING
1. Display the SpO2 window.

Touch Menu key → SpO2 key.
2. Touch the SENSITIVITY key. The SENSITIVITY window opens.
3. Select the sensitivity from ×1/8, ×1/4, ×1/2, ×1, ×2, ×4, ×8 or AUTO in the
<SENSITIVITY> box.
12
Changing the SpO2 and Pulse Rate Alarm Limits
CAUTION

12. SpO2 MONITORING
You can set the upper and lower SpO2 and heart rate/pulse rate alarm limits on
the SpO2 window. You can set all alarms, including the upper and lower SpO2
and heart rate/pulse rate alarm limits, on the ALARM LIMITS window (See the
Operator’s Manual or Section 5 of the User’s Guide). The heart rate/pulse rate
alarm limits can also be changed on the ECG window.
Setting Range
SpO2 upper limit: 51 to 100%SpO2 in 1%SpO2 steps, OFF
(default setting: ADULT, CHILD-OFF, NEONATE-95)
SpO2 lower limit: OFF, 50 to 99%SpO2 in 1%SpO2 steps
(default setting: ADULT, CHILD-90, NEONATE-85)
HR/PR upper limit: When <SYNC SOURCE> is set to ECG:
NEONATE-200)
HR/PR lower limit: When <SYNC SOURCE> is set to ECG:
(default setting: ADULT-50, CHILD-75, NEONATE-100)

2. Touch the SpO2 key to change the SpO2 alarm setting.

Touch the HR/PR key to change the heart rate/pulse rate alarm setting.

12. SpO2 MONITORING
Selected parameter
Upper limit slider
Upper limit
Lower limit slider
Lower limit
Current value of the Setting bar

selected parameter
If the upper limit is set to a value above the maximum, the upper limit alarm 12

as the sync source. The sync source can also be changed on the ECG and PRESS
windows.
select ECG.
NOTE
PRESS.
when the alarm is silenced by pressing the Silence Alarms key. The
balance.
• PRESS is only available for PVM-2703.

12. SpO2 MONITORING
PR.
sound.
When SpO2 is selected, the pulse rate can be displayed to the left of the heart rate
on the screen and the sync mark synchronizes with the pulse.

2. Touch the SYNC SOURCE key. The SYNC SOURCE window opens.
3. Select the sync source in the <SYNC SOURCE> box.

ECG: QRS
PRESS: Pulse wave of the highest priority arterial blood pressure
SpO2: SpO2 pulse

12. SpO2 MONITORING
Selecting Sync Sound Pitch

The sync sound can be variable pitch or fixed pitch pips. The fixed pitch is high
pitch as the default, but medium or low pitch can also be set on the SYSTEM
SETUP window (see Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide). When you select
variable pitch, the pitch of the sync sound changes according to SpO2 value so
that you can recognize the change on the patient from the pitch of the sync sound
without looking at the monitor.
When the sync sound source is set to SpO2 and the SpO2 value is below
81%SpO2, the low pitch is automatically selected.
When the sync sound source is set to SpO2 and the “CHECK PROBE” or
“DETECTING PULSE” message is displayed on the screen, the sync sound
stops.
When the sync sound source is set to ECG, the sync pitch is set to SpO2 and the
SpO2 cannot be displayed on the screen, the low pitch is automatically selected.

12
2. Touch the SYNC PITCH key. The SYNC PITCH window opens.
3. Select the sync sound pitch.

FIXED: The pitch is fixed to the pitch selected on the SYSTEM SETUP
window.
PRESS*: The pitch is high when the BP value is above 120 mmHg. The
pitch is low when the BP value is below 20 mmHg. The pitch
changes from high to low in 20 steps for each 5 mmHg change
between 120 and 20 mmHg BP value.
SpO2: The pitch changes with each 1% change in SpO2. You can select
the SpO2 range (81 to 100% or 40 to 100%) on the SYSTEM
* PRESS is only available for PVM-2703.

12. SpO2 MONITORING
Selecting the Response Mode

There are three response modes. Each response mode uses a different time
to enable accurate measurement according to patient conditions. When
measurement condition is unstable, response becomes slower in all modes. For
details on the response time, refer to “Specifications - SpO2” in the Operator’s
Manual.
NOTE
When measurement condition is unstable due to strenuous movement of
the patient, etc., response may become slower in all modes.

2. Touch the RESPONSE key. The RESPONSE window opens.

12. SpO2 MONITORING
3. Select the mode.
Selecting SpO2 Sensitivity Mode

Select the sensitivity mode for SpO2 monitoring.
12
1. Display the SENSITIVITY MODE window.
Touch Menu key → SpO2 key → SENSITIVITY MODE key.
2. Select the sensitivity mode.

Select “MAX” when it is difficult to detect pulse, such as when monitoring
a patient with peripheral circulation insufficiency or when an IABP is used.
When “MAX” is selected, “SENS MAX” appears in the SpO2 value area on
the home screen.
NOTE
When “MAX” is selected, a waveform and numeric value for SpO2 may
appear even when the probe is detached from the patient. When not
monitoring SpO2, disconnect the SpO2 connection cord from the unit.

12. SpO2 MONITORING
Displaying Pulse Rate and Pulse-amplitude Index (PI) on the Home Screen
The pulse rate and pulse-amplitude index (PI) display in SpO2 area on the
home screen can be set to on or off on the SpO2 page - PARAMETERS
window - SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to “SpO2 Page” in Section 2 of the
PI (Pulse-amplitude Index)
The Pulse-amplitude Index indicates the percentage of pulsatile signal in the
entire transmitted IR signal. This index may be affected by an artifact.
Displaying the SQI Bar Graph on the Home Screen

The SQI bar graph in SpO2 area on the home screen can be set to on or off on
the SpO2 page - PARAMETERS window - SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to
“SpO2 Page” in Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.

Section 13 NIBP Monitoring
General............................................................................................................................................................... 13.2
Oscillometric method................................................................................................................................ 13.2
Measurement Method (Deflation Mode and Inflation Mode).................................................................... 13.3
Deflation Method............................................................................................................................ 13.3
Inflation Method.............................................................................................................................. 13.3
Precautions on the Inflation Method............................................................................................... 13.3
Preparing for NIBP Measurement...................................................................................................................... 13.5
Selecting the Cuff..................................................................................................................................... 13.5
Types of Cuffs........................................................................................................................................... 13.7
Reusable Cuffs............................................................................................................................... 13.7
Disposable Cuffs............................................................................................................................ 13.8
Connecting Cables and Attaching the Cuff to the Patient........................................................................ 13.9
Connecting Air Hose and Cuff to the Monitor................................................................................. 13.9
Attaching the Cuff to the Patient.................................................................................................. 13.10
Measuring and Monitoring NIBP...................................................................................................................... 13.12
Measurement Mode and Interval............................................................................................................ 13.12 13
Manual Measurement.................................................................................................................. 13.12
Auto Measurement....................................................................................................................... 13.13
Auto Measurement with PWTT.................................................................................................... 13.14
Auto Measurement on Vital Sign Alarm....................................................................................... 13.14
STAT Measurement...................................................................................................................... 13.14
SIM Mode Measurement.............................................................................................................. 13.15
NIBP Information on the Home Screen.................................................................................................. 13.15
Dimming and Hiding the NIBP Data............................................................................................. 13.16
Displaying Pulse Rate from NIBP................................................................................................ 13.16
Performing NIBP Measurement.............................................................................................................. 13.16
Manual Measurement.................................................................................................................. 13.16
Auto Measurement....................................................................................................................... 13.18
Auto Measurement with PWTT Trigger........................................................................................ 13.20
Auto Measurement on Vital Sign Alarm....................................................................................... 13.22
STAT Measurement...................................................................................................................... 13.23
SIM Mode Measurement.............................................................................................................. 13.25
Changing NIBP Settings................................................................................................................................... 13.27
Selecting the Initial Cuff Inflation Pressure............................................................................................. 13.27
Selecting the Initial Cuff Inflation Pressure Type.......................................................................... 13.27
Setting the Cuff Inflation Pressure............................................................................................... 13.28
Turning the Inflation Mode On................................................................................................................ 13.30
Changing the NIBP Alarm Limits............................................................................................................ 13.31
Turning PWTT Trigger NIBP Measurement On/Off................................................................................ 13.32
Using Venous Puncture Mode.......................................................................................................................... 13.34
The NIBP measurement is suitable for use in the presence of electrosurgery and during the
discharge of a cardiac defibrillator. This monitor complies with IEC 60601-2-30: 1999.
13. NIBP MONITORING
General
Non-invasive blood pressure is measured by the oscillometric method in which

the cuff is wrapped on the patient arm (or thigh) and connected to the NIBP
socket on the monitor.
Oscillometric method
The NIBP is measured from the change in amplitude pattern of pulsatile
oscillation in cuff pressure as the cuff pressure is reduced from above systolic
to below diastolic pressure. The occlusive-oscillometry method uses this to
determine the systolic, diastolic, and mean arterial pressure.
The systolic pressure is the pressure at which the pulsatile oscillation suddenly
increases, and the diastolic pressure is the pressure at which the pulsatile
oscillation suddenly decreases. The mean arterial pressure is the point where
maximum pulsatile oscillation occurs.
This monitor has four NIBP measurement modes.

• Manual measurement: Measurement is performed once.
• Automatic measurement: Measurement is performed automatically at preset
time intervals. The time interval can be selected.
Automatic measurement can also be performed with
vital sign alarm occurrence or PWTT triggered.
• STAT measurement: Measurement is performed for 10 minutes
(maximum) continuously.
• SIM mode measurement: Measurement is performed in Staged Interval Mode
(SIM).
WARNING WARNING
Be careful when measuring NIBP on a patient NIBP measurement may be incorrect in the
with known bleeding disorders or coagulation. following situations.
After NIBP measurement, there may be dot • When using an ESU
hemorrhage, or circulatory disorder by thrombus • Body movement
where the cuff is attached. • Small pulse wave
• Too many arrhythmias
• Shaking from an external source
• Rapid blood pressure change
• During CPR
• Slow pulse
• Low blood pressure
• Cuff is too tight or too loose
• Cuff does not fit the arm
• Cuff is wrapped over thick clothing
• Cuff is deteriorated

13. NIBP MONITORING
Measurement Method (Deflation Mode and Inflation Mode)

When the optional QP-038P iNIBP program is installed, you can use two
measurement methods; inflation method and deflation method. At the factory
default, measurement method is set to deflation method. (INFLATE MODE is set
to OFF).
Deflation Method
In the deflation method, the cuff presses the artery by the pressure set as the
initial cuff pressure then gradually deflates. The blood pressure can be calculated
by the change of pulse wave which is observed as change of the cuff pressure
during deflation and the oscillation pattern.
Inflation Method
In the inflation method, the cuff gradually presses the artery. The blood pressure
can be calculated by the change of pulse wave which is observed as change
of the cuff pressure and the oscillation pattern. The maximum cuff pressure is
less than that of the deflation method and the time duration is also less than the
deflation method.
Precautions on the Inflation Method
WARNING
When measuring NIBP in INFLATE MODE, use a cuff specified by
Nihon Kohden. If an unspecified cuff is used, correct NIBP 13
measurement might not be performed.
NOTE:
• When NIBP measurement cannot be done by inflation method, the
bedside monitor automatically switches to deflation method and
measures NIBP. This switching is temporary; the next measurement is
performed by inflation method.
• In the following cases, NIBP measurement might not be able to be
done by inflation method and measurement by deflation method
might be performed. In the following cases, set INFLATE MODE
to OFF before NIBP measurement. Depends on the degree of the
following, measurement result may be incorrect even when the NIBP
measurement is performed by deflation method.
- When there is body movement
- When the pulse wave is small (insufficient peripheral circulation)
- Too many arrhythmias
- When there is vibration
- When the pulse is too late
- When blood pressure is too low
- When pulse pressure is too low
- When a cuff for inflation method measurement is not used.
- When the cuff is wrapped too tight or too loose
- When the size of the cuff is not proper
- When the cuff is wrapped over thick cloth

13. NIBP MONITORING
• When the measurement method continuously switches to deflation

method, the cuff might be deteriorated. Noise may interfere when a
deteriorated cuff is used and NIBP cannot be measured by inflation
method. In this case, replace the deteriorated cuff with new one.
• INFLATE MODE is available only when the optional QP-038P iNIBP
program is installed.

13. NIBP MONITORING
Preparing for NIBP Measurement
1. Select the cuff.
2. Connect the cuff to the air hose and connect the air hose to the NIBP socket
on the monitor.
3. Attach the cuff to the patient.
4. Set necessary settings, such as initial cuff inflation pressure.
5. Start measurements.
Selecting the Cuff

Select the appropriate cuff according to the purpose.
The AHA (American Heart Association) recommends that the cuff width be 40%
of the circumference of the upper arm. Refer to the following graph and select
the cuff which suits the patient’s arm.
13
NOTE
• If the range of arm circumference appropriate for the cuff is prescribed,
use within that range.
• To obtain accurate measured values, select a wide cuff which can be
attached to the upper arm or the thigh (calf in the case of neonates).
Measuring with a very narrow cuff may result in measured values
higher than the actual values.

13. NIBP MONITORING
Cuff Width and Arm Circumference

Reusable cuffs
Cuff Width and Arm Circumference Circumference range
applicable to AHA standards
Cuff width (cm)

20
Adults for thigh
15 Adults large
Adults standard
10 Children standard
Children small
5 Infants
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Arm circumference (cm)
Disposable cuffs
Cuff Width and Arm Circumference Circumference range
applicable to AHA standards
Cuff width (cm)

Adults for thigh
20 (YP-817P)
Adults extra large (YP-816P)
Adults large (YP-815P)
15 Adults medium large (YP-814P)

Adults standard (YP-813P)
10 Adults small (YP-812P)

Children (YP-811P)
Infants (YP-810P)
5 Neonates (YP-824P)
Neonates (YP-823P)
Neonates (YP-822P)
Neonates (YP-821P)
Neonates (YP-820P)
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Arm circumference (cm)

13. NIBP MONITORING
Types of Cuffs
WARNING
When measuring NIBP by inflation method, use the specified cuff
which can be used for inflation method measurement. Otherwise,
correct measurement result might not be obtained.
Reusable Cuffs
When using the following reusable cuffs, a YN-900P (1.5 m) or YN-901P
(3.5 m) air hose is required. A YN-990P (1.5 m) extension hose is also available.
YN-900P Air hose YN-990P Extension hose
Cuff Width (cm) Applicable Circumference (cm) Shape

YP-960T
For infants 5 8 to 13
YP-710T
Small YP-961T 12 to 18
7 13
YP-711T 13 to 18
For children
YP-702T
Standard 15 to 23
YP-962T 10 Width
Small YP-712T* 18 to 23
YP-703T
21 to 30
Standard YP-963T 13
For adults
YP-713T* 23 to 33
YP-964T 15 26 to 36
Large
YP-714T* 16 33 to 45
YP-965T 33 to 45 Width
For thigh 19
YP-715T* 45 to 55
* Can be used for inflation method measurement. Inflation method is available only when the optional QP-038P iNIBP
CAUTION
The YP-950T/951T/952T/953T/954T/955T reusable cuffs contain
natural rubber latex which may cause allergic reactions.
Natural rubber may cause allergic reaction with symptoms such as
itching, redness, urticaria, swelling, fever, dyspnea, symptoms similar
to asthma, reduced blood pressure and shock. If the patient shows
any of the above symptoms, immediately stop using the cuff and
perform appropriate medical treatment.

13. NIBP MONITORING
Disposable Cuffs
Width Applicable
Cuff Shape Air Hose
(cm) Circumference (cm)
Infants YN-900P (1.5 m)
YP-810P 6 8 to 14
(Non-sterilized) YN-901P (3.5 m)
Children
YP-811P 8 13 to 20
(Non-sterilized)
Small YP-812P*1 10 18 to 26
Standard YP-813P*1 14 26 to 35
Width
Extension hose
YN-990P (1.5 m)
Adults
(Non- Medium
YP-814P*1 15 29 to 38
sterilized) large
Large YP-815P*1 17 32 to 42
Extra
YP-816P*1 18 35 to 44
large
For thigh YP-817P 20 42 to 50
YP-820P 2 3 to 6 YN-920P (1.5 m)
YN-921P (3.5 m)
YP-821P 3 4 to 8 Width
Neonates
YP-822P 4 6 to 10
(Non-sterilized)
YP-823P 4.5 7 to 13
YP-824P 5 8 to 15
No. 11*2 3 5 to 7.5

Width
Neonates (Sterilized) No. 12*2 4 7.5 to 10.5
No. 13*2 5 8.5 to 13
*1 Can be used for inflation method measurement. Inflation method is available only when the optional QP-038P iNIBP
* These parts have not been checked for compliance with the MDD (Medical Device Directive). For EC member
2
countries, Nihon Kohden recommends the use of parts that comply with MDD.

13. NIBP MONITORING
Connecting Cables and Attaching the Cuff to the Patient

Connecting Air Hose and Cuff to the Monitor
CAUTION
Firmly connect the air hose to the NIBP socket on the monitor until it
clicks. If not connected properly, the cuff type cannot be identified. At
the start of NIBP measurement, check if the cuff type corresponds to
the type displayed on the monitoring screen.
NOTE
Firmly connect the air hose to the cuff and the monitor. The air leakage
will cause incorrect NIBP data or no data.
The monitor automatically identifies the type of air hose (adult/child or neonate)
when the air hose is connected to the NIBP socket. The cuff inflation pressure is
automatically changed according to the identified air hose type. The air hose type
is displayed on the home screen.
NOTE
The alarm settings are not automatically changed according to the air
hose type. The alarm settings which are appropriate for the patient must
be manually set.
13
1. Connect the cuff to the air hose.
Connecting the Cuff for Adults and Children

Insert the cuff connector joint into the air hose and turn it clockwise to lock
it.
Joint
Disconnecting the Cuff for Adults and Children

To disconnect the cuff from the air hose, turn the cuff connector joint
counterclockwise to unlock it and remove it from the air hose.
Joint

13. NIBP MONITORING
Connecting the Cuff for Neonates

Insert the cuff connector into the air hose for neonate.
2. Connect the air hose to the NIBP socket on the monitor. The monitor
automatically identifies the type of the connected cuff (subject of
measurement) and displays it on the home screen.
When Connecting the YP-963P Cuff for Adults
3. Check that the home screen displays the correct cuff type.
Cuff type
Attaching the Cuff to the Patient

How to Wrap the Cuff
WARNING
Be careful when measuring NIBP on a patient
with known bleeding disorders or coagulation.
After NIBP measurement, there may be dot
hemorrhage, or circulatory disorder by thrombus
where the cuff is attached.
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not wrap the cuff on an arm or thigh which is Do not wrap the cuff too tight. It may cause poor
used for injection. NIBP measurement on an arm blood circulation and congestion. If the cuff is
or thigh which is used for injection may cause wrapped too loosely, the NIBP value may
reflux of blood and stop injection. increase.

13. NIBP MONITORING
Wrap the cuff on the patient arm or thigh by referring to the manual provided
with the cuff. When wrapping the cuff around the upper arm, observe the
following points.
• The cuff must not wrap around the elbow.

• The cuff should just wrap around the upper arm, not too tightly or too loosely.
A tightly wrapped cuff can cause discomfort to the patient and decreases the
blood pressure reading, and a loosely wrapped cuff prolongs the measurement
time and increases the blood pressure reading. If the cuff is too tight or too
loose, the instrument may automatically stop inflating and stop the measuring
procedure for patient safety.
• The air hose must not be folded.
• In principle, the cuff should be wrapped around a bare upper arm. Thick
clothing can damp the pulsatile oscillation of the cuff pressure. It is still
possible to obtain a measurement if the cuff is wrapped around thin clothing
over the upper arm.
Air hose (must not be folded)
Stretcher (bed)
13
Cuff Hose and Air Hose

Confirm that the hoses are not folded or squeezed.
CAUTION CAUTION
When too much pressure is applied to the cuff, or Only connect the air hose to the cuff and NIBP
the hose is bent or squeezed, the “NIBP SAFETY socket on the monitor. Do not connect the air
CIRCUIT RUNNING” message appears on the hose, especially the air hose for neonate, to other
screen and NIBP monitoring may be stopped. parts, such as an infusion line. It may cause
Remove the cause, wait 40 seconds, check that thrombus.
the message disappears, then measure again.
Cuff Position (Height of Cuff from Heart Level)

Heart Place the cuffed upper arm (brachium) at the same height as the patient’s heart.
If the cuff is not at the same level as the heart, the weight of the blood affects the
blood pressure reading. The pressure difference per unit height is 0.7 mmHg/cm.
The blood pressure reading decreases when the arm is higher than the heart and
The air hose can be toward increases when lower.
either the upper arm or forearm.
The best measuring condition is when the patient is lying on his/her back with
arms and legs relaxed. If the cuff position cannot be on the same level as the
heart, the displayed blood pressure reading must be mathematically adjusted.

13. NIBP MONITORING
Measuring and Monitoring NIBP
When the preparation is done properly, you can start non-invasive blood pressure
measurement and monitoring.
The monitor automatically identifies the connected cuff type and sets the cuff
inflation pressure.
WARNING CAUTION
When performing long term measurement at When too much pressure is applied to the cuff, or
intervals less than 2.5 minutes, perform the hose is bent or squeezed, the “NIBP SAFETY
measurements while observing the state of the CIRCUIT RUNNING” message appears on the
patient, blood vessels and limb to ensure screen and NIBP monitoring may be stopped.
adequate circulation. Congestion may occur at Remove the cause, wait 40 seconds, check that
the measurement site. When performing periodic the message disappears, then measure again.
measurement for a long time, periodically check
the circulation condition.
CAUTION
Before starting STAT or SIM mode measurement,
check the measurement setting (measurement
intervals).
NOTE
• When measuring patients who are conscious, help the patient to relax.
Measurement may not be accurate if the patient’s arm is tense or if the
patient talks.
• The data for measurement on the thigh tends to be higher than
measurement on the arm.
• Do not apply pressure to the cuff or air hose. NIBP might not be
measured correctly because of the noise or NIBP measurement may
stop due to the NIBP safety circuit running.
• Do not measure NIBP on a patient on whom an IABP is used. Accurate
NIBP measurement cannot be performed due to pulse waves from the
IABP mixing with the patient’s pulse waves.
Measurement Mode and Interval

There are four NIBP measurement modes: manual, auto (periodic), STAT
(continuous) and SIM. To change the STAT and SIM setting, refer to the
Manual Measurement
NIBP is measured once whenever the NIBP Start/Stop key on the screen is
touched. Manual measurement cannot be performed during the first stage of the
STAT or SIM mode measurement.

13. NIBP MONITORING
Auto Measurement
When <START TIME> on the MAIN tab - NIBP page - PARAMETERS
window is set to CLOCK.
The first NIBP measurement is performed when the NIBP Start/Stop key on the
screen is touched and auto mode on the home screen is highlighted. The second
measurement is performed when the current time (minutes) in the monitor
reaches the nearest time interval selected.
The second periodic measurement time begins from the next even clock interval.
Example: When the interval is set to 5 minutes
8:02 First measurement (start measurement)
8:05 Second measurement
8:10 Third measurement
If the measurement interval is changed during auto measurement, the next

measurement is performed at the next nearest selected interval. For example,
when the auto measurement is performed at 5 minute intervals and if the interval
is changed to 30 minutes, then the measurement will be performed as follows.
9:05 (5 minute interval measurement), 9:07 (interval changed to 30 minutes),
9:30 (30 minute interval measurement), 10:00 (30 minute interval measurement)
and so on.
NOTE
The NIBP measurement time of the NIBP TABLE window is the time the
13
measurement is completed.
When <START TIME> on the MAIN tab - NIBP page - PARAMETERS

window is set to PERIOD.
The first NIBP measurement is performed when the NIBP Start/Stop key on the
screen is touched and auto mode on the home screen is highlighted. The second
measurement is performed when the time which is set on the MEASUREMENT
INTERVAL window elapses.
Example: When the interval is set to 5 minutes

8:02 First measurement (start measurement)
8:07 Second measurement
8:12 Third measurement

measurement is performed at the next selected interval. For example, when
the auto measurement is performed at 5 minute intervals and if the interval is
changed to 30 minutes, then the measurement will be performed as follows.
9:05 (5 minute interval measurement), 9:07 (interval changed to 30 minutes),
9:37 (30 minute interval measurement), 10:07 (30 minute interval measurement)
and so on.
NOTE
The NIBP measurement time of the NIBP TABLE window is the time the
measurement is completed.

13. NIBP MONITORING
Auto Measurement with PWTT

PWTT (pulse wave transit time) is the interval between the R wave of the ECG
and the onset of the SpO2 pulse wave. The monitor can measure NIBP with
PWTT trigger by using the PWTT change with circulation dynamics change. You
can detect the NIBP change with circulation dynamics change which was over
looked before, by using PWTT trigger NIBP measurement in combination with
normal NIBP measurement.
R wave
ECG waveform
PWTT
SpO2 pulse
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not rely only on the PWTT trigger NIBP In the following cases, PWTT may trigger too
measurement to monitor blood pressure changes. many or no NIBP measurements. Check the
When it is necessary to monitor critical blood patient condition. If necessary, set the PWTT
pressure change, set the appropriate interval for trigger NIBP measurement to Off.
NIBP measurement. • Pacemaker patient
• Rapid blood pressure change with vasoreflex
due to vasoactive drugs, such as phenylephrine
and nicardipine
• Unstable pulse wave due to poor peripheral
circulation
• Patient movement
• Noise on ECG due to ESU
• SpO2 measurement on foot of a child
Auto Measurement on Vital Sign Alarm

When <NIBP MEAS ON VITAL ALARM> on the NIBP page of the
PARAMETERS window on the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to on,
measurements are performed when a vital sign alarm occurs to check the NIBP
value. Refer to “PARAMETERS Window” in Section 3 of the Administrator’s
Guide.
STAT Measurement
Measurements are performed continuously according to the measurement
program set for STAT measurement on the SYSTEM SETUP window. The
program is divided into two stages. In the first stage, NIBP is measured
continuously or at 1 minute intervals for 5 or 10 minutes. In the second stage,
13. NIBP MONITORING
NIBP is measured at a different interval (manual or 1, 2, 2.5, 5, 10, 15, 30

minutes, usually, longer interval than the first stage). Manual measurement
cannot be performed during first stage measurement. The settings on the
SYSTEM SETUP window can only be set by the administrator who has the
password to enter the page.
SIM Mode Measurement
CAUTION
For safety during lumbar anesthesia, NIBP SIM mode measurement
is recommended by medical policy in Japan and the factory default
settings are the recommended settings. When changing these initial
settings, make sure that the changed setting is appropriate for the
patient by referring to the manual of the anesthetic agent.
SIM mode program is for monitoring blood pressure during regional anesthesia,
such as lumbar block, subarachnoid block and epidual anesthesia.
Measurements are performed continuously according to the measurement

program set for SIM measurement on the SYSTEM SETUP window. The
program is divided into two stages. In the first stage, NIBP is measured at 1,
2 or 2.5 minute intervals for 5, 10 or 15 minutes. In the second stage, NIBP is
measured at a different interval (2, 2.5 or 5 minutes, usually longer interval than 13
the first stage). Manual measurement cannot be performed during first stage
measurement. The settings on the SYSTEM SETUP window can only be set by
the administrator who has the password to enter the page.
NIBP Information on the Home Screen
Cuff type
NIBP SYS/DIA (MAP)
PWTT mark
Measurement time/Cuff inflation

pressure during measurement
Measurement mode/
interval

13. NIBP MONITORING
Dimming and Hiding the NIBP Data

When the time set at <TIME UNTIL DATA IS OLD> on the SYSTEM SETUP
window elapses after the last measurement, the NIBP data on the home screen is
dimmed or hidden. Whether to dim or hide the old data can be selected at <OLD
DATA DISPLAY> on the SYSTEM SETUP window. To change the SYSTEM
SETUP settings, refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
Setting: DIM Setting: HIDE
Displaying Pulse Rate from NIBP

You can display pulse rate from NIBP by setting the <NIBP-PR DISPLAY>
on the MAIN tab - NIBP page - PARAMETERS window of the SYSTEM
SETUP window to ON. For details, refer to “NIBP Page” in Section 3 of the
Pulse rate
from NIBP
Performing NIBP Measurement

NOTE
After NIBP measurement, the next measurement cannot start until the
cuff pressure is less than 10 mmHg (2 mmHg in the Neonate mode) for
Manual Measurement
1. Touch the NIBP Interval key to open the MEASUREMENT INTERVAL
window and change the interval to “MANUAL”.

13. NIBP MONITORING
The measurement modes displayed on the MEASUREMENT

INTERVAL window are selected on the SYSTEM SETUP
window. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide.
Or,
Touch the MEASUREMENT INTERVAL key on the NIBP window to

open the MEASUREMENT INTERVAL window and change the interval to
“MANUAL”.
13
Measurement mode “MANUAL”
2. Touch the NIBP Start/Stop key to start measurement. During measurement,

the cuff inflation pressure appears.
Cuff inflation pressure
When measurement is complete, the measured data appears on the screen.
When <COMPLETION SOUND> in the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to

NK1 or NK2, a sound is generated when NIBP measurement is complete. For
details on the completion sound, refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
To stop measurement during measurement, touch the NIBP Start/Stop key. The
cuff is deflated.

13. NIBP MONITORING
Auto Measurement
WARNING
When performing long term measurement at intervals less than 2.5
minutes, perform measurements while observing the state of the
patient, blood vessels and limb to ensure adequate circulation.
Congestion may occur at the measurement site. When performing
periodic measurement for a long time, periodically check the
circulation condition.

window to select the interval.
The measurement modes displayed on the MEASUREMENT

INTERVAL window are selected on the SYSTEM SETUP
window. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide.
Or,
Touch the MEASUREMENT INTERVAL key on the NIBP window to open

the MEASUREMENT INTERVAL window and select the interval.
Measurement interval

13. NIBP MONITORING
2. Touch the NIBP Start/Stop key to start measurement. During measurement,

the cuff inflation pressure appears.
If the auto mode is not highlighted on the home screen, it means that the auto
measurement is not yet started.
When measurement is complete, the measured data appears on the screen.
Time bar indicating the interval

between measurements
When <COMPLETION SOUND> in the SYSTEM SETUP window is set

to NK1 or NK2, a sound is generated when NIBP measurement is complete.
For details on the completion sound, refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s
Guide.
3. When the interval elapses, the second measurement automatically starts.

13
To stop one measurement in auto mode, touch the NIBP Start/Stop key. The
cuff is deflated. To stop auto measurement, change the measurement mode to
“MANUAL”.
The periodic measurement can be stopped by touching the NIBP Interval key to
display the NIBP INTERVAL window and touching the OFF key on the NIBP
INTERVAL window during measurement.
To perform a manual measurement in this mode, touch the NIBP Start/Stop key
between auto measurements.

measurement is performed at the next nearest selected interval.

13. NIBP MONITORING
Auto Measurement with PWTT Trigger

PWTT is the pulse wave propagation time which is derived from ECG and SpO2.
On PWTT triggered measurement, PWTT and NIBP SYS are calibrated on each
NIBP measurement and NIBP SYS between NIBP measurements is estimated.
When the estimated NIBP SYS exceeds the alarm limit for eight seconds, NIBP
is automatically measured.
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not rely only on the PWTT trigger NIBP In the following cases, PWTT may trigger too
measurement to monitor blood pressure changes. many or no NIBP measurements. Check the
When it is necessary to monitor critical blood patient condition. If necessary, set the PWTT
pressure change, set the appropriate interval for trigger NIBP measurement to Off.
NIBP measurement. • Pacemaker patient
• Rapid blood pressure change with vasoreflex
due to vasoactive drugs, such as phenylephrine
and nicardipine
• Unstable pulse wave due to poor peripheral
circulation
• Patient movement
• Noise on ECG due to ESU
• SpO2 measurement on foot of a child
NOTE
When the air hose for neonate is connected, PWTT triggered
measurement is not available.
1. Set <PWTT TRIGGER NIBP MEAS> to on. The “ACQUIRING PWTT

DATA” message is displayed. Refer to “Changing NIBP Settings” later in
this section.
2. Set the NIBP SYS upper and lower alarm limits. Refer to “Changing the
NIBP Alarm Limits” later in this section.
3. Monitor ECG and SpO2. “ACQUIRING PWTT DATA” message is

displayed on the screen. Refer to Section 9 “ECG Monitoring” and Section
12 “SpO2 monitoring”.
13. NIBP MONITORING
When stable PWTT is detected at least one minute after the start of ECG and
SpO2 monitoring, the message disappears and appears on the
screen.
4. Measure NIBP once manually for calibration. Refer to “Manual

Measurement” in this section.
After calibration, the mark changes to and PWTT triggered

measurement is active.
13
NOTE
If the NIBP measurement is not finished normally, measure NIBP again.
When the estimated NIBP SYS exceeds the upper or lower alarm limit, the mark
changes to .
NOTE
It takes a few seconds for the mark to change after the estimated NIBP
SYS exceeds an alarm limit.
If the estimated NIBP SYS exceeds the alarm limit for eight seconds, NIBP is
measured.
If the estimated NIBP SYS exceeds an alarm limit by ±20 mmHg, NIBP is
measured again. PWTT triggered measurements are indicated with a “P” on the
NIBP TABLE window.

13. NIBP MONITORING
NOTE
• To avoid too frequent NIBP measurement, PWTT does not trigger NIBP
measurement within one minute of an NIBP measurement.
• If any of the following items are changed, PWTT changes
discontinuously and estimated NIBP SYS might not be accurate. After
changing any of these items, calibrate (measure NIBP) again.
- ELECTRODES setting on ECG window
- Attachment place of the SpO2 probe
• When using PWTT triggered NIBP measurement, set AUTO LEAD
CHANGE on the MAIN tab - ECG page - PARAMETERS window -
SYSTEM SETUP window to off. If you set this to on, PWTT changes
discontinuously and estimated NIBP SYS might not be accurate when
the lead is changed.
• In the following cases, the PWTT mark disappears and PWTT triggered
NIBP measurement is temporarily turned off. Remove the cause to
turned on the PWTT triggered measurement.
- Noise interference on ECG or SpO2 and stable PWTT cannot be
detected.
- An ECG electrode or SpO2 probe is detached and PWTT cannot be
detected.
- The ECG, SpO2 or NIBP connector is disconnected.
- Both the upper and lower NIBP SYS alarm limits are set to off.
- A neonate air hose is connected to the monitor.
Auto Measurement on Vital Sign Alarm

When <NIBP MEAS ON VITAL ALARM> is set to ON, NIBP is automatically
measured when a vital sign alarm occurs. Refer to the “NIBP Page” in Section 3
of the Administrator’s Guide.
Measured parameters are displayed with an “A” on the NIBP TABLE window.

13. NIBP MONITORING
STAT Measurement
WARNING
CAUTION
Before starting STAT or SIM mode measurement, check the
measurement setting (measurement intervals).
1. Before STAT measurement, check the measurement setting on the STAT tab
- NIBP page - PARAMETERS window - SYSTEM SETUP window.
For details, refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
13

window to change the interval to “STAT”.
The measurement modes displayed

on the MEASUREMENT INTERVAL
window are selected on the SYSTEM
SETUP window. Refer to the

13. NIBP MONITORING
Or,

“STAT”.
Measurement mode “STAT”
3. Touch the NIBP Start/Stop key to start measurement in the first stage. During
measurement, the cuff inflation pressure appears.
When measurement is complete, the measured data appears on the screen

and another measurement starts.

Guide.
Manual measurement is not available during the first stage of STAT

measurement.
4. When the first stage is completed, measurement in the second stage starts.
To stop STAT measurement in the first stage, touch the NIBP Start/Stop key. The
cuff is deflated.
To stop STAT measurement in the second stage, change the measurement mode
to “MANUAL”.
To perform a manual measurement between auto measurements in the second

stage, touch the NIBP Start/Stop key.

13. NIBP MONITORING
SIM Mode Measurement
WARNING
CAUTION
Before starting STAT or SIM mode measurement, check the
measurement setting (measurement intervals).
1. Before SIM measurement, check the measurement setting on the SIM tab -
NIBP page - PARAMETERS window - SYSTEM SETUP window.
For details, refer to the Administrator’s Guide.
13
2. Touch the NIBP Interval key to open the NIBP INTERVALS window to
change the interval to “SIM”.
The measurement modes displayed

on the MEASUREMENT INTERVAL
window are selected on the SYSTEM
SETUP window. Refer to the
Or,

13. NIBP MONITORING

“SIM”.
Measurement mode “SIM”
3. Touch the NIBP Start/Stop key to start measurement in the first stage. During
measurement, the cuff inflation pressure appears.
When measurement is complete, the measured data appears on the screen

and another measurement starts.

Guide.
Manual measurement is not available during the first stage of SIM mode
measurement.
4. When the first stage is completed, measurement in the second stage starts.
To stop SIM measurement in the first stage, touch the NIBP Start/Stop key. The
cuff is deflated.
To stop SIM measurement in the second stage, change the measurement mode to
“MANUAL”.
To perform a manual measurement between auto measurements in the second

stage, touch the NIBP Start/Stop key.

13. NIBP MONITORING
Changing NIBP Settings
Change settings on the NIBP window. The following settings can be changed for
monitoring NIBP.
• Initial cuff pressure type

• Initial cuff pressure
• Measurement mode and interval
• NIBP alarm limits
• Automatic measurement with PWTT on/off
• Venous puncture (When the Venous puncture is set to on on the SYSTEM
SETUP window.)
The following items can be set on the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to
• Measurement end sound on/off
• Interval mode for auto measurement
• Measurement interval which can be called up on the MEASUREMENT
INTERVAL window
• Measurement mode after the monitor power is off for more than 30 minutes or
the monitor is initialized
• Dim or hide the old measurement data 13
• Time after NIBP measurement for the NIBP data to be dimmed or hidden
• Measurement program for STAT and SIM modes
• Venous puncture mode on/off and cuff inflation pressure for venous puncture
• NIBP measurement on vital sign alarm occurrence on/off
• Display NIBP pulse rate on/off
• NIBP data display color
The NIBP unit (mmHg or kPa) is the same as the pressure unit. The pressure
unit is set on the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen. Refer to Section 2 of the
Selecting the Initial Cuff Inflation Pressure

Selecting the Initial Cuff Inflation Pressure Type
When the air hose for adult/child is connected to the NIBP socket, select the
initial cuff inflation pressure type. When the air hose for neonate is connected,
the initial cuff inflation pressure type is automatically set for neonate.
1. Display the NIBP window.

Touch Menu key → NIBP key.

13. NIBP MONITORING
2. Touch the INITIAL CUFF PRESSURE TYPE key. The INITIAL CUFF
PRESSURE TYPE window opens.
3. Select the patient type.
Setting the Cuff Inflation Pressure

Select the cuff inflation pressure for the first measurement. After the first
measurement, the cuff inflation pressure is the systolic value of the previous
measurement plus 30 mmHg.
To change the initial cuff inflation pressure for neonate, the air hose for neonate
must be connected to the NIBP socket on the monitor.
Patient Setting Range

Default Setting
Type (5 mmHg/step, 1 kPa/step)
ADULT 100 to 280 mmHg, 13.0 to 37.0 kPa 180 mmHg, 24.0 kPa
CHILD 100 to 280 mmHg, 13.0 to 37.0 kPa 140 mmHg, 19.0 kPa
NEONATE 70 to 145 mmHg, 9.0 to 19.0 kPa 100 mmHg, 13.0 kPa

13. NIBP MONITORING

2. Select the patient type on the INITIAL CUFF PRESSURE TYPE window.
Refer to the previous procedure.
3. Touch the INITIAL CUFF PRESSURE key. The INITIAL CUFF

PRESSURE window opens.
Slider
13
Patient type
Cuff inflation pressure
Setting bar
4. Touch and drag the slider to the desired level on the setting bar. Use the

13. NIBP MONITORING
Turning the Inflation Mode On

You can select whether to perform NIBP measurement in inflation method.
NOTE
Inflation method is available only when the optional QP-038P iNIBP

2. Touch the INFLATE MODE key. The INFLATE MODE window opens.
3. Touch the ON or OFF key to turn the inflation mode on or off.

13. NIBP MONITORING
Changing the NIBP Alarm Limits
CAUTION
You can set the upper and lower systolic, diastolic and MAP NIBP alarm limits
on the NIBP window. You can set all alarms, including the upper and lower NIBP
alarm limits, on the ALARM LIMITS window (See the Operator’s Manual or
Section 5 of the User’s Guide).
Setting Range
Upper limit: 15 to 260 mmHg in 5 mmHg steps (1.5 to 35.0 kPa in 0.5 kPa
steps), OFF (default setting: Systolic: ADULT-180 mmHg (24.0
kPa), CHILD-140 mmHg (18.5 kPa), NEONATE-100 mmHg
(13.5 kPa), Diastolic: OFF, MAP: OFF)
Lower limit: OFF, 10 to 255 in 5 mmHg steps (1.0 to 34.5 kPa in 0.5 kPa
steps) (default setting: Systolic: ADULT-80 mmHg (10.5 kPa),
CHILD-65 mmHg (8.5 kPa), NEONATE-50 mmHg (6.5 kPa),
Diastolic: OFF, MAP: OFF)

13
2. Touch the SYS key to change the systolic alarm setting.

Touch the DIA key to change the diastolic alarm setting.
Touch the MAP key to change the mean alarm setting.

13. NIBP MONITORING
Selected parameter
Upper limit
Upper limit slider
Lower limit
Lower limit slider Setting bar
Turning PWTT Trigger NIBP Measurement On/Off

You can select PWTT trigger NIBP measurement on or off.


13. NIBP MONITORING
2. Touch the PWTT TRIGGER NIBP MEAS key. The PWTT TRIGGER NIBP
MEAS window opens.
3. Touch the ON or OFF to turn auto measurement with PWTT on or off.
13

13. NIBP MONITORING
Using Venous Puncture Mode
In venous puncture mode, the cuff is inflated to a preset target pressure to

constrict the flow of venous blood and distend the vein for venous puncture.
The cuff automatically deflates 2 minutes after inflation in ADULT/CHILD mode

or 70 seconds after inflation in NEONATE mode. The cuff can also be deflated
by the operator at any time.
To use venous puncture mode, venous puncture mode must be set to ON and
the target cuff pressure must be set on the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to
CAUTION
Do not perform a venous puncture on the same arm where NIBP is
measured. This may cause an infusion backflow or internal
hemorrhage at the puncture.
NOTE
Venous puncture mode is available in the following modes:
• Manual measurement mode
• Auto (periodic) measurement mode (not available during measurement
and not available when waiting for next measurement)
• STAT (continuous) measurement mode (not available during
measurement)
• SIM measurement mode (Not available during measurement and not
available when waiting for next measurement)


13. NIBP MONITORING
2. Touch the VENOUS PUNCTURE key. The VENOUS PUNCTURE window

opens.
3. Touch the START key on the VENOUS PUNCTURE window. The cuff
starts inflating and the remaining time until cuff deflation is shown in the
<REMAINING TIME> box.
The cuff inflation can be stopped at any time by touching the STOP key on
the VENOUS PUNCTURE window or by displaying another window.
4. When using the venous puncture mode is finished, touch the Home key to
return to the home screen. 13

Section 14 IBP Monitoring
General............................................................................................................................................................... 14.2
Preparing for Blood Pressure Monitoring........................................................................................................... 14.2
Selecting the Blood Pressure Measuring Device..................................................................................... 14.2
Blood Pressure Transducers.......................................................................................................... 14.3
IBP Connection Cords.................................................................................................................... 14.4
JP-940P IBP Connection Box........................................................................................................ 14.4
Installing the Blood Pressure Measuring Device...................................................................................... 14.5
Connecting Cables to the Monitor.................................................................................................. 14.5
Assembling the Transducer............................................................................................................ 14.6
Adjusting Zero Balance............................................................................................................................ 14.8
Adjusting Zero Balance.................................................................................................................. 14.8
Memorizing the Zero Balance Values............................................................................................. 14.9
Monitoring IBP.................................................................................................................................................. 14.10
IBP Information on the Home Screen..................................................................................................... 14.10
Changing IBP Settings..................................................................................................................................... 14.11
Changing the IBP and Pulse Rate Alarm Limits..................................................................................... 14.11
Changing the Scale................................................................................................................................ 14.13
Changing the Sync Sound Source......................................................................................................... 14.14 14
Selecting Sync Sound Pitch................................................................................................................... 14.15
Selecting the Data Display Mode on the Home Screen......................................................................... 14.17
Changing the Label................................................................................................................................ 14.18
Types of Labels............................................................................................................................ 14.18
Changing the Labels.................................................................................................................... 14.19
Displaying PPV or SPV on the Home Screen........................................................................................ 14.20
Selecting PPV or SPV Display on the Home Screen................................................................... 14.20
NOTE
IBP monitoring is only available for PVM-2703.

14. IBP MONITORING
General
Invasive blood pressure and intracranial pressure (ICP) are measured and
monitored by connecting the blood pressure measuring device to the units.
Preparing for Blood Pressure Monitoring
1. Select the blood pressure measuring device.
2. Install the blood pressure measuring device, connect the blood pressure
transducer to the IBP connection cord, and connect the IBP connection cord
to the PRESS/CO2 socket on the monitor. For details, refer to the instruction
manual provided with the blood pressure transducer and measuring kit.
3. Insert the catheter into the patient.
4. Perform zero balance adjustment.
5. Change necessary settings.
6. Start measurement (Start monitoring).

After zero balance adjustment, you can start IBP measurement and
monitoring.
Selecting the Blood Pressure Measuring Device

Select the appropriate blood pressure measuring device according to the purpose.
WARNING
All parts, except for transducers, must be non
conductive. Otherwise, the discharged energy
may cause electrical shock to the operator during
defibrillation.
CAUTION CAUTION
Check that there are no scratches on the catheter Do not reuse disposable parts and accessories.
balloon before use.

14. IBP MONITORING
Blood Pressure Transducers

* These parts have not been checked for compliance with the MDD (Medical
Device Directive). For EC member countries, Nihon Kohden recommends the
use of parts that comply with MDD.
Becton Dickinson Reusable Blood Pressure Transducers
Other Fixing
IBP Measuring Kit
Pressure Parts Device
Connection Dome
Transducer Transducer
Cord Monitoring Kit Pressure Tubing Criti Flo
Holder
TA-1011*
TA-1011D* ZY-101U*
P23XL-1 JP-900P SCK-520* PT-06
TA-1015T + adapter 2
PT-12
TA-1010ND
PT-24 TA-4004
TA-1017M
PT-36 TA-4005*
TA-1019M G-TBG2
SCK-512* PT-48
P10EZ-1 JP-900P TA-1017 G-TMM
SCK-560 PT-60
TA-1018* G-UMM
TA-1019*
Becton Dickinson Disposable Blood Pressure Transducers (DX Series)
Fixing
Monitoring Kit DX Series IBP Connection Cord Other Parts
Device
DX-100*
DX-200*
DX-300* 14
DX-312* —
G-TBG2
DX-360* JP-900P G-TMM
DX-360R* G-UMM
DX-360TT*
Safe needle TA-BPN
DX-360SD*
+ arterial blood sampler QS-90
SCKD-5005* —
Edwards Lifesciences (Baxter) Disposable Blood Pressure Transducers

(TruWave)
Edwards Lifesciences (Baxter) blood pressure transducers are available direct
from Edwards Lifesciences (Baxter) (www.edwards.com) or their suppliers.
Monitor Kit IBP Connection Cord Fixing Device

MN12030US (TW)*
MN12030UW (TW)*
59-UH4
MN12030UT (TW)* JP-920P
59-DTS-C
MP-5100 (TW)*
MP-5200 (TW)*

14. IBP MONITORING
IBP Connection Cords

The IBP connection cord connector has a memory chip for saving site label and
zero balance adjustment values. Attach the blood pressure site label of the saved
site.
JP-900P: For Becton Dickinson blood pressure transducers

JP-920P: For Edwards Lifesciences (Baxter) blood pressure transducers
JP-960P: For Biosensor blood pressure transducers
JP-910P: For other blood pressure transducers
JP-900P JP-910P JP-920P
Connector
Attach the label here.

Blood pressure site label
JP-940P IBP Connection Box

For connecting a Becton Dickinson’s Life Kit DX series disposable blood
pressure transducer to the unit. An optional TBG transducer fixing plate is
required.
TBG transducer
fixing plate (option)

14. IBP MONITORING
Installing the Blood Pressure Measuring Device

The following describes installing the DX-360 Becton Dickinson disposable
blood pressure transducer. When using other blood pressure transducers and
measuring kits, refer to the respective instruction manuals.
Typical Configuration Example

Extension tube 30 cm
Micro drip with filter Extension tube 120 cm
Roller clamp
Infusion tube 150 cm
14
IBP connection cord
Connecting Cables to the Monitor

1. Connect the blood pressure transducer to the IBP connection cord.
2. Connect the IBP connection cord to the PRESS/CO2 socket on the monitor.
NOTE
When connecting the IBP connection cord to the monitor after assembling
the transducer and filling the tubes with saline solutions, make sure that
the connector is not wet.

14. IBP MONITORING
Assembling the Transducer

NOTE
• The DX series disposable transducers are sterilized by EOG. Keep
them clean after opening.
• Check that connectors and caps are firmly connected and the 3-way
stopcock are directed to the correct way.
• The 3-way stopcocks and blood pressure tube openings are protected
from contamination by the white aerated caps. Keep these white caps
on until the solution is filled in completely. After filling the solution,
replace the white caps with the yellow sealing caps which are in the
separate bag.
1. Inject 1 to 2 units of heparin into 1 mL sterilized physiological saline

solution.
NOTE
Do not mix the solution yet.
2. Insert the needle at the tip of the micro-drip into the hole on the
physiological saline pack.
3. Pressurize the physiological saline pack with your hand by pressing the flush
cap to remove air from the pack.
4. When the solution in the micro-drip chamber is about 1/3 full (the stainless
needle is in the solution), turn the physiological saline pack upside down and
mix the physiological saline solution and heparin.
5. Place the saline pack in the pressure bag and hang the pressure bag on the
stand.
6. Press the flush cap to completely fill the tube with saline solution.
NOTE
Tap the bottom part of the micro-drip to remove air bubbles from under
the filter.

14. IBP MONITORING
7. Fill in the transducer with the saline solution. Remove air bubbles by
pressing the flush cap at above the saline pack, then bringing the flush cap
down.
If the air bubbles cannot be removed from the transducer:

i) Hold the transducer higher than the saline pack to flow the saline
solution back into the saline pack and fill the transducer again.
ii) Tap the transducer lightly and flush the transducer slowly. Do not tap
too hard because the air bubbles may break into small bubbles which are
difficult to remove.
iii) Check that there are no air bubbles in the transducer, tubes and 3-way
stopcocks.
8. Replace the white aerated caps with the yellow sealing caps.
14
9. Pressurize the pressure bag to 300 mmHg (40.0 kPa). The solution in the
micro-chip chamber is about a third to half full.
At this pressure, the drip rate should be 2 to 4 drops/min.
10. Check all connections and that there is no leakage in the circuit.
11. After about 30 minutes, check the pressure of the pressure bag and drip rate.
Also check that there is no leakage in the circuit.

14. IBP MONITORING
Adjusting Zero Balance

NOTE
There is no alarm for 30 seconds after adjusting zero balance.
Adjust zero balance in the following cases. Zero balance adjustment is important
for accurate IBP measurement.
• Before starting measurement
• When the patient moved so that the height of the heart changed
• When the height of the blood pressure transducer changes
• When changes in the measured value are expected due to measurements over
a long period of time or due to changes in the ambient temperature (check the
pressure when exposed to air)
• IBP connection cord or transducer is changed
When the zero balance is not adjusted, the “ZERO IMBALANCE” message is
displayed beside each IBP value.
The zero balance is adjusted individually for one pressure line. Touch the ZERO
CAL key on the ZERO CALIBRATION window. The ZERO CAL key can also
be assigned to one of the function keys.
When using the optional JP-940P IBP Connection Box, the zero balance keys on
the box can be used for each line.
Adjusting Zero Balance

1. When zero balance is not adjusted, the following window appears.
2. Touch the YES key to adjust zero balance. When the YES key is touched,
ZERO CALIBRATION window appears. Adjust zero balance by doing the
following steps.
When the NO key is touched, the monitor starts monitoring IBP by using the
zero balance value memorized in the connector of the IBP connection cord
and the “ZERO IMBALANCE” messages disappear. The IBP values appear
on the screen. If necessary, adjust zero balance by doing the following steps.
3. Move the dome up or down so that the 3-way stopcock on the transducer is
at the level of the right atrium of the patient and open the air release opening
of the 3-way stopcock to air.

14. IBP MONITORING
Heart
When measuring the intracranial pressure, adjust the 3-way stopcock of the
catheter to the level of the ventricle and open the air release opening of the
3-way stopcock to air.
4. Perform zero balance adjustment.

i) Display the ZERO CALIBRATION window.
Touch Menu key → PRESS key → ZERO CALIBRATION key.
ii) Touch the ZERO CAL key.

14
When the “ZEROING COMPLETE” message is displayed, zero balance

adjustment is completed.
5. Close the 3-way stopcock.
After adjusting zero balance and closing the 3-way stopcock, IBP is ready to be
measured. The IBP value and blood pressure waveform appear on the screen.
Memorizing the Zero Balance Values

The zero values are saved in memory in the connector of the IBP connection cord
when zero balance is performed. Therefore, you don’t need to adjust the zero
balance again when connecting the IBP connection cord to the different socket.

14. IBP MONITORING
Monitoring IBP
When the 3-way stopcock is closed after zero balance, you can start IBP
monitoring.
IBP Information on the Home Screen

The blood pressure waveform and scale correspond to the color of the IBP values
displayed.
Pulse rate (appears when

sync sound source is set to
PRESS)
IBP values
Systolic/Diastolic
(Mean) or Mean
IBP waveform Scale of IBP waveforms

14. IBP MONITORING
Changing IBP Settings
Change settings on the IBP window. The following settings can be changed for
monitoring IBP.
• IBP alarm limits
• Scale
• Sync source
• Sync sound pitch
• Adjust zero balance. Refer to the “Adjusting Zero Balance” section.
• Numeric data display mode
• Label
• PPV/SPV display on or off
The pressure unit (mmHg or kPa) can be set on the SYSTEM

CONFIGURATION screen. Refer to Section 2 of the Administrator’s Guide.
The noise filter, IBP calculation mode and IBP data display color can be set on
the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
The IBP waveform sweep speed can be selected on the DISPLAY/SOUND

window. Refer to Section 3.
Changing the IBP and Pulse Rate Alarm Limits 14
CAUTION
limit. Depending on the setting, the alarm off mark might not be
displayed on the screen. Be careful when you set the alarm limit to
OFF.
You can set the upper and lower systolic, diastolic and mean IBP alarm limits
and pulse rate alarm limits of the blood pressure on the PRESS window. You
can set all alarms, including the upper and lower IBP alarm limits and pulse rate
alarm limits, on the ALARM LIMITS window (See the Operator’s Manual or
Section 5 of the User’s Guide). The pulse rate alarm limits can also be changed
on the SpO2 window.
Setting Range
IBP upper limit: –48 to 300 mmHg in 2 mmHg steps (–6.0 to 40.0 kPa in 0.5 kPa
steps), OFF
(default setting: SYS: OFF
DIA: OFF
MEAN: OFF)

14. IBP MONITORING
IBP lower limit: OFF, –50 to 298 mmHg in 2 mmHg steps (–6.5 to 39.5 kPa in
0.5 kPa steps)
(default setting: SYS: OFF
DIA: OFF
MEAN: OFF)
HR/PR upper limit: When <SYNC SOURCE> is set to ECG:
NEONATE-200)
HR/PR lower limit: When <SYNC SOURCE> is set to ECG:
NEONATE-100)
1. Display the PRESS window.

Touch Menu key → PRESS key.
2. Touch the SYS key to change the systolic alarm setting.

Touch the DIA key to change the diastolic alarm setting.
Touch the MEAN key to change the mean alarm setting.
Touch the HR/PR key to change the heart rate/pulse rate alarm setting.
Selected parameter
Upper limit slider
Upper limit
Lower limit
Lower limit slider Setting bar

14. IBP MONITORING
Changing the Scale

The scale can be changed for easy monitoring of the blood pressure waveform.
1. Display the SCALE window.

Touch Menu key → PRESS key → SCALE key.
2. Select the scale by touching the desired scale key. Use the sliders to adjust
the scale.
Or, touch the ADJUST key to automatically select to the appropriate scale
for the displayed waveform.
14
Slider

14. IBP MONITORING

as the sync source. The sync source can also be changed on the ECG and SpO2
windows.
select ECG.
NOTE
PRESS.
when the alarm is silenced by touching the Silence Alarms key. The
balance.
PR.
sound.
When SpO2 or PRESS is selected, the pulse rate is displayed to the left of the
heart rate on the screen and the sync mark synchronizes with the pulse.
1. Display the SYNC SOURCE window.

Touch Menu key → PRESS key → SYNC SOURCE key.

14. IBP MONITORING
2. Select the sync source.

ECG: QRS
PRESS: Pulse wave of the arterial blood pressure
(The labels for the arterial blood pressure are ART, RAD, DORS,
AO, FEM, UA, LVP, and PRESS.)
SpO2: SpO2 pulse
Selecting Sync Sound Pitch

The sync sound can be variable pitch or fixed pitch pips. The fixed pitch is high
pitch as the default, but medium or low pitch can also be set on the SYSTEM
SETUP window (see Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide). When you select
variable pitch, the pitch of the sync sound changes according to SpO2 value or
systolic BP value of the arterial blood pressure so that you can recognize the 14
change on the patient from the pitch of the sync sound without looking at the
monitor. The sync pitch can also be changed on the ECG and SpO2 windows.
When the sync sound source is set to SpO2 and the SpO2 value is below
81%SpO2, the low pitch is automatically selected.
When the sync sound source is set to SpO2 and the “CHECK PROBE” or
“DETECTING PULSE” message is displayed on the screen, the sync sound
stops.
When the sync sound source is set to ECG or PRESS, the sync pitch is set
to SpO2 and the SpO2 cannot be displayed on the screen, the low pitch is
automatically selected.
When the sync sound source is set to ECG or SpO2, the sync pitch is set
to PRESS and the IBP cannot be displayed on the screen, the low pitch is
automatically selected.
When the sync sound source is set to ECG or SpO2 and the IBP connection cord
is disconnected, the low pitch is automatically selected. After connecting the IBP
connection cord, adjust zero balance.

14. IBP MONITORING
1. Display the SYNC PITCH window.

Touch Menu key → PRESS key → SYNC PITCH key.
2. Select the sync sound pitch.

FIXED: The pitch is fixed to the pitch selected on the SYSTEM SETUP
window.
PRESS: The pitch is high when the BP value is above 120 mmHg. The
pitch is low when the BP value is below 20 mmHg. The pitch
changes from high to low in 20 steps for each 5 mmHg change
between 120 and 20 mmHg BP value. The BP value of the highest
priority arterial blood pressure is used.
SpO2: The pitch changes with each 1% change in SpO2. You can select
the SpO2 range (81 to 100% or 40 to 100%) on the SYSTEM

14. IBP MONITORING
Selecting the Data Display Mode on the Home Screen

The displaying mode of the IBP/ICP values can be selected for the home screen.
SYS/DIA/(MEAN): Displays the systolic blood pressure (SYS), diastolic blood

pressure (DIA) and the averaged blood pressure (MEAN).
MEAN: Displays only the averaged blood pressure.
1. Display the NUMERIC DISPLAY window.

Touch Menu key → PRESS key → NUMERIC DISPLAY key.
2. Select display mode.

14

14. IBP MONITORING
Changing the Label

At shipment, the blood pressure lines are labeled as PRESS. You can use this
label, but it is recommended to label the site properly for proper processing of
the waveform.
The labels are saved in memory in the connector of the IBP connection cord.
Once the label is set, you don’t need to set the label again when the IBP
connection cord is connected to a different socket.
If the IBP connection cord whose label is set by another monitor and which the
label is not used on this monitor is connected to this monitor, the label appears
from PRESS.
Setting labels is important for the following reasons.

• Prevents confusion of the blood pressure lines
• Measures the PCWP (Pulmonary Capillary Wedge Pressure) from the PAP
(Pulmonary Artery Pressure)
• Lists the ART-MEAN (Arterial Mean Pressure), PAP-MEAN (Pulmonary
Arterial Mean Pressure), and CVP (Central Venous Mean Pressure) values in
the hemodynamics list
• Calculates CPP (Cerebral Perfusion Pressure) from the ICP (Intracranial
Pressure) and the highest priority arterial blood pressure value when measuring
the ICP
• The display area of the blood pressure line measured is determined by the
priority of the labels.
• The pulse rate is counted according to the priority of the blood pressure labels.
Types of Labels
There are 15 labels.
ART: Arterial Pressure

RAD: Radial Artery Pressure
DORS: Dorsal Artery Pressure
AO: Aortic Pressure
FEM: Femoral Artery Pressure
UA: Umbilical Artery Pressure
UV: Umbilical Venous Pressure
PAP: Pulmonary Artery Pressure
CVP: Central Venous Pressure
RAP: Right Atrial Pressure
RVP: Right Ventricular Pressure
LAP: Left Atrial Pressure
LVP: Left Ventricular Pressure
ICP: Intracranial Pressure
PRESS: Others

14. IBP MONITORING
Changing the Labels

1. Display the LABEL page of the PRESS window.
Press the [Menu] key → PRESS key → LABEL tab.
2. Select the label appropriate for the blood pressure line.
14
3. Attach the blood pressure site label to the connector of the IBP connection
Attach the label here.
cord.
4. Press the Home key to return to the home screen.

14. IBP MONITORING
Displaying PPV or SPV on the Home Screen

Selecting PPV or SPV Display on the Home Screen
PPV (pulse pressure variability) or SPV (systolic pressure variability) of the IBP
can be displayed on the home screen.
PPV indicates the variability of the difference between systolic and diastolic
pressure in one beat in the respiration cycle. PPV is calculated from the
following equation.
PPV = PPmax – PPmin

(PPmax + PPmin) / 2
PP: instantaneous systolic pressure in one beat – instantaneous diastolic

pressure in one beat
PPmax: maximum PP in one respiration cycle
PPmin: minimum PP in one respiration cycle
SPV indicates the variability of systolic pressure in the respiration cycle. SPV is
calculated from the following equation.
SPV = SPmax – SPmin

(SPmax + SPmin) / 2
SP: instantaneous systolic pressure in one beat

SPmax: maximum SP in one respiration cycle
SPmin: minimum SP in one respiration cycle
NOTE
• PPV or SPV of IBP of arterial blood pressure (ART, RAD, DORS, AO,
FEM, or PRESS) is displayed. LVP and UA are not available.
• When PPV or SPV cannot be measured or is out of measuring range,
“- - -”is displayed for PPV or SPV.
• PPV or SPV is accurately measured when the patient is using a
ventilator and when there is no patient movement and no arrhythmias.
In the following cases, PPV or SPV is not accurate or cannot be
measured.
- Patient movement
- Spontaneous respiration
- Arrhythmia
- Respiration rate less than 6 counts/min
- Ventilation volume less than 8 mL/kg
- Acute right heart failure

14. IBP MONITORING
1. Display the PPV/SPV DISPLAY window.

Touch Menu key → PRESS key → PPV/SPV DISPLAY key.
2. Select PPV, SPV or OFF.
14

Section 15 Temperature Monitoring
General............................................................................................................................................................... 15.2
Preparing for Temperature Monitoring................................................................................................................ 15.3
Selecting the Probe.................................................................................................................................. 15.3
Reusable Probes............................................................................................................................ 15.3
Disposable Probes......................................................................................................................... 15.4
Connecting Cables and Attaching the Probe........................................................................................... 15.5
Connecting Cable to the Monitor.................................................................................................... 15.5
Attaching the Probe to the Patient................................................................................................. 15.5
Using the Insulation Pad................................................................................................................ 15.5
Monitoring Temperature...................................................................................................................................... 15.6
Temperature Information on the Home Screen........................................................................................ 15.6
Changing Temperature Settings......................................................................................................................... 15.7
Changing the Temperature Alarm Limits.................................................................................................. 15.7
15

15. TEMPERATURE MONITORING
General
To monitor temperature, attach the probe to the patient and connect the probe to
the TEMP socket on the monitor.
NOTE
The monitor simulates the temperature signal of 27°C and 37°C (80.6 and
98.6°F) inside the monitor. Monitoring this simulated signal periodically,
the monitor self-diagnoses the temperature signal processor part of the
monitor. When the monitor could not cover the 0 to 45°C (32 to 113°F)
measurement range, a “MPU MODULE ERROR” message is displayed.

Preparing for Temperature Monitoring
1. Select the probe.
2. Connect the probe to the TEMP socket on the monitor.
3. Attach the probe to the patient.
4. Start monitoring and change necessary settings.
Selecting the Probe

Select the appropriate probe according to the purpose.
CAUTION CAUTION
Select the appropriate probe for the patient. The insulation pad may irritate the skin. In long
Using adult probes on premature infants and term monitoring, change the attachment site to
children may injure the mucous membrane. prevent irritation.
Reusable Probes
Thermistor Probe Purpose

401J comes with a probe cover**
15
401J*
For adult rectum/

esophagus
402J* 409J comes with an insulation pad**
For child rectum/

esophagus
409J*
For body surface
* These thermistor probes are available direct from ** These parts have not been checked for compliance with
YSI, Yellow Springs Instrument Inc., Yellow the MDD (Medical Device Directive). For EC member

Springs Ohio 45387, USA; Phone +1 937-767- countries, Nihon Kohden recommends the use of parts that
7241. comply with MDD.

Disposable Probes
The following probes can be used on this monitor. To use the disposable probes,
the 5-15801 extension cable is required.
The disposable probes and the extension cable are available direct from Kendall
Healthcare Products Company (www.kendallhq.com) or their suppliers.
5-15801 extension cable

CAUTION
Do not reuse disposable probes on other patients.
Disposable Probe Thickness Purpose

5-13212* 12F
Sonatemp 5-13218* 18F For esophagus
5-13224* 24F
5-15610* 18F For esophagus/rectum
Sheritemp 5-16201* — For body surface
5-26101* — For tympanic membrane
5-18808* 8F
5-18810* 10F
5-18812* 12F
Foley catheter For bladder
5-18814* 14F
5-18816* 16F
5-18818* 18F
* These parts have not been checked for compliance with the MDD (Medical
Device Directive). For EC member countries, Nihon Kohden recommends the
use of parts that comply with MDD.

Connecting Cables and Attaching the Probe

Connecting Cable to the Monitor
Connect the probe to the TEMP socket.
When using the disposable probe, connect the extension cable between the probe
and TEMP socket.
When connecting the 409J reusable probe for

the body surface
Attaching the Probe to the Patient

Attach the probe to the patient by referring to the manual provided with the
probe.
CAUTION
Select the appropriate probe for the patient. Using adult probes on
premature infants and children may injure the mucous membrane. 15
NOTE
When the measuring site is exposed directly to air, the temperature
may be lower than normal. It takes about 20 to 30 minutes to reach the
equilibrium temperature after attaching the sensor.
Using the Insulation Pad

The pad prevents the environmental temperature from affecting the sensor
temperature and also prevents internal body heat from escaping at the attached
site so that a stable temperature is obtained.

Monitoring Temperature
After completing the preparation, temperature data appears on the screen.
Temperature Information on the Home Screen
Temperature

Changing Temperature Settings
Change settings on the TEMP window. The temperature alarm limits can be
changed for monitoring temperature.
The temperature unit can be set to °C or °F on the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

The temperature data display color can be set on the SYSTEM SETUP window.
Refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
Changing the Temperature Alarm Limits
CAUTION
You can set the upper and lower temperature alarm limits on the TEMP window.
You can set all alarms, including the upper and lower temperature alarm limits,
on the ALARM LIMITS window (See the Operator’s Manual or Section 5 of the
User’s Guide).
Setting Range
Temperature upper limit: 0.1 to 45.0°C in 0.1°C steps (33 to 113°F in 1°F 15
steps), OFF (default setting: ADULT: 38.0°C (100°F),
CHILD: 38.5°C (101°F), NEONATE: 39.0°C (102°F))
Temperature lower limit: OFF, 0.0 to 44.9 in 0.1°C steps (32 to 112°F in 1°F
steps) (default setting: OFF)
1. Display the TEMP window.

Touch Menu key → TEMP key.

2. Touch the TEMP key to set the alarm limit.

Selected parameter
Upper limit slider
Upper limit
Lower limit
Current value of the Setting bar Lower limit slider

selected parameter

Section 16 Reference
Clock Accuracy................................................................................................................................................... 16.2

Periodical Replacement Schedule...................................................................................................................... 16.3
Repair Parts Availability Policy........................................................................................................................... 16.3
16

16. REFERENCE
Clock Accuracy
At an operating temperature of 25°C (77°F), the accuracy of the clock IC of this

monitor is about ±3 min 30 s per month.
At storage temperatures between –20 and +60°C (–4 and +140°F), the accuracy
of the clock IC of this monitor is about ±6 min per month.
Periodically check that the time in the upper right corner of the monitor screen is
correct.
To change the time setting, refer to “Changing Date and Time” in Section 3.
NOTE
When the date or time is changed during monitoring, the date and time of
all stored data is also changed and may not match the date and time on
the printout.

16. REFERENCE
Periodical Replacement Schedule
To maintain the performance of the instrument, the following parts must be

periodically replaced.
Description Model/Code No. Expected Life Span

Battery pack (option) SB-201P Approx. 1 year
WS-201P Recorder Module (option)
Approx. 370 stacks of recording
paper
Thermal array head, After 370 stacks of recording
662311A
AJ048-8E802 paper, the thermal array head is
deteriorated and the recording
becomes thin.
Approx. 9,000 stacks of
recording paper (continuous
recording)
Motor Assy
CD-0004 After 9,000 stacks of recording
(Paper drive motor)
paper, the paper drive motor is
deteriorated and cannot feed the
recording paper.
Approx. 6 years
RG-501X magazine
When the platen roller is
assy YS-086P9
deteriorated, the paper cannot
(Platen roller, Ø 8)
be fed.
Must be replaced with a
Recording paper model
6124-902356 new one when the RG-501X
label (FQW50-2-100)
magazine assy is replaced.
16
Repair Parts Availability Policy
Nihon Kohden Corporation (NKC) shall stock repair parts (parts necessary to
maintain the performance of the instrument) for a period of 8 years from the
date of delivery. In that period NKC or its authorized agents will repair the
instrument. This period may be shorter than 8 years if the board or part necessary
for the faulty section is not available.

Manufacturer
NIHON KOHDEN CORPORATION NIHON KOHDEN ITALIA S.r.l.
1-31-4 Nishiochiai, Shinjuku-ku Tokyo 161-8560, Japan Via Fratelli Bronzetti 28, 24124 Bergamo, Italy
Phone + 81 3- 5996 -8036 Phone + 39 035-219543
Fax + 81 3- 5996-8100 Fax + 39 035-232546
NIHON KOHDEN UK LTD

North and South America Trident Court 118, 1 Oakcroft Road
Chessington, Surrey KT9 1BD, UK
Phone +44 20-8391-6800
NIHON KOHDEN AMERICA, INC. Fax +44 20-8391-6809
15353 Barranca Parkway, Irvine, CA 92618, U.S.A.
Toll-free +1-800-325-0283
Phone +1 949- 580 -1555 Asia
Fax +1 949- 580-1550
NIHON KOHDEN LATIN AMERICA S.A.S SHANGHAI KOHDEN

Carrera 16 No.93A-36 Of. 802. Bogota D.C., Colombia MEDICAL ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT CORP.
Phone + 57 1- 300 -1742 567 Huancheng Bei Road
Fax + 57 1- 300 -1825 Shanghai Comprehensive Industrial Development Zone
Shanghai 201401, China
NIHON KOHDEN DO BRASIL LTDA. Phone +86 21-5743-6998
Rua Gomes de Carvalho Fax +86 21-5743-6939
1507-Bloco A 9 andar-cjto 91A Vila Olimpia
CEP 04547-005 Sao Paulo-SP. Brasil NIHON KOHDEN SINGAPORE PTE LTD
Phone + 55 11-3841-9943 1 Maritime Square, #10-34 HarbourFront Centre
Fax + 55 11-3044-0463 Singapore 099253
Phone +65 6376-2210
Fax +65 6376-2264
Europe
NIHON KOHDEN INDIA PVT. LTD.
308, Tower A, Spazedge, Sector 47, Sohna Road
European Representative
Gurgaon-122 002 Haryana, India
NIHON KOHDEN EUROPE GmbH Toll-free +91 1800-103-8182
Raiffeisenstrasse 10, D-61191 Rosbach, Germany Phone +91 124-493-1000
Phone +49 6003- 827-0 Fax +91 124-493-1029
Fax + 49 6003- 827-599
NIHON KOHDEN MIDDLE EAST FZE
NIHON KOHDEN FRANCE SARL P.O.Box 261516, JAFZA View 19
8, rue Francois Delage, 94 230 Cachan, France Room 308 Jebel Ali Free Zone, Dubai, U.A.E
Phone + 33 1- 49-08 -05 -50 Phone +971 4- 884-0080
Fax + 33 1- 49- 08-93 -32 Fax +971 4- 880-0122
NIHON KOHDEN IBERICA S.L. NIHON KOHDEN KOREA, INC.

C/Ulises 75A, E-28043 Madrid, Spain 5F Miso Bldg.
Phone + 34 91- 7-161080 890-47 Daechi-dong, Gangnam-gu, Seoul, 135-280 Korea
Fax + 34 91- 3- 004676 Phone + 82 2-3273-2310
Fax +82 2-3273-2352
Contact information is accurate as of Jan 2015. Visit www.nihonkohden.com for the latest information.
The model and serial number of your instrument are identified on the rear or bottom of the unit.
Write the model and serial number in the spaces provided below. Whenever you call your representative concerning
this instrument, mention these two pieces of information for quick and accurate service.
Model Serial Number
Your Representative

35 Monitor de Signos Vitales Nihon Kohden PVM 2703 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

35 Monitor de Signos Vitales Nihon Kohden PVM 2703 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

35 Monitor de Signos Vitales Nihon Kohden PVM 2703 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User’s Guide

The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.

GENERAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................. i 3

Section 1 General.................................................................................... 1.1 10

Section 2 Preparation............................................................................. 2.1

User’s Guide PVM-2700 C.1

Section 3 Necessary Settings Before Monitoring................................ 3.1

Section 4 Home Screen.......................................................................... 4.1

C.2 User’s Guide PVM-2700

Waveform Sensitivity.................................................................................... 4.8 1

User’s Guide PVM-2700 C.3

Arrhythmia Alarms...................................................................................... 5.17

Section 6 Review Windows.................................................................... 6.1

C.4 User’s Guide PVM-2700

Scrolling the NIBP Trend Table................................................................... 6.12 1

User’s Guide PVM-2700 C.5

Section 7 Interbed Window.................................................................... 7.1

Section 8 Recording............................................................................... 8.1

Section 9 ECG Monitoring...................................................................... 9.1

Connecting the Electrode Cable to the Monitor............................................ 9.7 1

Section 10 Respiration Monitoring........................................................ 10.1

User’s Guide PVM-2700 C.7

Section 11 CO2 Monitoring..................................................................... 11.1

Section 12 SpO2 Monitoring................................................................... 12.1

C.8 User’s Guide PVM-2700

Selecting the Response Mode............................................................................ 12.14 1

Section 13 NIBP Monitoring................................................................... 13.1 4

User’s Guide PVM-2700 C.9

Section 14 IBP Monitoring..................................................................... 14.1

Section 15 Temperature Monitoring...................................................... 15.1

C.10 User’s Guide PVM-2700

Section 16 Reference.............................................................................. 16.1 1

User’s Guide PVM-2700 C.11

2. When installing or storing the instrument, take the following precautions:

5. To Shutdown After Use

7. The instrument must not be altered or modified in any way.

8. Maintenance and Inspection

User’s Guide PVM-2700 i

ii User’s Guide PVM-2700

3. Effect of direct or indirect electrostatic discharge:

6. Use with other equipment:

7. Use of unspecified accessory, transducer and/or cable:

User’s Guide PVM-2700 iii

9. Measurement with excessive sensitivity:

iv User’s Guide PVM-2700

Warnings, Cautions and Notes

Text Conventions in this Manual

User’s Guide PVM-2700 v

Symbol Description Symbol Description

“Off” only for a part of instrument High voltage

Symbol Description Symbol Description

Alarm suspended Checking SD card

All alarm off SD card failure

Out of paper NIBP

Record NIBP interval

Menu NIBP start

Home NIBP stop

Non-paced Adjust setting/Scroll data

QRS/pulse sync mark Zoom in/Zoom out

*1 OCRG key is available when the patient type is NEONATE.